Canon NP6330 Service manual

SERVICE
MANUAL
REVISION 0
MAY 1997
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
FY8-13EZ-000
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
IMPORTANT
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE OF
REFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD.
SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY FROM
ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED
MATTER.
ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO
THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED FOR ALL SALES AREAS, AND MAY CONTAIN
INFORMATION NOT APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN AREAS.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
Imprimé au Japon
Use of this manual should be
strictly supervised to avoid
disclosure of confidential
information.
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPT. 1
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIV.
CANON INC.
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302, Japan
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
INTRODUCTION
This Service Manual provides the basic facts and figures about the plain paper
copier NP6330 needed for servicing it in the field.
The NP6330 is designed to enable full automation of copying work, and may be
configured with various accessories.
(For detailed descriptions of sorters, ADFs, RDFs, and controllers, see their
respective Service Manuals.)
This Service Manual covers the NP6330 and the pedestal, and is organized as
follows:
Chapter 1 General Description introduces the copier’s features and specifications,
shows how to operate the copier, and explains how copies are made.
Chapter 2 Operations And Timing discusses how the functions of the mahine
work and provides outlines of electric circuitry and sequence of operations.
Chapter 3 Exposure System discusses the principles of operation used for the
copier’s lens drive unit and scanner drive unit. It also explains the timing at which
these drive units are operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assembled
and adjusted.
Chapter 4 Image Formation System discusses the principles of how images are
formed. It also explains the timing at which the various units involved in image
formation are operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assembled and
adjusted.
Chapter 5 Pick-Up/Feeding System explains the principles used from when copy
paper is picked up to when a copy is delivered in view of the functions of electrical and
mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these
units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 6 Fixing System explains the principles used to fuse toner images to
transfer media in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation
to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be
disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 7 Controls And Externals shows the copier’s external parts, and explains
the principles used for the copier’s various control mechanisms in view of the functions
of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also
shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 8 Paper Deck Pedestal explains the principles of operation of the paper
deck pedestal in view of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing
of operation. It also shows how the unit may be disassembled/assembled and
adjusted.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
i
Chapter 9 Installation introduces requirements for the site of installation, and
shows how the copier may be installed using step-by-step instructions.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection provides tables of periodically replaced
parts and consumables/durables and scheduled servicing charts.
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting provides tables of maintenance/inspection,
standards/adjustments, and problem identification (image fault/malfunction).
Appendix contains a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.
1.
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and
the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the
timing of operation.
In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive—where a
signal name accompanies the symbol
, the arrow indicates the direction
of the electric signal.
The expression “turn on the power” means flipping on the power switch, closing
the front door, and closing the delivery door, which results in supplying the copier
with power.
2. In the digital circuits, ‘1’ is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal
is “High,” while ‘0’ is used to indicate “Low.” (The voltage value, however, differs
from circuit to circuit.)
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be
checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the
copiers are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input
of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the
loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for
product improvement or other reasons, and major changes will be communicated in
the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of
this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to
identify and isolate faults in the copier.
ii
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
System Configuration
The NP6330 may be configured with the following accessory:
ADF-E1
Feeds a stack of originals one by
one to the copyboard for copying.
Sorter-E1
Automatically sorts (page
collation) and groups up to 20
sets of copies.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Stapler Sorter-D2/MS-B1
Automatically sorts (page
collation) and groups up to 10
sets of copies.
In addition to sorter functions,
is equipped with stapler sorter
functions which automatically
staple sorted copies. (Not
applicable to MS-B1.)
RDF-F1
Feeds a stack of originals one by
one to the copyboard for copying.
In addition, automatically turns
over each two-sided original.
Paper Deck Pedestal-M1
(1 paper deck)
Adds 1500 sheets of
paper.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
iii
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I.
II.
III.
IV.
FEATURES.........................................1-1
SPECIFICATIONS ..............................1-2
A. Copier ............................................1-2
1. Type..........................................1-2
2. System .....................................1-2
3. Performance .............................1-3
B. Paper Deck Pedestal-M1 ..............1-8
NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-9
A. Exterior View .................................1-9
B. Cross Section ................................1-11
1. Body Cross Section..................1-11
2. Paper Deck Pedestal-M1 .........1-12
OPERATION.......................................1-13
A. Control Panel (AB/Inch).................1-13
B. Control Panel (Inch) ......................1-14
C. User Mode .....................................1-17
1. Specifications ...........................1-17
2. Adjustment/Cleaning ................1-19
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
BY THE USER ...................................1-20
VI. IMAGE FORMATION..........................1-21
A. Outline ...........................................1-21
B. Static Latent Image Formation
Block..............................................1-23
C. Pre-Exposure (step 1) ...................1-23
D. Primary Charging (step 2) .............1-24
E. Image Exposure (step 3) ...............1-24
F. Development (step 4) ....................1-25
G. Transfer (step 5) ............................1-26
H. Separation (step 6)........................1-27
I. Fixing (step 7)................................1-28
J. Drum Cleaning (step 8) .................1-28
VII. AUXILIARY PROCESS ......................1-29
A. Blank Exposure .............................1-29
V.
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
I.
BASIC OPERATION...........................2-1
A. Functional Construction.................2-1
B. Outline of the
Electrical Circuitry..........................2-2
C. Basic Sequence ............................2-4
1. Basic Sequence of Operation ..2-4
D. Controlling the Main Motor ............2-6
1. Outline ......................................2-6
2. Operation..................................2-6
E. Inputs to the DC Controller............2-8
1. Input to the
DC Controller (1/5) ...................2-8
2. Input to the
DC Controller (2/5) ...................2-9
3. Input to the
DC Controller (3/5) ...................2-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
4. Input to the
DC Controller (4/5) ...................2-11
5. Input to the
DC Controller (5/5) ...................2-12
F. Outputs from the DC Controller.....2-13
1. Output from the
DC Controller (1/5) ...................2-13
2. Output from the
DC Controller (2/5) ...................2-14
3. Output from the
DC Controller (3/5) ...................2-15
4. Output from the
DC Controller (4/5) ...................2-16
5. Output from the
DC Controller (5/5) ...................2-17
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the
Accessories (1/1)...........................2-18
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
v
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I.
II.
III.
IV.
BASIC OPERATION ...........................3-1
A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio.....3-1
LENS DRIVE SYSTEM ......................3-2
A. Movement of the Lens...................3-2
1. Outline ......................................3-2
2. Lens Motor Drive Circuit...........3-4
3. Focusing ...................................3-5
SCANNER DRIVE MECHANISM .......3-6
A. Driving the Scanner.......................3-6
1. Outline ......................................3-6
2. Scanning Motor Control Circuit..3-7
3. Relationship between Scanner
Sensor and Signals ..................3-10
4. Sequence of Scanner
Movements (Enlarge/Reduce) ..3-10
5. Sequence of Scanner
Movements (page separation
mode, 2 copies)........................3-11
OTHERS.............................................3-13
V.
A. Controlling the Detection of
Original Sizes.................................3-13
1. Outline ......................................3-13
2. Operation..................................3-15
3. Identifying the Size of Originals ..3-16
4. Identifying the Size of Originals
by the Document Feeder..........3-17
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......3-19
A. Scanner Drive Assembly ...............3-19
1. Removing the Scanner Motor ..3-19
2. Outline of the Scanner
Drive Cable...............................3-20
3. Removing the Scanner
Drive Cable...............................3-21
4. Routing the Scanner Cable ......3-26
B. Lens Drive Assembly.....................3-30
1. Removing the Lens Motor ........3-30
2. Attaching the Lens Drive Belt...3-31
3. Removing the Lens hood ..........3-32
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
I.
vi
PROCESSES .....................................4-1
A. Outline ...........................................4-1
B. Basic Sequence of Operations
(image formation) ..........................4-2
C. Controlling the Scanner Lamp.......4-3
1. Outline ......................................4-3
2. Turning On and Off the
Scanning Lamp ........................4-4
3. Detecting the Activation of the
Scanning Lamp ........................4-4
4. Protection Mechanism..............4-4
D. Controlling the Primary/
Transfer Corona Current
and the Grid Bias ..........................4-5
1. Outline ......................................4-5
2. Controlling the Primary/Transfer
Corona Current.........................4-6
3. Keeping the Primary/Transfer
Corona Current at a Specific
Level .........................................4-7
4. Turning On and Off the
Grid Bias...................................4-8
E. Controlling the Static Eliminator
Bias/Fixing Roller Bias ..................4-9
1. Outline ......................................4-9
2. Turning ON/OFF the Static
Eliminator Bias/Fixing Bias.......4-10
3. Switching the Output of the
Static Eliminating Bias..............4-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
II.
4. Preventing Separation Faults
(thin paper picked up from
the multifeeder) .......................4-10
F. Controlling the Developing Bias ....4-11
1. Outline ......................................4-11
2. Turning On and Off DC
Component of the Developing
Bias and Controlling the
Voltage Level............................4-12
3. Turning On and Off the AC
Component of the
Developing Bias .......................4-13
4. Sequence of Operations
(developing bias) .....................4-13
G. Controlling Blank Exposure ...........4-14
1. Outline ......................................4-14
2. Operation..................................4-15
3. Controlling the Slide Shutters...4-15
H. Mesuring the Density of
Originals ........................................4-16
1. Outline ......................................4-16
2. Operation..................................4-17
3. AE Adjustment..........................4-18
I. Cleaning the Transfer Charging
Wire ...............................................4-19
1. Outline ......................................4-19
2. Operation..................................4-19
DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY/
DRUM CLEANER...............................4-21
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
III.
A. Outline ...........................................4-21
B. Detecting the Level of Toner and
Controlling the Supply ...................4-23
C. Stopping the Hopper Motor in
Response to a Rotation Error........4-24
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......4-25
A. Scanning Lamp Assembly.............4-25
1. Removing the Scanning Lamp ...4-25
2. Orientation of the Scanning
Lamp ........................................4-26
3. Removing the Thermal Fuse....4-27
B. Blank Exposure Lamp Assembly ..4-28
1. Removing the Blank Exposure
Lamp Assembly........................4-28
2. Removing the Blank Exposure
Lamp ........................................4-30
3. Removing the Blank Shutter
Solenoid ...................................4-31
4. Adjusting the Position of the
Blank Shutter Solenoid.............4-32
5. Removing the Blank Shutter
Motor ........................................4-33
6. Routing the Blank Shutter
Cable ........................................4-33
C. Drum Unit ......................................4-34
1. Removing the Drum Unit..........4-34
2. Cleaning ...................................4-35
D. Charging Assembly .......................4-36
1. Removing the Primary
Charging Assembly ..................4-36
2. Removing the Transfer
Charging Assembly ..................4-37
3. Stringing the Primary/
Transfer Charging Wire ............4-37
4. Stringing the Guide Wire ..........4-41
5. Adjusting the Height of the
Charging Wire ..........................4-41
E. Developing System .......................4-42
1. Removing the Developing
Assembly ..................................4-42
2. Removing the Blade .................4-43
3. Removing the Magnetic Seal
(developing cylinder) ...............4-44
4. Installing the Magnetic Seal
and the Blade ...........................4-47
5. Installing the Electrode
Positioning Plate.......................4-48
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1
A. Outline ...........................................5-1
PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE .....5-3
A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-3
1. Outline ......................................5-3
2. Sequence of Pick-Up
Operations ................................5-5
B. Movement of the Cassette Lifter ...5-6
C. Identifying the Size of
Copy Paper ...................................5-8
1. Outline ......................................5-8
2. Identifying the Size of Copy
Paper ........................................5-8
3. Markings on the Width Guide
Rail ...........................................5-10
4. Paper Size................................5-11
5. Registering Paper Width Basic
Values.......................................5-12
PICK-UP FROM THE
MULTIFEEDER...................................5-13
A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-13
1. Outline ......................................5-13
2. Identifying the Size of Paper
on the Multifeeder ....................5-14
3. Sequence of Multifeeder
Pick-Up Operation ....................5-15
CONTROLLING THE
REGISTRATION CLUTCH .................5-16
TWO-SIDED COPYING .....................5-18
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
A. Making Two-Sided Copies.............5-18
1. Outline ......................................5-18
2. Operations ................................5-19
B. Lower Feeding Assembly ..............5-20
1. Outline ......................................5-20
2. Set-Back Operation ..................5-22
3. Sequence of Set-back
Operation..................................5-26
4. Re-Pick Up ...............................5-27
5. Sequence of Re-Pick-up
Operation..................................5-29
C. Horizontal Registration ..................5-30
1. Outline ......................................5-30
2. Operation..................................5-31
3. Sequence of Operatiion ...........5-33
VI. DETECTING JAMS ............................5-34
A. Outline ...........................................5-34
VII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......5-45
A. Pick-Up Assembly .........................5-46
1. Construction .............................5-46
2. Removing the Pick-Up
Assembly ..................................5-47
3. Removing the Pick-Up Roller ...5-48
4. Points to Note When Installing
the Pick-Up Roller ....................5-49
5. Removing the Feeding Roller...5-49
6. Removing the Separation
Roller ........................................5-51
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
vii
7. Adjusting the Pressure of the
Separation Roller......................5-53
8. Positioning the Pick-Up Assembly
Pick-Up Roller Releasing
Solenoid (SL1, SL2) .................5-53
9. Releasing the Lifter ..................5-54
10.Adjusting the Registration
(left/right) ..................................5-55
B. Multifeeder Assembly ....................5-56
1. Removing the Multifeeder
Assembly ..................................5-56
2. Removing the Multifeeder PickUp Roller/Separation Pad ........5-56
3. Adjusting the Pressure on the
Separation Pad.........................5-58
4. Adjusting the Left/Right
Registration ..............................5-58
5. Adjusting the Paper Guide Plate
Cam (multifeeder assembly) ....5-59
6. Routing the Timing Belt
(multifeeder assembly) .............5-59
C. Registration Roller Assembly ........5-60
1. Removing the Registration
Roller ........................................5-60
D. Feeding Assembly .........................5-62
1. Removing the Feeding
Assembly ..................................5-62
2. Removing the Feeding Belt......5-63
3. Removing the Feeding Fan......5-67
E. Lower Feeding Assembly ..............5-68
1. Removing the Lower Feeding
Assembly ..................................5-68
2. Attaching the Lower Feeding
Assembly ..................................5-70
3. Removing the Set-Back Roller ..5-71
4. Removing the Lower Feeder
Outlet Roller .............................5-72
5. Removing the Lower Feeder
Inlet Roller ................................5-73
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
I.
II.
III.
IV.
viii
OPERATION.......................................6-1
A. Outline ...........................................6-1
CONTROLLING THE FIXING
TEMPERATURE.................................6-2
A. Controlling the Area of Heating
(fixing roller)...................................6-2
B. Controlling the Activation and the
Temperature of the Fixing Roller
(continuous copying) .....................6-3
1. Outline ......................................6-3
2. Controlling Period
of Activation..............................6-3
3. Controlling the Control
Temperature .............................6-4
4. Controlling the temperature
during Pre-heat mode ..............6-4
C. Protection Mechanism ...................6-5
D. Driving the Cleaning Belt...............6-7
DELIVERY ASSEMBLY......................6-8
A. Outline ...........................................6-8
B. Controlling the Delivery Motor .......6-9
1. Outline ......................................6-9
2. Operation..................................6-10
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......6-11
A. Fixing Assembly ............................6-11
1. Construction .............................6-11
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
2. Removing the Fixing
Assembly ..................................6-12
3. Removing the Fixing Cleaning
Belt ...........................................6-15
4. Installing the Fixing Cleaning
Belt ...........................................6-16
5. Replacing the oil sheet.............6-17
6. Removing the Fixing Heater.....6-18
7. Removing the Fixing Roller ......6-21
8. Installing the Upper Fixing
Roller and the Heater ...............6-25
9. Adjusting the Nip (tightening
the pressure adjusting nut).......6-27
10.Installing the Thermistor ...........6-28
11. Installing the Thermal Switch ...6-28
12.Position of the Paper Guide .....6-29
13.Positioning the Cleaning Belt
Solenoid ...................................6-29
B. Delivery Assembly .........................6-30
1. Removing the Delivery
Assembly ..................................6-30
2. Removing the Upper
Separation Claws .....................6-32
3. Removing the Lower
Separation Claws .....................6-33
4. Removing the Delivery Motor...6-34
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
I.
II.
III.
IV.
FANS ..................................................7-1
POWER SUPPLY ...............................7-3
A. Outline of Power Supply................7-3
B. Protection Mechanisms of the
Power Supply Circuit .....................7-5
ERROR DETECTION CIRCUIT .........7-6
A. Outline ...........................................7-6
B. Scanning Lamp Error Activation
Detection Circuit ............................7-7
C. Fixing Heater Error Activation
Detection Circuit ............................7-7
1. Detection by an SSR................7-7
2. Detection by a Thermistor ........7-7
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......7-8
A. Externals........................................7-9
1. Remove the left inside cover....7-11
2. Remove the right inside cover ...7-12
B. Control Panel.................................7-14
1. Removing the Control Panel ....7-14
C. Copyboard Cover ..........................7-15
1. Replacing the Copyboard
Cover Sheet .............................7-15
D. Fans...............................................7-15
1. Removing the Scanner
Cooling Fan ..............................7-15
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J
2. Removing the Exhaust Fan......7-15
3. Removing the Feeding Fan .....7-17
Main Motor Assembly....................7-17
1. Removing the Main Motor
Assembly ..................................7-17
Mirror Guide Assembly..................7-18
1. Removing the Mirror Guide
Plate .........................................7-18
Main Drive Assembly.....................7-19
1. Removing the Main Drive
Assembly ..................................7-19
2. Attaching the Drive Belt............7-22
Cleaning Belt Drive Assembly .......7-23
1. Removing the Cleaning Belt
Drive Assembly ........................7-23
DC Controller PCB ........................7-24
1. Removing the DC Controller
PCB ..........................................7-24
2. Points to Note When Handling
the DC Controller PCB .............7-24
DC Power Supply PCB .................7-25
1. Removing the DC Power
Supply PCB ..............................7-25
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
I.
II.
III.
IV.
BASIC OPERATION...........................8-1
A. Outline of Electrical Circuit ............8-1
INPUTS TO AND OUTPUTS FROM
PEDESTAL CONTROLLER ...............8-2
A. Outline ...........................................8-2
B. Inputs to and Outputs from
Pedestal Controller ........................8-3
1. Inputs and outputs (1/2) ...........8-3
2. Inputs and outputs (2/2) ...........8-4
PEDESTAL MOTOR CONTROL
CIRCUIT .............................................8-5
A. Outline ...........................................8-5
B. Mechanism ....................................8-5
PAPER DECK UNIT ...........................8-6
A. Basic Construction ........................8-6
B. Pick-Up/Feeding Operation ...........8-7
1. Mechanism ...............................8-7
2. Sequence of Pick-Up
Operations ................................8-8
C. Lifter Operation..............................8-9
1. Operation..................................8-9
2. Lifting Operation .......................8-10
D. Detecting Paper in the Deck .........8-11
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
V.
VI.
1. Identifying the Size of Paper ....8-11
2. Identifying the Presence/
Absence of Paper.....................8-12
DETECTING JAMS ............................8-13
1. Outline ......................................8-13
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......8-15
A. Externals........................................8-16
1. Paper Deck Pedestal-M1 .........8-16
2. Detaching the Copier from the
Pedestal ...................................8-17
B. Pedestal Motor Drive Assembly ....8-19
1. Removing the pedestal motor
drive assembly .........................8-19
C. Paper Deck....................................8-20
1. Removing the Paper Deck .......8-20
2. Removing the Lifter Wire..........8-21
3. Setting the Deck Size...............8-25
4. Adjusting the Deck Registration..8-27
D. Pick-Up System .............................8-28
1. Cross Section of Pick-Up
Assembly ..................................8-28
2. Removing the Pick-Up
Assembly ..................................8-29
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
ix
3. Removing the Pick-Up Roller ...8-30
4. Removing the Feeding Roller...8-31
5. Removing the Separation
Roller ........................................8-33
6. Adjusting the Pressure of the
Separation Roller......................8-34
7. Position of the Pick-Up Roller
Release Solenoid (SL1) ...........8-34
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
I.
II.
SELECTING THE SITE ......................9-1
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION....9-2
A. Unpacking and Removing
the Metal Fixings ...........................9-2
B. Supplying Toner.............................9-6
III.
C. Stirring the Toner ...........................9-8
D. Installing the Drum Unit .................9-10
E. Checking Images and
Operations .....................................9-11
RELOCATING THE COPIER .............9-13
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
I.
II.
PERIODICALLY REPLACED
PARTS ................................................10-1
A. Periodically Replaced Parts ..........10-1
CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES ...10-2
A. Copier ............................................10-2
III.
IV.
B. Paper Deck Pedestal.....................10-3
SCHEDULED SERVICING.................10-4
PERIODICALLY SERVICED PARTS..10-6
A. Copier ............................................10-6
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
I.
II.
x
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION......................................11-3
A. Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure ......................................11-3
B. Points to Note for Scheduled
Servicing........................................11-5
STAMDARDS AND
ADJUSTMENTS .................................11-7
A. Adjusting the Images.....................11-7
1. Adjusting the Image Leading
Edge Margin [3] No. 305 ..........11-7
2. Adjusting the Leading Edge
Non-Image Width [3] No. 306 ..11-8
3. Adjusting the Trailing Edge NonImage Width [3] No. 307 ..........11-9
4. Adjusting the Left-Right
Registration ..............................11-10
5. Adjusting the Image Left-Right
Margin [3] No. 308....................11-12
6. AE Adjustments........................11-14
7. Adjusting the Developing Bias
DC Component [3] No. 302......11-18
8. Adjusting the Horizontal
Registration Paper Edge
Sensor Position [3] No. 324 .....11-19
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
9. Adjusting the Trailing Edge
Margin for Pick-Up from the
Multifeeder [3] No. 327.............11-20
10.Adjusting the Book Erasing
Width [3] No. 326 .....................11-21
B. Exposure System ..........................11-22
1. Routing the Scanner Drive
Cable ........................................11-22
2. Adjusting the Position of the
Mirror (optical path length
between No. 1 mirror and
No. 2/No. 3 mirror) ...................11-23
3. Adjusting the Tension of the
Scanner Cable..........................11-25
4. Adjusting the Tension of the
Lens Drive Belt .........................11-26
5. Cleaning the No.4 Mirror ..........11-26
6. Cleaning the No.5/No.6 Mirror...11-27
C. Image Formation System ..............11-29
1. Orientation of the Scanning
Lamp ........................................11-29
2. Position of the Blank Shutter
Solenoid ...................................11-29
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
III.
3. Routing the Blank Shutter
Cable ........................................11-30
4. Routing the Charging Wire.......11-31
5. Stringing the Guide Wire ..........11-32
6. Adjusting the Height of the
Charging Wire ..........................11-32
7. Position of the Developing
Assembly Magnetic Seal ..........11-33
8. After Replacing the Drum unit ..11-33
D. Pick-Up / Feeding System.............11-34
1. Orientation of the Pick-Up
Roller ........................................11-34
2. Orientation of the Separation
Roller ........................................11-34
3. Orientation of the Feeding
Roller ........................................11-35
4. Adjusting the Pressure of the
Separation Roller......................11-35
5. Position of the Pick-Up Roller
Solenoid (pick-up assembly;
SL1, SL2) .................................11-36
6. Orientation of the Multifeeder
Pick-Up Roller ..........................11-36
7. Position of the Pick-Up Guide
Plate Cam (multifeeder
assembly) .................................11-37
8. Routing the Timing Belt
(multifeeder assembly) .............11-37
9. Adjusting the Pressure of the
Separation Pad (multifeeder
assembly) .................................11-38
10.Routing the Drive Belt ..............11-38
11. Adjusting the Position of the
Horizontal Registration
Solenoid ...................................11-39
E. Fixing System ................................11-40
1. Points to Note When Installing
the Fixing Heater ......................11-40
2. Adjusting the Nip (tightening
the pressure adjusting nut).......11-41
3. Position of the Fixing Assembly
Paper Guide .............................11-42
4. Position of the Cleaning Belt
Solenoid ...................................11-42
F. Electrical System ...........................11-43
1. Registering the Cassette/
Multifeeder Paper Width Basic
Setting [4] .................................11-43
2. Adjusting the Original Stop
Position with the DF in Use
([3] No.325) ..............................11-46
3. Checking the Photointerrupters11-47
TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE
FAULTS ..............................................11-53
A. Making Initial Checks ....................11-53
1. Installation Environment ...........11-53
2. Checking the Originals .............11-53
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
IV.
3. Copyboard Cover, Copyboard
Glass, and Standard White
Plate..........................................11-53
4. Charging Assemblies ...............11-53
5. Developing Assembly...............11-53
6. Paper ........................................11-53
7. Periodically Replaced Parts .....11-54
8. Others.......................................11-54
B. Image Fault Samples
......11-56
Not available in electronic format
C. Troubleshooting Faulty Images .....11-57
1. The copy is too light.
(halftone only)...........................11-57
2. The copy is too light.
(solid black also) ......................11-58
3. The copy is too light. (entire
copy, considerably)...................11-58
4. The copy has uneven density.
(darker at front) ........................11-59
5. The copy has uneven density.
(lighter at front) .........................11-59
6. The copy is foggy.
(entire copy) .............................11-60
7. The copy has vertical fogging....11-61
8. The copy has black lines.
(vertical, blurred, thick) .............11-61
9. The copy has black lines.
(vertical, thin)............................11-62
10.The copy has white spots.
(vertical)....................................11-63
11. The copy has white lines.
(vertical)...................................11-63
12.The copy has white spots.
(horizontal) ...............................11-64
13.The back of the copy is soiled ...11-65
14.The copy has faulty fixing ........11-66
15.The copy has a
displaced leading edge ............11-67
16.The copy has a
displaced leading edge ............11-67
17.The copy has a
displaced leading edge ............11-67
18.The copy has a blurred image. 11-68
19.The copy has horizontal
fogging......................................11-69
20.The copy has poor sharpness..11-70
21.The copy is blank .....................11-71
22.The copy is solid black .............11-72
TROUBLESHOOTING
MALFUNCTIONS ...............................11-73
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions........11-73
1. E000 .........................................11-73
2. E001 .........................................11-74
3. E002, 003 .................................11-75
4. E004 .........................................11-76
5. E005 .........................................11-76
6. E010 .........................................11-77
7. E030 .........................................11-77
8. E031 .........................................11-78
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
xi
9. E051 .........................................11-78
10.E053 .........................................11-79
11. E060 .........................................11-80
12.E202 .........................................11-81
13.E203 .........................................11-81
14.E204 .........................................11-82
15.E210 .........................................11-82
16.E220 .........................................11-82
17.E224 .........................................11-83
18.E240 .........................................11-83
19.E710, E711...............................11-83
20.E712 .........................................11-84
21.E716 .........................................11-84
22.E800 .........................................11-85
23.AC power is absent ..................11-86
24.DC power is absent..................11-87
25.The blank shutter fails to move ..11-89
26.The photosensitive drum fails
to rotate ....................................11-89
27.Pick-up fails. (cassette) ............11-90
28.The lifter fails to move up.
(cassette)..................................11-91
29.Pick-up fails. (multifeeder)........11-92
30.The scanner fails to move
forward/in reverse.....................11-93
31.The registration roller fails to
rotate ........................................11-94
32.The scanning lamp fails to
turn on ......................................11-95
33.The pre-exposure lamp fails
to turn on ..................................11-96
34.The hopper motor fails to
rotate ........................................11-96
35.The lens fails to move. .............11-97
36.The fixing heater fails to
operate. ....................................11-98
37.The total copy counter fails
to operate .................................11-99
38.The option counter fails to
operate .....................................11-99
39.The Add Paper indicator fails
to turn off ................................11-100
40.The Jam indicator fails to
turn off ....................................11-100
41.The Add Toner indicator fails
to turn off ................................11-101
B. Troubleshooting Malfunctions in
the Pedestal ................................11-102
1. E901 .......................................11-102
2. Pick-up fails. (pedestal)..........11-107
3. The lifter fails to move up.
xii
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
(pedestal) ...............................11-105
4. The Add Paper indicator fails
to turn off. (pedestal) ..............11-106
V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING
FAULTS ............................................11-107
A. Copy Paper Jams ........................11-107
1. Pick-up assembly ...................11-108
2. Separation/feeding assembly ..11-109
3. Fixing/delivery assembly ........11-110
4. Cleaning assembly.................11-110
5. Lower feeding assembly ........11-111
B. Troubleshooting Feeding Faults ..11-112
1. Double feeding .......................11-112
2. Wrinkling.................................11-112
VI. ARRANGEMENT AND
FUNCTIONS OF THE
ELECTRICAL PARTS.......................11-113
A. Sensors ........................................11-114
B. Switches, clutches, and
solenoids ......................................11-116
C. Heaters, lamps, and motors.........11-118
D. PCBs ............................................11-120
E. Paper deck pedestal-M1 ..............11-122
F. Variable Resistors, LightEmitting Diodes, and Check
pins by PCB .................................11-124
1. DC Controls PCB ...................11-125
2. HVT ........................................11-126
3. Lamp Regulator PCB .............11-126
4. Motor driver 1 PCB ................11-127
5. Motor driver 2 PCB ................11-127
6. Pedestal controller PCB
(Paper deck pedestal) ............11-128
VII. SERVICE MODE ..............................11-129
A. Outline..........................................11-129
B. Using Service Mode.....................11-130
1. Starting Service Mode............11-130
C. Using Adjustment Mode and
Optional Setting mode .................11-131
D. Control/Display Mode [1] .............11-132
E. I/0 Display Mode [2] .....................11-147
F. Adjustment Mode [3] ....................11-171
G. Function Mode [4] ........................11-173
H. Optional Settings Mode [5] ..........11-175
I. Counter Mode [6] .........................11-177
VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS............................11-179
A. Copier ..........................................11-179
B. Pedestal Self Diagnosis ...............11-183
C. RDF/ADF Self Diagnosis .............11-184
D. Sorter Self Diagnosis ...................11-185
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..........A-1
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS A-2
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM....A-5
Not available
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
D. PEDESTAL CONTROLLER ..........A-9
Not available
E. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST .................A-11
F. SOLVENTS AND OILS..................A-12
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
xiii
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the outline of the features, how to operate and copying process
of this copier.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
FEATURES.........................................1-1
SPECIFICATIONS ..............................1-2
A. Copier ............................................1-2
B. Paper Deck Pedestal-M1 ..............1-8
NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-9
A. Exterior View .................................1-9
B. Cross Section ................................1-11
OPERATION.......................................1-13
A. Control Panel (AB/Inch).................1-13
B. Control Panel (Inch) ......................1-14
C. User Mode .....................................1-17
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
BY THE USER ...................................1-20
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
VI.
IMAGE FORMATION..........................1-21
A. Outline ...........................................1-21
B. Static Latent Image Formation
Block..............................................1-23
C. Pre-Exposure (step 1) ...................1-23
D. Primary Charging (step 2) .............1-24
E. Image Exposure (step 3) ...............1-24
F. Development (step 4) ....................1-25
G. Transfer (step 5) ............................1-26
H. Separation (step 6)........................1-27
I. Fixing (step 7)................................1-28
J. Drum Cleaning (step 8) .................1-28
VII. AUXILIARY PROCESS ......................1-29
A. Blank Exposure .............................1-29
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I. FEATURES
1. Front-loading.
• Paper is supplied from the front so that it requires less floor space.
• Although designed as a compact machine, its source of paper may hold as many as
2550 sheets (with the addition of a paper deck pedestal (accessory)).
2. High-quality toner for high-quality images.
• Its high-quality one-component toner ensures enhanced reproduction of text and
photos.
• Canon’s own developing technology (toner projection) ensures stable production of
high-quality images.
3. Full line of basic features.
• It turns out as many as 31 copies (A4) / 30 copies (LTR) per minute.
• It zooms between 49% and 204%, with nine (AB) / eight (Inch) preset reduction and
enlargement reproduction ratios.
• It accommodates various paper sizes (A3/11” × 17” to postcard) and transfer media
(tracing paper, transparency).
• It automatically recognizes the size of originals, selecting the best copy paper size
(auto paper selection) or reproduction ratio (auto ratio selection).
• It is capable of page separation, image composition, auto duplexing, frame erasing,
and margin creation.
• It possesses a compact duplexing unit designed with a set-back mechanism.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-1
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
II. SPECIFICATIONS
A. Copier
1. Type
Body
Desk-top
Copyboard
Fixed
Light source
Halogen lamp (300 W, 120 V; 340 W, 220/240 V)
Lens
Zoom lens
Photosensitive
medium
OPC (φ30)
2. System
Reproduction
Indirect electrostatic
Charging
Corona
Exposure
Slit (moving scanner)
Copy density
adjustment
Automatic (AE) or manual
Development
Dry (toner projection)
Pick-up
Auto
2 cassettes
Pedestal (accessory)
Manual
Multifeeder
Transfer
Corona
Separation
Curvature + static eliminator
Cleaning
Blade
Fixing
Heat roller
(main 700 W + sub 600 W for 120V model;
main 750 W + sub 640 W for 220/240V model)
1-2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. Performance
Item
Specifications
Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg / 4.4lb max.)
Maximum size of original
A3 (297 x 420 mm)/LDG (11” x 17”*1)
Reproduction ratio
Direct, 4R4E or 4R3E (Table 1-201), zoom 48~205%(Display
range: 49 to 204%)
Wait time
35 sec or less (at 20°C / 68F room temperature)
First copy
5.75 sec or less (A4, Direct, non-AE, pick-up from cassette 1)
Continuous copying
100 copies max.
Copying speed
See Tables 1-202 and 1-203.
Copy size
Cassette:
Manual:
Type of copy paper
Type of original
A3 (11” x 17”*1) to A5 (STMT*1)
A3 (11” x 17”*1) to A6 (postcard)
Cassette
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), tracing paper (SM1),
colored paper*2, recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2)
Manual
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2;128 g/m2*3), tracing paper (SM1,
GNT80), colored paper*2, transparency*2*4, postcard*2,
label sheet*2, recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2)
Two-sided Auto
copying
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), colored paper*2, recycled paper
(64 to 80 g/m2)
Manual
Pick-up
capacity
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2; 128 g/m2*3), colored paper*2,
recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2)
Cassette
500 sheets (55mm / 2.2”,80g/m2 plain paper), front loading (no
claw)
Manual
50 sheets (5.5mm / 0.22”,80g/m2 plain paper)
Copy tray
100 sheets (A3 / 11” × 17”, plain paper)
Non-image width
2.0 ± 1.0 mm / 0.08” ± 0.04” (leading edge),
2.5 ± 1.5 mm / 0.1” ± 0.06” (left/right, trailing edge)
Auto clear
Provided (2 min standard, may be varied between 0 and 9
min in 1-min increments)
Auto power-off
Provided (60 min standard, may be varied between 10 and 120
min in 10-min increments; may be disabled in service mode)
Accessories
ADF-E1
RDF-F1
Paper Deck Pedestal-M1
MS-B1
Sorter-E1
Stapler Sorter-D2
*1
*2
*3
*4
11”x17”=279.4x431.8mm, STMT=139.7x215.9mm
Canon-recommended paper.
Be sure to remove curling.
Be sure to separate sheets before setting on the multifeeder tray.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-3
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Item
Specifications
Temperature
Operating Humidity
environAtmospheric
ment
pressure
7.5°C / 45.5F to 32.5°C / 90.5F
5% to 85% RH
608 hPa to 1013 hPa (0.5 to 1 atm)
Serial numbers
Power
supply
120V 60Hz
NHE XXXXX
120V 60Hz
(Taiwan)
NHF XXXXX
220/240V
50Hz
PDE XXXXX
220/240V
50Hz
(Australia)
RBN XXXXX
Maximum
Power
consump- Standby
tion
Continuous
copying
Noise
1-4
0.834 kWh (average; reference only)
71 dB or less
Standby
50 dB or less
0.05 ppm or less (avr; 0.10 ppm or less max.)
Width
610mm / 24.0”
Depth
595mm / 23.4”
Height
585mm / 23.0”
Weight
Consumables
0.164 kWh (average; reference only)
Copying
Ozone (avr of 8 hr)
Dimensions
1.5 kW or less
82.5 kg / 181.5 lb
Copy paper
Keep wrapped, and protect against humidity.
Toner
Avoid direct sunshine, and store at 40°C / 104F, 85% or less.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Copying
ratio
AB
Inch
Direct
1:1
1:1
Reduce I
1:0.500
1:0.500
Reduce II
1:0.707
1:0.647
Reduce III
1:0.816
1:0.733
Reduce IV
1:0.865
1:0.786
Enlarge I
1:1.154
1:1.214
Enlarge II
1:1.224
1:1.294
Enlarge III
1:1.414
1:2.000
Enlarge IV
1:2.000
Zoom
49 ~ 204% in 1% increments
Table 1-201 Preset Ratios
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-5
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
• Pick-Up from Cassette 1
Copying ratio
Direct
Copy size(mm)
Copies
A3
(297 × 420)
17
A4
(210 × 297)
31
A5
(148 × 210)
31
B4
(257 × 364)
19
B5
(182 × 257)
31
A4R
(297 × 210)
23
A5R
(210 × 148)
31
B5R
(257 × 182)
26
1:0.500
A3
→
A5R
23
1:0.707
A3
→
A4R
20
B4
→
B5R
22
1:0.816
B4
→
A4R
21
1:0.865
A3
→
B4
18
A4
→
B5
27
1:2.000
A5R
→
A3
17
1:1.414
A4R
→
A3
17
B5R
→
B4
17
1:1.224
A4R
→
B4
19
1:1.154
B4
→
A3
17
B5
→
A4
22
1:1
Reduce
Enlarge
Table 1-202 Copying Speed (AB)
1-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
• Pick-Up from Cassette 1
Copy size*1
Copying ratio
Direct
LTR
30
11” × 17”
16
LGL
20
LTRR
24
STMT
31
STMTR
30
1:0.786
LGL → LTRR
21
1:0.733
11” × 17” → LGL
19
11” × 15” → LTRR
21
1:0.647
11” × 17” → LTRR
20
1:0.500
11” × 17” → STMTR
23
1:2.000
STMTR
11” × 17”
17
1:1.294
LTRR → 11” × 17”
17
1:1.214
LGL
→ 11” × 17”
17
1:1
Reduce
Enlarge
*1
Copies
11”x17”=279.4x431.8mm, LGL=215.9x355.6mm, LTR=215.9x279.4mm,
STMT=139.7X215.9mm
Table 1-203 Copying Speed (Inch)
Specifications subject to change without notice
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-7
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B. Paper Deck Pedestal-M1
Item
Specifications
Pick-up
Clawless
Loading
Front loading
Type of copy paper
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), colored paper*1
Size of stack
A4 (horizontal), B5 (horizontal), LTR*2 (horizontal)
Capacity
162 mm / 6.38” high (stack; one-side; 1500 sheets of 80 g/m2
paper)
Size switching
By relocating partition plate in increments
Power supply
Not provided (DC power supplied from copier)
Weight
46kg / 101 lb
Width
610mm / 24.0”
Dimensions Depth
608mm / 23.9”
Height
414mm / 16.3”
*1
*2
Canon-recommended paper.
LTR=215.9x279.4mm
Specifications subject to change without notice
1-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
III. NAMES OF PARTS
A. Exterior View
q
w
u
e
r
t
y
q
w
e
r
Copyboard cover
Control panel
Power switch
Front door
t Cassette 1
y Cassette 2
u Copy tray
Figure 1-301
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-9
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
e
w
r
t
q
y
u
i
o
q
w
e
r
t
Fixing assembly knob
Total counter
Hopper
Developing assembly releasing lever
Registration knob
y
u
i
o
Multifeeder
Feeding assembly releasing lever
Horizontal registration knob
Lower feeder lever
Figure 1-302
1-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B. Cross Section
1. Body Cross Section
q e t u
w r y
i o!0 !1 !2 !3 !5 !6 !8 !9 @0 @@
1 2
!4
!7
$3
#7 #5
#2 #0
$4 $2 $1 $0 #9 #8 #6 #4 #3 #1 @9 @8@7 @6
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
Delivery roller 2
No.3 mirror
No.2 mirror
Delivery roller 1
No.1 mirror
Scanning lamp
Cleaning belt
Feeding assembly
Ozon filter
Scanner cooling fan
Exhaust fan
Copyboard glass
Drum cleaning
assembly
Pre-exposure/Blank
exposure lamp
Lens
Primary corona wire
Photosensitive drum
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
@3
@4
@5
@6
@7
@8
@9
#0
No.6 mirror
Developing assembly
No.5 mirror
No.4 mirror
Multifeeder pick-up
roller
Multifeeder tray
Vertical path roller 0
Vertical path roller 1
Vertical path roller 2
Cassette 2 separation
roller
Cassette 2 feeding
roller
Cassette 2 pick-up
roller
Cassette 1 separation
roller
@3
@5
@4
#1 Cassette 1 feeding
roller
#2 Cassette 1 pick-up
roller
#3 Horizontal registration
roller
#4 Lower feeder outlet
roller
#5 Registration roller
#6 Transfer corona wire
#7 Static eliminator
#8 Set-back roller 2
#9 Feeding fan
$0 Cassette 1
$1 Cassette 2
$2 Set-back roller 1
$3 Fixing roller
$4 Lower feeder inlet
roller
Figure 1-303
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-11
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2. Paper Deck Pedestal-M1
q
u
q
w
e
r
w
y
e
t r
t Deck separation roller
y Lifter
u Deck
Deck pick-up roller
Deck vertical path roller
Vertical path roller 3
Deck feeding roller
Figure 1-304
1-12
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
IV. OPERATION
A. Control Panel (AB / Inch)
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
PRESS START KEY
REPLACE ORIGINALS
Additional
Function
Even
OK
M1
Image Combination
2
Odd
2
2
Left
M2
Right
M3
Mode Memory
Margin
#2 #1
Erase
Different Size
Original
#0 @9
Lighter
A
@8
SELECT PAPER SIZE
SET MARGINS
2
2
Two-page
Separation
o
Darker
@7
!0
!1
123
1:1
@6 @5
!3
!4
!5
COPY LIMIT EXCEEDED
PLACE ORIGINALS IN FEEDER
Max 200%
A4/LTR A3 B5 B4
A4/LTR B4
B4 A3 B5 A4/LTR
1 : 1
A3 B4 A4/LTR B5
B4 A4/LTR
A3 A4/LTR B4 B5
Min 50%
Reduce
!2
Auto Paper
A3/11x17
A4/LTR
A4/LTR R
B4/LGL
B5
B5 R
U/A5
Enlarge
%
Auto Zoom
Paper Select
@4
@3 @2
Zoom
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C
0
%
ID
@1 @0 !9
!8
!7
!6
Figure 1-401
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-13
B. Control Panel (Inch)
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
PRESS START KEY
REPLACE ORIGINALS
Additional
Function
Even
M1
Image Combination
2
Two-page
Separation
Group
2
Left
M2
Right
M3
Mode Memory
Margin
Erase
Different Size
Original
Lighter
A
SELECT PAPER SIZE
SET MARGINS
2
Staple2
Sort
Odd
2
OK
Sort
o
Darker
!0
COPY LIMIT EXCEEDED
PLACE ORIGINALS IN FEEDER
!1
Max 200%
LTR 11x17
LGL 11x17
Direct
LGL LTR
11x17 LGL
11x17 LTR
Min 50%
Reduce
Direct
Enlarge
Paper Select
%
Auto Zoom
Zoom
!3
Reset
123
Auto Paper
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTR R
STMT
STMTR
U
!2
#0 @9
@8
@7
@6 @5
@4
@3 @2
!5
Energy Saver
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C
0
Stop
Start
%
ID
Clear
#2 #1
!4
@1 @0 !9
!8
Interrupt
!7
!6
Figure 1-402
1-14
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
No.
Name
1 OK key
Description
Press it to accept selected items and functions when setting
modes.
2
User Mode key
Press it to start or end user mode.
You can change specifications or standard mode and can set
or change adjustment/cleaning settings.
3
Image Compose key
Press it to start/end image composition mode.
4
Page Separate key
Press it to start/end page separation mode.
5
Odd/Even key*1
Press it to specify either an odd or even number of originals.
6
Sorter key*2
Press it to start/end sort, staple sort, or group mode.
7
Two-Sided key*
8
Image Display key
Lights when originals must be set in the DF*1, a frame/binding
margin width must be specified, the originals must be replaced,
the Copy Start key must be pressed, the paper size must be
selected, or the copy count is in excess.
9
Warning
Lights when a jam has occurred, paper must be supplied, or
toner must be supplied.
10
Display
Indicates the selected copy count/reproduction ratio or mode
settings.
11
Reset key
Press it to reset to standard copying mode.
12
Keypad
Use it to enter a copy count or mode settings (for numeric
input).
13
Pre-Heat key
Press it to start/end pre-heat mode.
14
Stop key
Press it to stop an ongoing copying run.
15
Power key
Press it to turn on/off the power.
16
Start key
Press it to start copying.
17
Interrupt key
Press it to make a copy by interrupting a continuous copying
run.
18
Clear key
Press it to clear a copy count or mode settings.
19
ID key
Press it after entering an ID number when storing an ID
number.
20
% key
Press it to check the selected reproduction ratio.
21
Zoom key
Press to set a reproduction ratio.
22
Auto Zoom key
Press it to start/end auto reproduction ratio mode.
23
Paper Select key
Press it to select the source of paper.
24
Paper/jam location
Flashes to indicate the location of a jam (cassette/multifeeder
tray). It also flashes when an original jams in the DF*1 or when
the sorter*2 or the right door must be checked.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
1
Press it to start/end duplexing mode.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-15
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
No.
Name
25 Direct key
Description
Press it to return to Direct (100%).
26
Reduce/Enlarge key
Press it to set a preset reproduction ratio
(reduction/enlargement).
27
Copy Density key
Press it to manually adjust the copy density.
28
AE key
Press it to start/end AE (automatic exposure).
29
Mix key*
30
Frame Erase key
Press it to start/end frame erasing mode.
31
Bind Margin key
Press it to start/end binding margin mode.
32
Mode Memory key
Press it to register/recall a copy mode. (As many as any three
modes may be stored.)
*1
*2
1
Press it to start/end mix mode for a combination of different
original sizes.
Available only when an DF is installed.
Available only when a sorter is installed.
1-16
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
C. User Mode
To
To
To
•
start User Mode, press
key.
select a mode, press the number (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
change the setting, press the Zoom (+) / Zoom (-) key and OK key.
Press the clear key to clear a setting entered by mistake when making mode
settings.
The following modes may freely be made use of by the user:
1. Specifications
2. Adjustment/Cleaning
1. Specifications
Display
Function
Description
Default settings
Changing the auto clear
time
Use it to set the auto clear time
between 0 and 9 min in 1-min
increments. Setting it to 0 min
disables the function.
2 min
Changing the auto
power-off time
Use it to change the auto power-off
time between 10 and 120 min in
10-min increments.
60 min
Setting pre-heat mode
Use it to specify a percentage at
which the power consumption is
reduced in pre-heat mode.
0%: no power saving
-10%: 10% saving.
-25%: 25% saving.
-50%: 50% saving.
-10%
Turning on or off
cassette selection
Use it to turn on or off auto
cassette selection (APS)/auto
paper change (ACC) for each
cassette and multifeeder:
ON:
Enable APS/ACC.
OFF: Disable APS/ACC.
ON
(Multifeeder is
OFF)
Turning on or off manual
paper size registration
Use it to specify whether paper
size should be stored at time of
setting paper or pressing the Copy
Start key for the multifeeder:
OFF
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
ON:
At time of setting
paper.(multifeeder is
targeted for selection in the
APS/ACC and auto zoom
mode.)
OFF:
At time of pressing Copy
Start key.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-17
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Display
Function
Description
Default settings
Turning on or off auto
sorting
Use it to enable or disable automatic sorting for multiple originals:
ON:
Enable auto sorting.
OFF: Disable auto sorting.
ON
Changing default binding
margin width
Use it to set the default width for
the binding width between 1 and
20 mm in 1-mm increments.
10 mm
Turning on and off back
binding margin only
Use it to allow or not allow a back
binding margin when making onesided copies of two-sided originals
and two-sided copies of one-sided
originals with a binding margin:
OFF
Switching between
millimeter and inch
notations
ON:
Allow binding margin on
back only.
OFF:
Allow binding margin.
Use it to select between millimeter
and inch notations as the unit of
input length:
-1:
-0:
mm
in millimeters
in inches
Setting auto energy
saver mode
Use it to set the time for entering to
anto energy saver mode.
The time can be set between 15
and 90 min in 15-min increments.
15 min
Resetting user mode
Use it to reset user mode settings
by selecting “on” and pressing the
OK key.
OFF
Storing standard mode
Use it to store the mode to be
selected in response to the Reset
key by selecting “on” and pressing
the OK key.
OFF
Resetting standard
mode
Use it to reset the standard mode
to default (factory)*1 settings by
selecting “on” and pressing the OK
key.
OFF
*1 : Factory mode
Density : AE (Automatic Exposure)
Paper selection : Auto Paper Selection
Copy count : 1
Ratio : Direct (100%)
Paper output : Non-sort
1-18
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2. Adjustment/Cleaning
Display
Function
Description
Default settings
Correcting density
Use it to correct the density
between -8 and +8 when the copy
density at F5 is found to be not
appropriate.
0
Making zoom fineadjustment X
Use it to make fine adjustments so
that the discrepancy, if any, in size
between original and copy (in
Direct) is removed.
0
Making zoom fineadjustment Y
X (enlargement) and Y (reduction)
may both be corrected
independently between 99% and
101% in 0.2%-increments.
(The display indicates ten times
the actual setting.)
Cleaning feeder
Use it to clean the pick-up/feeding
assembly of the feeder.
-
Cleaning wire
Use it for automatic cleaning of the
transfer corona wire.
-
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-19
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER
Instruct the user so that the following parts are cleaned at least once a week:
1) Copyboard Glass
Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent; then, dry wipe
it.
2) Copyboard Cover
Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent; then, dry wipe
it.
3) Primary Charging Assembly
Slide in and out the charging wire cleaner, thereby cleaning the wire.
4) Static Eliminator
If separation jams occur frequently, clean the static eliminator with the brush that
comes with the copier. (Clean only as needed.)
1-20
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
VI. IMAGE FORMATION
A. Outline
Scanning lamp
Zoom lens
Pre-exposure lamp
Primary corona assembly
Drum cleaning
assembly
Cleaning web
Developing assembly
Upper fixing roller
Copy paper
Lower fixing roller
Static eliminator
Transfer corona
assembly
Copy paper
Figure 1-601
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-21
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The copier’s image formation processes consist of the
Step 5
Step 1
Pre-exposure
Step 6
Step 2
Primary charging
Step 7
Step 3
Image exposure
Step 8
Step 4
Development
following eight steps:
Transfer
Separation
Fixing
Drum cleaning
Static latent image formation block
2. Primary charging
3. Image exposure
1. Pre-exposure
4. Development
8. Drum cleaning
Manual feed
5. Transfer
Delivery
6. Separation
Registration
Cassette
7. Fixing
Flow of copy paper
Cassette
Rotation of drum
Figure 1-602
Reference:
Steps 1 through 3 are referred to as the latent static image formation block. The
photosensitive drum has a layer construction: its outside is a photoconducting layer
made of OPC and inside, a conductive aluminum substrate.
Photoconducting layer
Substrate
Figure 1-603
1-22
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B. Static Latent Image Formation Block
The static latent image formation block consists of three steps, at the end of which
negative charges are left in the areas of the photosensitive drum corresponding to the
black areas of an original while removing negative charges from the areas of the
photosensitive drum corresponding to the white areas of the original.
The static image formed on the photosensitive drum is not visible to the human eye
and, therefore, is called a static latent image.
Time (t)
Surface potential (V)
0
Dark area
Light area
500
Pre-exposure Primary charging
(step 1)
(step 2)
Image exposure (step 3)
Figure 1-604
C. Pre-Exposure (step 1)
Pre-exposure lamp
Figure 1-605
In preparation for primary charging, the light from the pre-exposure lamp is shone
on the photosensitive drum surface, thereby removing the residual charges from the
photosensitive drum surface and, ultimately, preventing uneven copy density.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-23
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
D. Primary Charging (step 2)
Figure 1-606
The negative corona charging by the primary charging assembly charges the
surface of the drum to a uniform negative potential to ensure primary potential.
Grid bias is applied to the grid to make sure that the surface of the drum is uniformly
charged.
E. Image Exposure (step 3)
Optical image
Dark area
Light area
Figure 1-607
The optical image of the original is projected on the photosensitive drum to
neutralize the charges in the light areas.
1-24
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
F. Development (step 4)
Toner
Blade
Cylinder
Magnet
Developing
cylinder
Figure 1-608
As shown in Figure 1-608, the developing assembly consists of a developing
cylinder made of a fixed magnet and a cylinder that rotates around it and a magnetic
blade.
The copier’s developer is a single-component developer made of magnetic resins.
The developer has insulating characteristics and becomes charged to a positive
potential by friction against the rotating cylinder.
Blade
Toner
Concentrated
magnetic field
Magnet
Magnet
Figure 1-609
A concentrated magnetic field exista at all times from the magnet to the tip of the
blade, attracting the developer.
Once inside the concentrated magnetic field, its strong bond to the blade will keep
it virtually immobile, causing it to deposit in an even layer on the cylinder.
Both AC bias and DC bias (negative component) are simultaneously applied to the
developing cylinder and the blade (developing bias), and the negative component of the
developing bias is larger than the positive component.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-25
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Positive
component
0V
Negative
component
DC bias
Figure 1-610
During copying, toner is attracted to the photosensitive drum by the work of the drum
surface potential and the developing bias (at time of positive component), turning the
static latent image into a visible image. Excess toner is drawn back from the
photosensitive drum by the work of the drum surface potential and the developing bias
(at time of negative component).
AC bias (frequency, in particular) mainly affects gradation, i.e., the lower the
frequency, the better the gradation; however, such tends to cause fogging. DC bias
mainly affects copy density and fogging; a higher bias, i.e., closer to 0 V, increases
image density but tends to cause fogging.
G. Transfer (step 5)
Copy
paper
Transfer
guide plates
Figure 1-611
A negative corona charge is applied to the back of the copy paper, causing the toner
on the drum to move to the copy paper.
The transfer guide and vertical pass upper guide is grounded through a varistor to
prevent soiling of the back of the copy paper and to prevent poor transfer.
Reference:
If the transfer guide and the vertical path were grounded, the charges which should
be on the back of paper would escape through the paper, causing transfer faults. If
they were fully separated, on the other hand, the transfer guide would be charged,
ultimately soling the back of the transfer guide with toner.
1-26
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
H. Separation (step 6)
Transfer corona unit
Static eliminator
Figure 1-612
The copier takes advantage of the rigidity of copy paper to separate it from the drum
(curvature separation).
However, since thin copy paper has little rigidity, it can wrap around the drum without
separating. To prevent such a problem, a positive voltage is applied to the separation
static eliminator to weaken the static bonds between drum and copy paper, thereby
facilitating separation.
Copy paper possesses high resistance once it has moved through the fixing
assembly, and shows curling. For this reason, separation faults could occur if the same
degree of separation corona charging was used for copying on both first and second
sides in automatic two-sided mode. To prevent separation faults, the output of corona
charges is made stronger when copying on the second side.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-27
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I. Fixing (step 7)
Cleaning belt
Upper fixing roller
Main heater
Sub heater
Copy paper
Lower fixing roller
Figure 1-613
After transfer, copy paper is moved between two rollers for fixing of the toner image.
The copier’s upper roller is heated by two heaters (halogen lamp).
To prevent jams and toner offset, a cleaning belt impregnated with silicone oil is kept
in contact with the upper fixing roller, thereby cleaning and, while at the same time,
applying silicone oil to the roller by moving the point of contact by a take-up mechanism.
To prevent fixing faults, positive DC bias is applied to the upper fixing roller.
J. Drum Cleaning (step 8)
Cleaning blade
Vane
Scoop-up sheet
Figure 1-614
In preparation for the next copying run, the cleaning blade scrapes off toner
remaining on the drum surface.
Thereafter, the toner is gathered by the scoop-up sheet and collected to the rear by
a vane.
1-28
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
VII.
AUXILIARY PROCESS
A. Blank Exposure
Blank exposure is used to eliminate the drum surface potential in the non-image
area occurring as a result of the difference, if any, between original and copy or in
Reduce mode.
The light from the pre-exposure lamp is reflected by the replacing plate so that it is
directed to the photosensitive drum after image exposure.
The non-image area between sheets of copy paper is exposed by light from the preexposure lamp which is reflected by a separate reflecting plate.
Pre-exposure Blank exposure
lamp
lamp optical path
Reflecting plates
No. 6 mirror
Shutter
Image exposure
optical path
Reflecting plate
Sheet-to-sheet
blank exposure
optical path
Pre-exposure
optical path
Photosensitive
drum
Figure 1-615
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-29
CHAPTER 2
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
This chapter describes the outline of the basic operation, purposes and roles of this
copier, the relationship between the electric system and mechanical system and the
operational timing of each component.
The process speed of this copier is about 180mm/sec and it takes about 0.52sec for
one rotation of the drum.
I.
BASIC OPERATION ...........................2-1
A. Functional Construction.................2-1
B. Outline of the
Electrical Circuitry..........................2-2
C. Basic Sequence ............................2-4
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Controlling the Main Motor ............2-6
Inputs to the DC Controller............2-8
Outputs from the DC Controller.....2-13
Inputs to and Outputs from the
Accessories (1/1)...........................2-18
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
I. BASIC OPERATION
A. Functional Construction
The copier can roughly be divided into four functional blocks: i.e., pick-up/feeding
system, exposure system, image formation system, and control system.
Control system
Control panel
Copyboard
Control circuit
Exposure
system
Scanner
assembly
Optical
assembly
Image formation
system
Primary corona
charging
Drum
cleaning
assembly
Tray
Delivery
control
assembly
Fixing
assembly
Feeding
assembly
Protosensitive
drum
Separation
Developing
assembly
Transfer
Pick-up control
assembly
Manual pick-up
assembly
Lower feeder
control
assembly
Lower feeder
assembly
Cassette 1
Pick-up/
Feeding system 1
Cassette 2
Paper deck
Pick-up /Feeding
system 2 (accessory)
flow of high-voltage/toner
flow of paper
path of light
path of electrical signal
Figure 2-101
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-1
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry
The copier’s major electrical mechanisms are controlled by a CPU (IC116) operating
in sync with 16MHz external inputs.
Each principal IC on the DC controller PCB has the functions discussed below;
Figure 2-102 is a block diagram showing the relationship among major circuits:
IC116 (master CPU)
• Controlling copying sequence.
IC104 (slave CPU)
• Controlling the control panel.
• Controlling the lower feeder motor, blank shutter motor, and lens motor.
IC115 (gate array)
• Controlling writing to and reading from memory.
• Controlling the fixing heater.
• Controlling the scanning motor.
IC124, IC103 (master ROM, slave ROM)
• Serving as memory for programs.
IC107 (DPRAM)
• Serving as buffer memory between master CPU and slave CPU.
IC109 (I/O port)
• Controlling the high-voltage power supply and lamp regulator.
• Turns on and off each element.
IC117 (IPC)
• Controlling serial communication with the DF, sorter, and pedestal.
IC113 (reset IC)
• Resetting appropriate ICs at power-on or power outage: IC105, IC109, IC115, IC116,
IC117
2-2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
<Sensors>
Sensors/
Switches
<Controls>
<Loads>
DC Controller PCB
IC116
(Master CPU)
AE sensor
PCB
Motor
driver 1
PCB
Scanning motor
Lens motor
Horizontal registration
motor
Hopper motor
Motor
driver 2
PCB
Delivery motor
Lower feeder motor
Blank shutter motor
Cleaner motor
X1
16MHz
IC115
(Gate array)
IC124
(ROM)
Thermistor
IC118
IC123
(RAM)
Main motor
dviver PCB
Control
panel
IC109
(I/O port)
Main motor
Lifter motor
SSR
Heaters
IC117
(IPC)
X103
12MHz
Primary/Transfer
corona assembly
Developing bias
Grid bias
Static eliminator/
Fixing roller bias
HVT
IC107
(DPRAM)
IC104
(Slave CPU)
Lamp
regulator
Scanning lamp
X101
16MHz
IC103
(ROM)
Solenoids/Clutches
IC105
(RAM)
IC119
Fans
(D/A converter) BAT101
Accessories
Figure 2-102
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-3
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
C. Basic Sequence
1. Basic Sequence of Operation
COPY START key
Power switch *1
ON 175 c/347F 190 c/374F ON
WMUP WMUPR
STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY
AER
Main motor (M1)
Fixing main heater (H1)
Controlled to 190 c/374F
Fixing sub heater (H2)
Primary corona bias
Transfer corona bias
Static eliminator/
fixing roller bias
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Forward
Scanner
Reverse
*1: Fixing upper roller surface temperature.
Figure 2-103
2-4
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Function
Period
Remarks
WMUP
(warm-up)
From when the power
switch is turned on to
when the temperature of
the fixing roller reaches
175°C/347F.
Waits until the fixing
roller heats.
The lens moves to
Direct position.
WMUPR
(warm-up
rotation)
From when the temperature of the fixing roller
has reached 175°C/347F
to when it reaches
190°C/374F (5 sec max.).
Evens out the
temperature of the
fixing roller.
If auto start is see,
copying operation
starts when the
temperature of the
fixing roller reaches
185°C/365F.
INTR
(initial
rotation)
From when the Copy
Start key is pressed to
when the scanner starts
to move forward.
Stabilizes the
sensitivity of the drum
in preparation for
copying operation.
AER
(AE
rotation)
Until the scanner returns
to home position after
moving to the front/rear
by about 70 mm/2.8”.
Measures the density
of the original.
In AE mode only.
SCFW
(scanner
forward)
While the scanner is
moving forward.
The scanning lamp
illuminates the original,
and the reflected light
is projected to the
photosensitive drum
through mirrors and
lenses.
The registration
signal is generated,
and the copy paper is
moved to the transfer
assembly.
• The distance over which
the scanner moves
forward varies according
to the selected cassette
size and reproduction
ratio.
• The speed at which the
scanner moves forward
varies according to the
selected reproduction
ratio.
SCRV
(scanner
reverse)
While the scanner is
moving in reverse.
Returns the scanner to
home position in
preparation for the
next copying run.
LSTR
(last
rotation)
From the end of SCRV to
when the main motor
stops.
Cleans the surface of
the photosensitive
drum to remove
charges.
The last copy is fully
discharged.
STBY
(standby)
From the end of LSTR or
WMUPR to when the
Copy Start key is pressed
or the power switch is
turned off.
Waits until the Copy
Start key is pressed.
The indications on
the control panel
return to standard
mode 2 min after the
end of LSTR.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-5
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
D. Controlling the Main Motor
1. Outline
The copier’s main motor (M1) is a DC motor with a built-in clock pulse generator.
Figure 2-104 is a block diagram showing the circuit used to control the main motor, and
the circuit has the following functions:
q Turning on and off the main motor.
w Controlling the speed of the main motor.
e Checking the rotation of the main motor for an error.
2. Operation
q Turning On and Off the Main Motor
When the main motor drive command (MMD) from the DC controller goes ‘1’, the
motor driver generates the drive command to turn on the main motor (M1). When the
MMD command goes ‘0’, on the other hand, the drive command stops to turn off the
main motor.
w Controlling the Speed of the Main Motor
When the main motor rotates, the hall IC generates pulse signals. The crystal
oscillator on the main motor driver PCB is used to generate reference pulses. These two
types of signals are sent to the phase control circuit; the phases of the frequencies of the
hall IC output pulses and the reference pulses are compared, and the output timing of
the drive signal to the main motor is controlled so that the phases match, causing the
speed of the motor to remain at a specific value.
e Checking the Main Motor for an Error
The motor driver keeps the main motor lock signal (MMLOCK) at ‘0’ as long as the
main motor is rotating at a specific speed. If a discrepancy occurs in the rotation of the
main motor for some reason, the MMLOCK signal goes ‘1’.
The DC controller identifies a main motor error if the MMLOCK remains ‘1’ for about
2 sec, and stops the main motor and, at the same time, indicates ‘E010’.
2-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
FrequencyVoltage
converter
J502
J107
DC
-3
controller
PCB
-4
-5
MMD
-3
MMLOCK
-2
MMCLK
±5V
DC
Power
Supply
PCB
W
-1
Rotor
-1
-5
-2
-4
J501
J634
U
V
Phase
control
circuit
-1
±24VB
-1
-2
GND
-2
Hall IC
Drive
circuit
Reference signal
Main motor driver PCB
Figure 2-104
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-7
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
E. Inputs to the DC Controller
1. Input to the DC Controller (1/5)
DC controller PCB
Scanner home
position sensor
Cassette 1
paper sensor
Cassette 1
lifter sensor
Cassette 2
paper sensor
Cassette 2
lifter sensor
Multifeeder
paper sensor
Vertical path
roller 1 paper
sensor
Vertical path
roller 2 paper
sensor
Pre-registration
paper sensor
J62
-1
-2
PS1
-3
J711
-1
-2
PS2
-3
J709
-1
-2
PS3
-3
J717
-1
-2
PS4
-3
PS5
J716
-1
-2
-3
PS6
J729
-1
-2
-3
J706
-4
-9
-5
-8
-6
-7
J113 ±5V
-3B
-2B
SCHP
-1B
when scanner is at
home position, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS1)
J116 ±5V
-9A
-8A
C1PD
-7A
when paper is present in
cassette 1, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS2)
±5V
-6
-5
-4
-7
-8
-9
-6A
-5A
-4A
C1LTP
J115 ±5V
-3B
-2B
C2PD
-1B
J713
-10 -6
-9 -7
-8 -8
when lifter of cassette 1 is up, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS3)
when paper is present in
cassette 2, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS4)
±5V
-13
-12
-11
-6B
-5B
-4B
-3
-4
-5
C2LTP
when lifter of cassette 2 is up, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS5)
J725
-3
-8
-2
-9
-1
-10
J104 ±5V
-7B
-6B
MFPD
-5B
when paper is present in the
multifeeder tray, '0'.
(light-blocking plate is not at PS6)
PS7
J708
-1
-2
-3
J706
-3 -10
-2 -11
-1 -12
J116 ±5V
-3A
-2A PDP2
*
-1A
PS8
J718
-1
-2
-3
J713
-7 -9
-6 -10
-5 -11
J115 ±5V
-8A
-7A PDP1
*
-6A
when PS8 detects paper, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS8)
PS9
J55
-3
-2
-1
J54
-1
-3
-2
-2
-3
-1
J117 ±5V
-12B
-13B PDP3
-14B
when PS9 detects paper, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS9)
when PS7 detects paper, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS7)
Figure 2-105
2-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Input to the DC Controller (2/5)
DC controller PCB
PS10
J37
-1
-2
-3
PS11
J32
-1
-2
-3
J30
-5
-1
-4
-2
-3
-3
-5B
-4B
-3B
PS12
J33
-1
-2
-3
J96
-3 -1
-2 -2
-1 -3
-8B
-7B
-6B
PS13
J22
-1
-2
-3
Separation sensor
Delivery sensor
Lower feeder inlet
paper sensor
Lower feeder outlet
paper sensor
Horizontal
registration
paper sensor
Horizontal
registration roller
home position
sensor
Horizontal
registration
paper edge sensor
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
J35
J109 ±5V
-6A
-5A
PDP4*
-4A
-5
-4
-3
-7
-8
-9
when PS10 detects paper, '0'.
(light-blocking plate is not at PS10)
±5V
PDP5
*
when PS11 detects paper, '0'.
(light-blocking plate is not at PS11)
±5V
PDP6
when PS12 detects paper, '0'.
(light-blocking plate is not at PS12)
J21
-3 -3
-2 -4
-1 -5
J107 ±5V
-3
-2
PDP7
-1
when PS13 detects paper, '0'.
(light-blocking plate is not at PS13)
PS14
J52
-1
-2
-3
J51
-3 -1
-2 -2
-1 -3
J117 ±5V
-9B
-8B PDP8
-7B
when PS14 detects paper, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS14)
PS15
J47
-1
-2
-3
J50
-3 -1
-2 -2
-1 -3
±5V
-6B
-5B HRHP
-4B
PS16
J49
-1
-2
-3
J48
-3 -2
-2
-3
-1 -4
-3B
-2B
-1B
PS17
J74
-1
-2
-3
PS18
J712
-1
-2
-3
Right door sensor
J706
-12 -1
-11 -2
-10 -3
*
when horizontal registration roller
is at home position, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS15)
±5V
HRPD
when PS16 detects paper, '1'.
J102 ±5V
-10A
-9A CBCC
-8A
when copyboard cover is closed, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS17)
J116 ±5V
-12A
-11A RDC
*
-10A
when right door is closed, '0'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS18)
Figure 2-106
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-9
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Input to the DC Controller (3/5)
DC controller PCB
Lens home
position sensor
PS19
J82
-1
-2
-3
Motor driver 1 PCB
J79
J204 ±5V
-3
-11 -3
J203 J107
-12 -2
-10
-1
-2
LHP
-13 -1
-1
when lens is at home position,'1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS19)
Motor driver 2 PCB
Blank shutter home
position sensor
PS20
J27
-1
-2
-3
-9
-8
-7
J953 ±5V
J24
-1 -11
J951 J114
when PS20 detects blank shutter, '1'.
-2 -10
-12A
-3
BLHP (light-blocking plate is at PS20)
-3
-9
Motor driver 1 PCB
J79
-10
-4
J204 J203 J107 ±24VA
-9
-2
-10
-2
-11
-3
-11
-3
-3
-12
-2
-12
-4
-4
-13
-1
-13
-5
J80
-1
AE sensor
AE
AE
See p.4-16
-7 AEREF
-6
NO
J35
-3
-9
C
-8
-4
-9A
NO
-7
-5
-8A
C
-6
-6
-7A
MSW1
Wire cleaner home
position switch
-8
J109
-10A WCHP
MSW2
Wire cleaner rear
position switch
SSW
Service switch
TS1
Toner sensor
TH1
Thermistor
Control panel PCB
J803 J809
J803
-12 -1
-10
-1
-2
-3 -10 -1
WCRP
J117 ±5V
-5A
-4A TEP
*
-3A
J34
-1 -1
J109
-10B TH1
-9B
-3
when transfer corona wire cleaner
is at rear, '1'.
J110 ±5V
when service switch is pressed, '1'.
-1B
-10B
SERVICE
J57
-1
-1
-2
-2
-3
-3
-3
when transfer corona wire cleaner
is at home position (front), '1'.
when toner in developing assembly
is blow specific level, '0'.
when surface temperature of fixing
roller increases,
voltage decreases .(analog)
Figure 2-107
2-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
4. Input to the DC Controller (4/5)
DC controller PCB
J67
PS21
Original size
sensor 1
J66
J103 ±5V
-3
-2
-1
-2
-3
-2
-10 -3B
-11 -2B
-1
-3
-1
-12 -1B
-3
-2
-1
-2
-6
-5
-7
-8
-6B
-5B
-1
-3
-4
-9
-4B
-3
-2
-1
-2
-9
-8
-4
-5
-9B
-8B
-1
-3
-7
-6
-7B
-3
-1
-12
-1 -12B
-2
-1
-2
-3
-11
-10
-2 -11B
-3 -10B
J68
PS22
Original size
sensor 2
(AB only)
Original size
sensor 3
Original size
sensor 4
SEU1
Cassette 1
paper length
sensor unit
PS102
PS101
SIZE1
when original size sensor 2
detects original, '0'.
±5V
J70
PS24
when original size sensor 1
detects original, '0'.
±5V
J69
PS23
SIZE0
SIZE2
when original size sensor 3
detects original, '0'.
±5V
J724
-4
-1
SIZE3
when original size sensor 4
detects original, '0'.
J104 ±5V
-4A
-1
-4
-1A
C1SZ2
-2
-3
-2A
C1SZ1
-3
-2
-3A
See p. 5-11
Cassette 2
paper length
sensor unit
SEU2
PS104
PS103
±5V
J723
-4
-1
-8A
-1
-4
-5A
C2SZ2
-2
-3
-6A
C2SZ1
-3
-2
-7A
Figure 2-108
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-11
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
5. Input to the DC Controller (5/5)
DC controller PCB
Cassett 1
paper width
detection VR
Cassett 2
paper width
detection VR
Multifeeder
paper width
detection VR
SVR1
SVR2
SVR3
J722
-3
-1
-2
-2
-1
-3
J104 ±5V
-11A
-10A
C1PW
-9A
J721
-1
-3
-2
-2
-1
-3
-14A
-13A
C2PW
-12A
detects paper width with
reference to side guide in
cassette 1. (analog)
±5V
±5V
J725
J726
-1 -14B
-3
-1 -10
-2 -13B
-2
-2 -9
MFPW
-3 -12B
-1
-3 -8
detects paper width with
reference to side guide in
cassette 2 . (analog)
detects paper width in
reference to position of
side guide in multifeeder. (analog)
Figure 2-109
2-12
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
F. Outputs from the DC Controller
1. Output from the DC Controller (1/5)
Door switch
DSW1
Power switch
SW1
ON
DC controller PCB
CB1
OFF
NF1
J117 ±24V
-1A
-2A
when '0', power
PWOFF* switch goes OFF.
H3
Drum heater
J112
-8B
TSW1
Fixing main heater
H1
-7B
Fixing sub heater
H2
MHRD
when '1', main
heater goes ON.
SHRD
when '1', sub
heater goes ON.
-5B
-9B
-6B
MSSRD
SSSRD
when heater
goes ON, '1'.
SSR
Scanning lamp
LA1
Lamp
regulator
See p. 4-3
FU1
Power supply
PCB cooling
fan
FM5
J635
-1
-2
-3
±24VB
FM5LOCK
DC power supply PCB
Figure 2-110
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-13
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Output from the DC Controller (2/5)
DC controller PCB
Main motor
J106 ±5V
-1
-3 MMD
-4 MMLOCK
-5 MMCLK
-2
J502-5
-3
M1
-2
-1
-4
Main motor
J501-1
driver PCB
-2
See p. 2-6
±24VB To DC power
supply PCB
Scanning
motor
M2
See p. 3-7
Lens motor
M3
See p. 3-4
Hopper motor
M4
See p. 4-24
Horizontal
registration
motor
M5
-1
-4
-2
-3
-5
-6
J85
-6
-3
-5
-4
-2
-1
±24VB
J206
-1
-4
-2
-3 Drive
-5 circuit
-6
J202J106
-6B HRCLK
-7B HRRON
-8B HRD
-10
Drive
pulse
-9
generation
-8
circuit
when M5 is rotating,generates pulse
signal.
when '1', M5 moves forward.
when '0', M5 moves in reverse.
when '1', M5 goes ON.
Motor driver 1 PCB
Delivery motor
Lower feeder
motor
Blank shutter
motor
See p. 6-9
M6
M7
M8
J28
-4
-3
-3
-4
-6
-1
-2
-5
-2
-5
-1
-6
J26
-2 -5
-5 -2
-1 -6
-4 -3
-3 -4
-6 -1
±24VB
J954
-4
-3
-6
-5 Drive
-2 circuit
-1
J24 J953
-2 -8 -4
-5 -5 -7
-1 -9 -3
-4 -6 -6
-3 -7 -5 ±24VB
-6 -4 -8
±5V
Drive
pulse
generation
ciruit
J951 J114
-11
-4A LFCLK
-7
-8A LFRON
-6
-9A LFD
-5
-4
-10A BLA
-11A BLB
when M7 is rotating,generates pulse
signal.
when '1', M7 moves forward.
when '0', M7 moves in reverse.
when '1', M7 goes ON.
when M8 is rotating,
alternates between '1' and '0'.
(pulse)
-12
-3A BLHLD
when M8 is rotating, '0'.
-13
-14
-1A CLCW
-2A CLCCW
when 'CLCW=1' and 'CLCCW=0',
wire cleaner goes forward.
when 'CLCW=0' and 'CLCCW=1',
wire cleaner goes reverse.
±12V
J35 J25
J38
-1 -2 -10 -2 -1 -2 -1
Cleaner motor M11 -2 -1 -11 -1 -2 -1 -2
Drive
circuit
Motor driver 2 PCB
Figure 2-111
2-14
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Output from the DC Controller (3/5)
DC controller PCB
J58
Cassette 1
lifter motor
Cassette 2
lifter motor
Scanner cooling
fan
Exhaust fan 1
M9
-1
-2
M10
J59
-2
-1
-2
-1
FM1
J76
-2
-1
-1
-2
FM2
J88
-2
-1
-2
-1
J117
-6A
-2
-1
-7A
C1LTD*
-8A C2LTD
*
-9A
J102 ±24VB
-3A
-4A SCFD
*
J95
-4
-3
-4
-3
when '1', M9 rotates.
(lifter up)
when '1', M10 rotates.
(lifter up)
when '0', FM1 goes ON.
±24VB
J113 ±12V
-9A
-10A
EF1D
*
when '1', FM2 and FM3
rotate at full speed.
when '0', FM2 and FM3
rotate at half speed.
when '0', FM2 goes ON.
J89
Exhaust fan 2
Feeding fan
Registration clutch
-2
-1
FM3
-1
-2
FM4
J36
-2
-1
-1
-2
CL1
-1
-2
-6
-5
J35
-1
-2
-2
-1
-11
-10
J71
-1
-2
-7A
-8A EF2D
*
J109
-2A
-3A
J103
-2A
-1A
±12V ±24VB
FFD*
when '0', FM3 goes ON.
when '1', FM4 rotates at
full speed.
when '0', FM4 rotates at
half speed.
when'0', FM4 goes ON.
±12V ±24VB
RGCD*
when CL1 is ON, 24V for
0.03 sec; later,12V.
when '0', CL1 goes ON.
Cassette 1
pick-up clutch
Cassette 2
pick-up clutch
Multifeeder
pick-up clutch
Vertical path
roller 1 clutch
±24VB
CL2
J704
-1
-2
-2
-1
J701
-5
-6
-6
-5
J116
-6B
-5B
CL3
J720
-2
-1
-2
-1
J713
-2
-14
-1
-15
J115 ±24VB
-3A
-2A
C2PUCD*
CL4
J727
-2
-1
-2
-1
J725
-7
-4
-5
-6
J104 ±24VB
-11B
-10B
MFCD*
CL5
J703
-2
-1
-2
-1
J701
-4
-7
-8
-3
C1PUCD*
when '0', CL2 goes ON.
when '0', CL3 goes ON.
when '0', CL4 goes ON.
±24VB
-4B
-3B VR1CD
*
when '0', CL5 goes ON.
Figure 2-112
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-15
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
4. Output from the DC Controller (4/5)
DC controller PCB
Vertical path
roller 2 clutch
Lower feeder
outlet clutch
CL6
J719
-2
-1
-2
-1
J713
-4
-12
-13
-3
±24VB
J103
-6A
-5A LFCD
*
J73
-2
-1
-2
-1
CL7
J115 ±24VB
-5A
-4A VR2CD
*
Cassette 1
pick-up release
solenoid
Cassette 2
pick-up release
solenoid
Multifeeder
pick-up solenoid
Cleaning belt
solenoid
Blank shutter
solenoid
Lower feeder
flapper solenoid
-2
-1
CL8
-1
-2
-4A
-3A HRCD
*
SL1
J705
-2
-1
-2
-1
J701
-8
-3
-7
-4
±24VB
J116
-8B
-7B C1RSD
*
SL2
J714
-2
-1
-2
-1
J713
-1
-15
-2
-14
±24VB
J115
-8B
-7B C2RSD
*
SL3
J728
-3
-1
-3
-1
J725
-5
-6
-7
-4
J90
-1
-2
-1
-2
SL4
when '0',CL7 goes ON.
±24VB
J72
Horizontal
registration
clutch
when '0', CL6 goes ON.
when '0', CL8 goes ON.
when '0', SL1 goes ON.
when '0', SL2 goes ON.
±24VB
J104
-9B
-8B MFPUSD when '0', SL3 goes ON.
*
J113
-2A
-1A
±24VB
CBSD*
when '0', SL4 goes ON.
±24VB
SL5
J92
-2
-1
-2
-1
J91
-4
-1
-2
-3
-6A
-5A
SL6
-2
-1
J23
-1
-2
J21
-5
-1
-2
-4
J108
-5
-4
BLSD*
when '0', SL5 goes ON.
±24VB
LFSD*
when '0', SL6 goes ON.
Figure 2-113
2-16
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
5. Output from the DC Controller (5/5)
DC controller PCB
J53
Horizontal
registration
solenoid
-2
-1
SL7
J93
-2
-1
Pre-exposure lamp
-1
-2
-1
-2
J91
-4
-3
J117 ±24VB
-11B
-10B
HRSD*
J113 ±24VB
-3A
-4A PEXP
*
LA2
Total copy counter
CNT1
-1
J64
Copy counter
(option)
CNT2
-1
-2
J63
-1 -1
-2 -2
when '0', pre-exposure
lamp goes ON.
±24VB
J61
-2
when '0', SL7 goes ON.
-2
-1
J65
-2
-1
-4
-3
-5
-9B
-10B CNTD
*
when '0', CNT1 goes ON.
±24VB
-7B
-8B CNT2D
*
-5B CNTSL1
-6B CNTSL2
-4B
when '0', CNT2 goes ON.
Counter circuit
PCB
Figure 2-114
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-17
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the Accessories (1/1)
DC controller PCB
-3
-1
-2
-4
J730
-4
-1
-2
-3
-2
-3
-1
-4
-10
-12
-9
-11
J731
-1
0V
-2
0V
-3
±24VB
-4
±24VB
-1
-3
-2
-4
-1
-3
-2
-4
-10
-12
-9
-11
-1
-2
-3
-4
-8
-4
-10
-1
-3
-2
-3
-1
-2
-7
-5
-6
-11
-12
-1
-2
J732
J104
-1B D-TXD
-3B
D-RXD
-2B
-4B
Refer to the DF
Service Manual.
Connected to
DF
J39
J41
Connected to
sorter
J112
-8A
-10A
-9A
-11A
-4
-2
-3
-1
S-TXD
S-RXD
Refer to the sorter
Service Manual.
J40
0V
0V
±24VB
±24VB
Connected
to DC
power supply
PCB
J42
J44
Connected to
pedestal
Connected
to DC
power supply
PCB
J112
-3A
-1A
-2A
-7A
-5A
-6A
-5
-7
-6
-1
-3
-2
±5V
FEED-STOP
FACE-DOWN
PD-TXD
PD-RXD
See p. 8-1
J43
±24VB Connected to
DC power
0V
supply
PCB
Figure 2-115
2-18
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3
EXPOSURE SYSTEM
This chapter describes the outline of the purposes, roles and operations of the lens
driving, optical system and original detection of this copier, the relationship between
the electric system and mechanical system and the operational timing of each
component.
I.
II.
III.
BASIC OPERATION...........................3-1
A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio.....3-1
LENS DRIVE SYSTEM ......................3-2
A. Movement of the Lens...................3-2
SCANNER DRIVE MECHANISM .......3-6
A. Driving the Scanner.......................3-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
IV.
V.
OTHERS.............................................3-13
A. Controlling the Detection of
Original Sizes.................................3-13
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......3-19
A. Scanner Drive Assembly ...............3-19
B. Lens Drive Assembly.....................3-30
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I. BASIC OPERATION
A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio
The ratio in the axial direction of the photosensitive drum is varied by the lens drive
system, and the ratio in the peripheral direction of the photosensitive drum is varied by
the scanner drive system.
The lens drive system uses a zoom lens, and it varies the reproduction ratio in the
axial direction of the photosensitive drum by changing the lens position and the focal
distance.
The scanner drive system moves the No.1 mirror relatively faster (Reduce) or slower
(Enlarge) than the peripheral speed of the photosensitive drum, thereby varying the
peripheral reproduction ratio.
Direct
F´
F
Reduce
F1´
F1
Enlarge
F2´
F2
Figure 3-101
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-1
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
II. LENS DRIVE SYSTEM
A. Movement of the Lens
1. Outline
The lens assembly is driven by the lens motor (M3).
The machine uses center reference, in which copy paper is centered along the
feeding path for pick-up and feeding. Figure 3-201 shows the spatial relationship
between copy paper and original.
When the power switch is turned on, the lens motor (M3) starts to rotate, moving the
lens in the direction of the lens home position sensor (PS19). The lens motor starts to
rotate in reverse when the signal plate blocks the lens home position sensor, and stops
when the lens is at Direct position.
The microprocessor on the DC controller remembers the Direct position of the lens.
When the ratio is changed, drive pulses corresponding in number to the selected ratio
will be applied to the lens motor to promptly change the position of the lens.
When moving in Enlarge direction (as from Reduce to Direct), the lens is first moved
past the position for the selected ratio; it is then moved back to the appropriate position
by rotating the lens motor in reverse, thereby ensuring correct positioning of the lens.
Copyboard glass
Copier
Original
Reference
Copy paper
Figure 3-201
3-2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
Lens
Cam plate
Lens motor
(M3)
Lens home position signal
(LHP)
Lens motor drive command
Cam groove
Signal plate
Lens home position
sensor (PS19)
Motor driver 1 PCB
:Enlargement
:Reduction
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-202
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-3
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2. Lens Motor Drive Circuit
Figure 3-203 shows the circuit used to control the lens motor (M3).
The lens motor is a 2-phase stepping motor, and is controlled by the lens motor drive
pulse command (LEA, LEB) and the lens motor hold command (LEHLD) generated by
the DC controller. The direction of its rotation, on the other hand, is controlled by
changing the output timing of the LEA command and the LEB command.
The LEHLD command remains ‘1’ while the lens motor is rotating, applying 24 V to
the motor. The LEHLD command remains ‘0’ while the motor is at rest, applying 5 V to
the motor by way of applying brakes.
±24VB ±5V
J106
-4B
J202
LEHLD
LEPOW
-12
LEPOW
DC
controller
PCB
LEA
-2B
LEA
-14
±5V
LEA*
LEB
-3B
LEB
LEB
-13
Drive circuit
M3
*
Lens motor
Motor driver 1 PCB
Figure 3-203
3-4
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
3. Focusing
The copier’s zoom lens unit consists of multiple lenses.
The zoom lens focuses on images with the help of the cam plate mount inside the
zoom lens unit.
The cam plate moves along the cam groove in the lens stage and focuses on images
by varying the distance between multiple lenses.
Lens home position signal (LHP)
Motor driver 1
PCB
DC controller PCB
Lens motor drive command
M3
Lens motor
Rail
Lens drive belt
Lens mount
Reduce
Zoom lens
Lens home position
sensor (PS19)
Signal plate
Cam groove
Cam plate
Lens stage
Figure 3-204
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-5
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
III. SCANNER DRIVE MECHANISM
A. Driving the Scanner
1. Outline
The scanner is driven by the scanning motor (M2). The scanning motor changes its
direction of rotation to move the scanner forward and in reverse. The speed of rotation
when moving the scanner forward varies continuously according to the selected
reproduction ratio; however, the speed of rotation when moving the scanner in reverse
remains a specific value (about 2.7 times when moving the scanner forward) regardless
of the selected reproduction ratio.
The distance over which the scanner travels varies according to the length of copy
paper and the reproduction ratio.
Scanning motor (M2)
Scanning motor drive command
Forward
No. 1 mirror mount
Signal plate
Reverse
No. 2 mirror mount
Scanner home position
signal (SCHP)
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Motor driver 1 PCB
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-301
3-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2. Scanning Motor Control Circuit
The scanning motor (M2) is a 4-phase control stepping motor.
Figure 3-302 is a block diagram of the circuit used to control the scanning motor, and
the circuit has the following functions:
q Turning on and off the motor.
w Controlling the rotation of the motor.
e Controlling the speed of the motor.
r Stabilizing the motor.
±5V
J106
DC
controller
PCB
±24VB
J202
-5A
SCM1
-3
SCA
-6A
SCM2
-2
SCA
-3A
SCCLK
-5
-4A
SCMD
-4
*
*
Drive circuit
SCB
M2
-1A
SCRET
-7
-7A
SCVREF
-1
-2A
SCRON
-6
SCB*
Scanning motor
Motor driver 1 PCB
Figure 3-302
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-7
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
a. Turning On and Off the Motor
The motor is turned on and off by the scanning motor drive command (SCMD*).
When the SCMD* command goes ‘1’, the drive pulse command (SCA, SCA*, SCB,
SCB*) goes off so that the motor will not rotate. When the SCMD* command goes ‘0’,
the drive pulse command (SCA, SCA*, SCB, SCB*) goes on to rotate the motor.
b. Controlling the Direction of Rotation of the Motor
The scanning motor rotation command (SCRON) is used to change the order of
output of the drive pulse command (SCA, SCA*, SCB, SCB*).
When the SCRON command is ‘0’, the scanner motor (M2) rotates clockwise,
thereby moving the scanner forward. When the SCRON command goes ‘1’, on the other
hand, the scanner motor (M2) rotates counterclockwise, thereby moving the scanner in
reverse.
c. Controlling the Speed of the Motor
The scanning motor clock pulse command (SCCLK) is used to control the speed of
the motor. The speed of rotation varies when the cycles of the SCCLK command are
varied.
d. Stabilizing the Rotation of the Motor
If variations are noted in the output (amplitude) of the drive pulse signal (SCA, SCA*,
SCB, SCB*), the DC controller PCB accordingly varies the output (analog) of the
reference voltage command (SCVREF) for control so that the amplitude of the pulse
signal remains the same.
3-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
e. Output Timing of Motor Control Signals
The scanning motor (M2) is controlled so that the step angle occurring when it
rotates is small by incrementally increasing the current of the drive pulse command
(SCA, SCA*, SCB, SCB*) generated by the motor driver 1 PCB (high speed response,
low amplitude drive, low noise drive).
Figure 3-303 shows the relationship between the size (current) of the drive pulse
signal and the timing.
SCRET
SCMD
SCCLK
SCM1
SCM2
SCA
SCA*
SCB*
SCB*
Figure 3-303
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-9
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
3. Relationship between Scanner Sensor and Signals
Scanner sensor
Signal
Scanner home
position
SCHP
Scanner
Forward
Reverse
Remarks
• Registration clutch ON
• In 0.1 sec, scanner reverse
OFF
Table 3-301
4. Sequence of Scanner Movements (Enlarge/Reduce)
Power switch
ON
WMUP
COPY START key
ON(AE)
INTR
COPY START key
ON(AE deselected)
SCFW
SCRV LSTR
INTR
SCFW
SCRV LSTR
STBY
AER
Scanning motor (M2)
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
HP seach
Forward Reverse
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Figure 3-304
3-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
5. Sequence of Scanner Movements (page separation mode, 2 copies)
Document leading Document leading Document leading Document leading Document leading Document leading
edge of 1st page edge of 1st page edge of 1st page edge of 2nd page edge of 1st page edge of 2nd page
INTR
SCFW1 SCRV1 SCFW1 SCRV1
I
I
SCFW2
II
SCRV2
III
SCFW2
II
SCRV2
LSTR
III
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Scanning motor drive
command (SCMD)
Scanning motor rotation
command (SCRON)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Reverse
Figure 3-305
For I, II, and III shown in Figure 3-305, control is with reference to the leading edge
of the 1st original (falling edge of PS1).
I:
The distance from the leading edge of an original over which the scanner moves is
determined by the selected reproduction ratio and cassette size as in the case of
normal copying.
II: More or less the same as I; however, if the distance over which the scanner travels
is longer than 210mm/8.5”, 210mm/8.5” will be used as the leading edge of the 2nd
original.
If it is shorter than 210mm/8.5”, the point at which the scanner reverses in I will be
used as the leading edge of the 2nd original.
III: The same as I.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-11
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
Reference:
The distance over which the scanner moves (maximum) from the leading edge of
an original (10mm/0.4” forward from the falling edge of PS1) is 432mm/17”; further,
the distance is limited in relation to the selected reproduction ratio. In the case of
200% enlargement, the scanner may move up to 216mm/8.5”.
Reference:
If more than two modes are selected, the scanner is controlled based on the
smallest original size identified.
If any of the following modes is selected, the scanner is controlled based on the
original size.
Mode
Original size used as reference
With feeder (RDF/ADF) in use
Original size detected by feeder
Original frame erase mode
Original size set by user
Table 3-302
3-12
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
IV. OTHERS
A. Controlling the Detection of Original Sizes
1. Outline
The copier is provided with auto paper selection, auto ratio selection, and image
composition functions, all requiring identification of the size of originals.
As many as four original sensors for AB configuration and three original sensors for
inch configuration are mounted under the copyboard glass; when the copyboard cover
is closed, the presence/absence of an original over respective sensors is detected,
identifying the size of the original as being A3, A4, B4, or B5 for AB configuration and as
being 11” x 17 ” (LDR), LGL, or LTR for inch configuration (default sizes).
Each original sensor consists of a LED and a phototransistor: the light from the LED
is detected by the photosensor, whose output is sent to the DC controller.
The size of original from the DF (accessory) is detected by the DF, and the data is
sent to the machine, which uses the data for auto paper selection, ratio selection, and
image composition while the DF is in use.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-13
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
Copyboard cover open/closed sensor
PS17
PS23
PS24
B5R
A4R
PS21
A4
SIZE3
SIZE2
A3
SIZE0
LED
SIZE1
PS22
Photointerrupter
B4
B5
DC controller PCB
AB - configuration
Figure 3-401
Copyboard cover open/closed sensor
PS17
PS24
PS23
LTRR
PS21
LGL
11"~17"
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE0
LTR
DC controller PCB
Inch - configuration
Figure 3-402
3-14
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2. Operation
When the copyboard cover is brought down to about 30°, the copyboard cover
open/closed sensor (PS17) turns ON, i.e., the light-blocking plate blocks PS17.
After PS17 has turned ON, the output level of each size sensor is read for 15 sec or
until the Copy Start key is pressed at intervals of about 0.1 sec. If the output level
remains the same during the period, the copier assumes the presence of an original at
the respective sensors, ultimately identifying the size of the original according to Table
3-401/3-402.
Although this way of identification can detect the size of a black original, the output
level of the sensor will not change in the following cases:
a. Black original of A3/11”×17"
b. Book original (the thickness prevents changes in level)
Reference:
a or b can cause wrong detection of the size.
Copyboard cover
Origina
15°~30°
PS17: ON
Copyboard glass
ON
Original
size sensor
OFF
ON
No change
in level
ON
Change
in level
Original
size sensor
Figure 3-403
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-15
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
3. Identifying the Size of Originals
Based on combinations of the states of the original size sensors, the DC controller
circuit identifies the size of each original as shown in Table 3-401 and Table 3-402.
• OFF
The output of the sensor when the copyboard cover is brought down to 15°
through 30° and the output 15 sec thereafter are the same (detecting an
original).
• ON
The output of the sensor when the copyboard cover is brought down to 15°
through 30° and the level when it is fully closed are different (detecting no
original).
Original size sensor
Original size
PS21
PS22
PS23
PS24
A3
ON
ON
ON
ON
B4
ON
OFF
ON
ON
A4R
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
A4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
B5
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
B5R
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
NO
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON: represents the presence of a original
OFF: represents the absence of a original
Table 3-401
Original size sensor
Original size
PS21
PS23
PS24
11”×17”
ON
ON
ON
LGL
OFF
ON
ON
LTRR
OFF
ON
OFF
LTR
ON
OFF
OFF
NO
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON: represents the presence of a original
OFF: represents the absence of a original
Table 3-402
3-16
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
4. Identifying the Size of Originals by the Document Feeder
a. Outline
The document feeder (accessory) identifies the size of an original in response to
commands from the copier as follows:
q If the installed cassette is AB-configured, the copier instructs the document feeder to
check for AB-configured originals.
w If the installed cassette is Inch-configured, the copier instructs the document feeder
to check for Inch-configured originals.
The DF identifies the size of an original as above; however, some part of an image
may be missing on copies if the original and the copies are of different sizes.
EX. A4 Original, LTR Copy
Paper (LTR)
(delivery)
Original (A4)
Figure 3-404
• If the original is A4 and the copy is LTR, the bottom of the original will be missing.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-17
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
EX. A4 original, Enlarge, LTR Copy
LTR
Output image
A4 original
Figure 3-405
s
• The original will be identified as LTR. Since enlargement will be with reference to the
triangle in Figure 3-405 ( ), the shaded area will be missing.
EX. LTR Original, Enlarge, A4 Copy
Margin
LTR original
Output image
A4
Figure 3-406
•
s
The original will be identified as A4. Since the enlargement will be with reference to
the triangle in Figure 3-406 ( ), the margin at the top of the copy will increase.
3-18
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
V. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to
disassemble/assemble the copier.
Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the copier:
1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for two of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the copier while any of its parts is removed.
7. Be sure to turn off the front door switch or the power switch before sliding out the
fixing assembly.
A. Scanner Drive Assembly
1. Removing the Scanner Motor
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Disconnect the connector J205 w from the motor driver 1 PCB q.
w
q
Figure 3-501
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-19
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
3) Remove the four screws e, and remove the scanner motor r.
r
e
e
Figure 3-502
2. Outline of the Scanner Drive Cable
Figure 3-503
3-20
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
3. Removing the Scanner Drive Cable
1) Remove the copyboard cover, right cover, left cover, upper rear cover, and rear
cover.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
3) Remove the control panel. (See p. 7-14.)
4) Remove the two screws q, and remove the power switch mount w.
q
Figure 3-504
q
w
Figure 3-505
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-21
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
5) Remove the screw e, and remove the pulley cover r.
e
r
Figure 3-506
6) Remove the four screws t, and remove the upper left stay y.
y
t
t
Figure 3-507
7) Remove the scanner cooling fan. (See p. 7-15.)
8) Remove the four screws u, and remove the front glass support i.
u
i
u
u
Figure 3-508
3-22
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
9) Disconnect the connector o, and remove the two screws !0; then, remove the
copyboard support !1.
!0
o
!1
!0
Figure 3-509
10) Remove the three screws !2, and remove the rear glass support !3.
!2
!3
!2
Figure 3-510
!3
!2
Figure 3-511
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-23
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
11) Mark the position of the pulley plate !4 with a scriber on the side plate (both front and
rear).
!4
!4
(front)
(rear)
Figure 3-512
12) Move the No. 1 mirror mount in the forward direction, and match the long angle in
the side plate and the cable fixing screw !5.
Then, remove the cable fixing screw !5 (front: 2, rear: 4), and separate the No. 1
mirror mount and the scanner cable (both front and rear).
!5
!5
(rear)
Figure 3-513
!5
(front)
Figure 3-514
3-24
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
13) Loosen the pulley plate fixing screw !6; then, loosen the tension screw !7, and
loosen the cable wire (both front and rear)
14) Remove the scanner cable !8 (both front and rear).
!6
!8
!7
(front)
Figure 3-515
!8
!6
!7
!6
(rear)
Figure 3-516
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-25
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
4. Routing the Scanner Cable
Note:
You will need a mirror positioning tool (FY9-3002-000) to route the scanning cable.
Figure 3-517
The tool is used in common with other models.
To use, loosen the screws, extend the two arms (both front and rear) fully, and tighten
the screws.
1) Move the No. 2 mirror mount so that the No. 2 mirror mount pulley shaft q is in view
through the long hole in the side plate.
q
Figure 3-518
3-26
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2) Fit the binding screw w (M4) in the screw hole of the pulley shaft, and fix the No. 2
mirror mount in place on the side plate.
w
Figure 3-519
3) Engage the scanner cable on the pulley and the hook as shown in the figure.
q
y
e
w
Put the steel
ball into the
hole of the
pulley.
r
Wind it eight
times.
o
=0~
3mm
u
t
Fix temporarily.
i
Figure 3-520
4) Remove the screw fitted in step 2).
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-27
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
5) Install the mirror positioning tool e between the No. 1 mirror mount and No. 2 mirror
mount (both font and rear); then, put the tool pin r through the mirror positioning tool
and the lens mount rail.
e
r
Figure 3-521
e
r
Figure 3-522
3-28
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
6) Install the scanner cable plate to the No. 1 mirror mount with the cable fixing screw
t (front: 2, rear: 4) through the long hole in the side plate (both front and rear).
t
t
(rear)
Figure 3-523
t
Figure 3-524
Note:
If you cannot remove the tool pin smoothly after the work, check the gap between
the No. 2 mirror and the mirror positioning tool; then, tighten the screw on the No.
1 mirror mount as necessary once again.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-29
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
B. Lens Drive Assembly
1. Removing the Lens Motor
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the right end of the scanner rail.
Note:
When moving the No. 1 mirror mount, be sure to hold the middle of the mirror
mount.
3) Remove the two screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove the lens
motor assembly e.
q
w
e
Figure 3-525
4) Remove the two screws r, and disconnect the connector t; then, remove the lens
motor y.
t
r
r
y
Figure 3-526
3-30
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2. Attaching the Lens Drive Belt
Move the lens motor support q and fit it in place so that the reading of the spring
gauge is 1000 ± 50g when motor support q is pulled with a spring gauge in the direction
of the arrow at the point A indicated in Figure 3-527.
q
A
Figure 3-527
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-31
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
3. Removing the Lens hood
1) Remove the three screws q, and disconnect the two connectors w; then, remove
the lens hood e.
q
w
q
Figure 3-528
e
q
Figure 3-529
3-32
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
This chapter describes the outline of the purposes, roles and operations of image
formation process, the relationship between electric system and mechanical system
and the operational timing of each component.
I.
PROCESSES .....................................4-1
A. Outline ...........................................4-1
B. Basic Sequence of Operations
(image formation) ..........................4-2
C. Controlling the Scanner Lamp.......4-3
D. Controlling the Primary/
Transfer Corona Current
and the Grid Bias ..........................4-5
E. Controlling the Static Eliminator
Bias/Fixing Roller Bias ..................4-9
F. Controlling the Developing Bias ....4-11
G. Controlling Blank Exposure ...........4-14
H. Mesuring the Density of
Originals ........................................4-16
I. Cleaning the Transfer Charging
Wire ...............................................4-19
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
II.
III.
DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY/
DRUM CLEANER...............................4-21
A. Outline ...........................................4-21
B. Detecting the Level of Toner and
Controlling the Supply ...................4-23
C. Stopping the Hopper Motor in
Response to a Rotation Error........4-24
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......4-25
A. Scanning Lamp Assembly.............4-25
B. Blank Exposure Lamp Assembly ..4-28
C. Drum Unit ......................................4-34
D. Charging Assembly .......................4-36
E. Developing System .......................4-42
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
I. PROCESSES
A. Outline
•
•
•
•
•
The copier’s image formation system basically deals with the following:
Controlling the scanning lamp.
Controlling the primary/transfer corona current and the grid bias.
Controlling the static eliminator/fixing roller bias.
Controlling the developing bias.
Controlling the blank exposure lamp.
Copyboard
Lens
Scanning lamp
AE sensor
Fixing roller
Blank exposure
unit
Primary corona
assembly
Photosensitive
drum
Static
eliminator
Motor
driver 1
PCB
DC
controller
PCB
Lamp
regulator
Developing cylinder
Transfer corona
assembly
High-voltage
transformer (HVT)
Figure 4-101
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-1
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
B. Basic Sequence of Operations (image formation)
Power switch
ON
COPY START key
ON
WMUP WMUPR STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
AER
Main motor (M1)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Primary/Transfer
corona bias
Grid bias
Static eliminator/
fixing roller bias
Developing bias DC
component
Developing bias AC
component
*1
*1: Developing bias DC component output corresponding to back bias.
Figure 4-102
4-2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
C. Controlling the Scanner Lamp
1. Outline
Figure 4-103 shows the circuit used to control the intensity of the scanning lamp, and
the circuit has the following functions:
q Turning on and off the scanning lamp.
w Detecting the activation of the scanning lamp.
PWOFF
*
Power supply voltage
fluctuation detection circuit
Power
switch
(SW1)
J117
-2A
J103
-12A
IC115
LDT
Power supply
J603
-1
FU1
Differential
amplifier circuit
IC104
D/A
converter
-10A
LINT
Phase
control
-3
Arc
circuit
±24VA
IC109
-8A
LMPON -5
-11A
ZRCS
Q147
Zero-cross
detection
circuit
Scanning
lamp
(LA1)
Switching
circuit
-2
±24VA
-7A
-6
-9A
-4
DC controller PCB
Lamp regulator (CVR)
Figure 4-103
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-3
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2. Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp
The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB turns on the transistor (Q147) to send
the lamp ON command (LMPON) to the lamp regulator.
When the DC controller generates the light intensity signal (LINT), voltage of about
135 to 140 V (220 / 240 V) / 80 to 95 V (120 V) is supplied to the lamp, thereby turning
on the scanning lamp.
Reference:
If the density of copies has become excessively low because of deterioration in the
sensitivity of the drum, you may make correction by adjusting the setting of ‘301’ in
service mode or ‘U21’ in user mode. (However, the setting in user mode ‘U21’ is
narrower than that of the service mode the range of the adjustment.)
A lower setting will increase the value of the LINT signal (analog) and, as a result,
will raise the supply voltage to the lamp, thereby increasing its intensity.
3. Detecting the Activation of the Scanning Lamp
The lamp regulator sends the lamp ON detection signal (LDT) to the DC controller
while the scanning lamp is on.
If the LDT signal remains on for 22 sec, the DC controller will identify the condition
as an error and, as a result, will generate the power switch OFF signal (PWOFF*) to turn
off the power switch and cut off the AC power supply.
4. Protection Mechanism
The machine is equipped with a thermal fuse to prevent malfunction of the scanning
lamp.
The thermal fuse (FU1) will melt in response to overheating (about 104°C / 219F or
more) because of a short circuit or the like around the scanning lamp, thereby cutting the
power supplied to the scanning lamp.
4-4
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
D. Controlling the Primary/Transfer Corona Current and the Grid
Bias
1. Outline
Figure 4-104 shows the circuit used to control the primary/transfer corona current
and the grid bias of the primary charging assembly, and the circuit has the following
functions:
q Turning on and off the primary/transfer corona current.
w Keeping the primary/transfer corona current to a specific level.
e Turning on and off the grid bias.
J114 J401
-8B
-6
PTON*
Pr
Remote
circuit
AC drive circuit
Si
Primary
high-voltage
transformer
Voltage control
circuit
DC
controller
PCB
Current cortrol
circuit
Gr
-13B
-1
GRCONT
Comparator
circuit
Drive circuit
Tr
Transfer high-voltage
transformer
High-voltage transfer (HVT)
Figure 4-104
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-5
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2. Controlling the Primary/Transfer Corona Current
The primary/transfer corona current ON signal (PTON) from the DC controller is used
to turn on and off the primary/transfer corona current output.
• When the primary/transfer corona current output is on,
PTON*=0
→The remote circuit turns on.
→The AC drive circuit turns on.
→The primary high-voltage transformer turns on. (primary charging
corona current output)
→The transfer high-voltage transformer turns on. (transfer charging
corona current output)
• When the primary/transfer corona current output turns off,
PTON*=1
→The remote circuit turns off.
→The AC drive circuit turns off.
→The primary high-voltage transformer turns off.
→The transfer high-voltage transformer turns off.
Reference:
The copier turns on and off the primary and transfer corona currents at the same
time. The application voltage, on the other hand, is about -5.7 kV for primary, and
about -5.6 kV for transfer.
4-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
3. Keeping the Primary/Transfer Corona Current at a Specific Level
If an excess (or inadequate) corona current flows from the primary charging
assembly or the transfer charging assembly because of changes in the environment, the
level of the return current to the current control circuit will be higher (lower).
In such cases, the current control circuit controls the primary/transfer drive circuit so
that the current on the secondary side of the respective high-voltage transformer will be
smaller (larger). At the same time, the return voltage on the secondary side is introduced
to the voltage control circuit to control the primary/transfer drive circuit, thereby keeping
the primary side voltage constant.
As shown in Figure 4-105, the shielding plate of the primary charging assembly
receives the corona current generated by the primary corona wire. The high-voltage
power supply PCB (HVT) monitors the level of this current at all times; if it finds it to be
different from the standard value (-1.2 kV), the primary/transfer drive circuit starts to
control the primary corona current so that the current remains at a specific level at all
times.
HVT
AC Drive circuite
Primary corona
wire
R123~R125 R104
Current control circuit
Grid
Photosensitive drum
1200V
constant
Figure 4-105
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-7
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
4. Turning On and Off the Grid Bias
A voltage is applied to the grid wire while the primary corona current is being
generated to ensure even placement of charges on the drum.
The grid bias is controlled by the grid potential control command (GRCONT)
generated by the DC controller: a grid bias of about -800 V is applied when the DC
controller generates the GRCONT command (analog, about 5 V).
As shown in Figure 4-106, the machine keeps the grid bias at 0 V between sheets
of copy paper (A), and exerts control so that charges will not be placed on the drum by
sending primary charging corona current through the grid wire (GND).
To HVT
Primary corona wire
Grid
COPY PAPER
A
PAPER FEED DIRECTION
Photosensitive
drum
A
Non-charge
Charge
Figure 4-106
4-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
E. Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias/Fixing Roller Bias
1. Outline
Figure 4-107 shows the circuit used to control the static eliminator bias and the
fixing roller bias, and the circuit has the following functions :
q Turning on and off the static eliminator bias / fixing bias.
w Switching the output of the static eliminator bias.
J114 J401
-11B
-3
SFON*
Remote
circuit
Sp
AC drive circuit
Constant voltage
control circuit
DC
controller
PCB
Voltage control
circuit
-10B
-4
SPCH
Output
switching
circuit
FB
High-voltage
transformer
Current control
circuit
High-voltage transfer (HVT)
Figure 4-107
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-9
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2. Turning ON/OFF the Static Eliminator Bias/Fixing Bias
The DC controller generates the static eliminator/fixing roller bias ON command
(SFON*) to turn on and off the static eliminator bias and the fixing roller bias.
• When the static eliminator bias/fixing roller bias is on,
SFON*=0
→The remote circuit turns on.
→The AC drive circuit turns on.
→The high-voltage transformer turns on. (static eliminator bias/fixing
roller bias output)
When the high-voltage transformer turns on, a voltage of about 3.0 kV is applied to
the static eliminator and a voltage of about 740 V is applied to the upper fixing roller.
• When the static eliminator bias/fixing roller bias is OFF,
SFON*=1
→The remote circuit turns off.
→The AC drive circuit turns off.
→The high-voltage transformer turns off.
Reference:
The copier uses a conductive upper fixing roller so that residual charges on copy
paper flow through the roller when the paper moves through the fixing assembly,
causing toner to spread over the image if not remedied.
To prevent such a problem, a positive bias is applied to the fixing roller during
copying operation.
3. Switching the Output of the Static Eliminating Bias
Copy paper comes to possess high resistance once it has moved through the fixing
assembly. In automatic two-sided mode, therefore, the DC controller PCB generates the
static eliminator voltage level switch command (SPCH) to turn on the high-voltage
transformer, thereby applying static eliminator bias (about 4.0 kV) to the static eliminator.
application voltage
Conditions:
1st side of one-sided/automatic two-sided copy
about 3.0 kV
2nd side of automatic two-sided copy
about 4.0 kV
4. Preventing Separation Faults (thin paper picked up from the multifeeder)
If separation faults occur when copying on thin paper picked up from the multifeeder,
the voltage applied to the static eliminator may be kept at about 4.0 kV at all times so as
to facilitate separation of paper from the drum. (Use ‘510’ in service mode; for details,
see Chapter 11 “Service Mode.”)
4-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
F. Controlling the Developing Bias
1. Outline
Figure 4-108 shows the circuit used to control the developing bias, and the circuit
has the following functions:
q Turning on and off the DC component of the developing bias.
w Controlling the voltage level of the DC component of the developing bias.
e Turning on and off the AC component of the developing bias.
AC high-voltage
transformer
J114
-7B
Dp
J401
ACON
*
-7
Remote
circuit
AC drive circuit
DC
controller
PCB
DC high-voltage
transformer
-6B
-12B
DPON*
-8
DCBC
-2
Remote
circuit
Amplifier
circuit
Developing
cylinder
Photosensitive
drum
DC drive circuit
High-voltabe transformer (HVT)
Figure 4-108
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-11
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2. Turning On and Off DC Component of the Developing Bias and Controlling the
Voltage Level
The developing DC bias ON command (DPON*) generated by the DC controller is
used to turn on and off the DC component of the developing bias. The level of the voltage
is controlled by the DC bias control command (DCBC).
• When the DC component of the developing bias is on,
DPON*=0
→The remote circuit turns on.
→The amplifier circuit turns on.
→The DC drive circuit turns on.
→The DC high-voltage transformer turns on. (developing DC bias
output)
• When the developing bias DC component is off,
DPON*=1
→The remote circuit turns off.
→The amplifier circuit turns off.
→The DC drive circuit turns off.
→The DC high-voltage transformer turns off.
As shown in Figure 4-109, the voltage level of the DC component of the developing
bias is controlled by varying the voltage of the DCBC command (analog) generated by
the DC controller to suit the setting (output from the AE sensor) of the Copy Density key.
The level of the DC voltage generated by the high-voltage power supply varies according
to the level of the DCBC command.
With the exception of during copying operation (SCFW), the machine applies a DC
bias of about -320 V, thereby preventing undesirable adhesion of toner in areas between
sheets of copy paper and fogging in copy images.
Developing DC bias (V)
-500
-100
F1
F9
Copy density
Figure 4-109
4-12
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
3. Turning On and Off the AC Component of the Developing Bias
The DC component of the developing bias is turned on and off by the developing AC
bias ON command (ACON*) generated by the DC controller.
• When the AC component of the developing bas is on,
ACON*=0
→The remote circuit turns on.
→The AC drive circuit turns on.
→The AC high-voltage transformer turns on. (developing AC bias
output)
When the AC high-voltage transformer is on, a voltage of 1300 Vp-p is applied.
• When the AC component of the developing bias is off,
ACON*=1
→The remote circuit turns off.
→The AC drive circuit turns off.
→The AC high-voltage transformer turns off.
4. Sequence of Operations (developing bias)
Power switch
ON
COPY START key
ON
WMUP WMUPR STBY
INTR
STBY
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
Main motor (M1)
Developing bias AC
component
Developing bias DC
component
DC back bias
Figure 4-110
Reference:
The copier allows changing of the copy density manually during continuous copying
operation.
The copy density is determined as soon as the scanning lamp turns on, and the
new density will be effective for the next copy.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-13
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
G. Controlling Blank Exposure
1. Outline
The copier executes blank exposure by shining the light of the pre-exposure lamp
against the size blanking reflecting plate and the full blanking reflecting plate. The area
of blanking exposure is controlled by one opening/closing shutter and slide shutter.
Slide shutter (rear)
Size blanking reflecting plate
Blank shutter
motor
Total blanking reflecting plate
M8
Blank
shutter
solenoid
(SL5)
Pre-exposure lamp
Blank shutter
home position
sensor(PS20)
Blank shutter
home position
signal (BLHP)
Blank shutter
solenoid drive command (BLSD )
*
Slide shutter (front)
Open / Close shutter
DC controller PCB
Figure 4-111
4-14
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2. Operation
• Opening/Closing Shutter
The opening/closing shutter is located in the optical path for full blanking, and is
opened/closed by a blank shutter solenoid (SL5). A margin is created by opening the
opening/closing shutter operated by SL5 in relation to the leading and trailing edges of
copy paper.
• Slide Shutter
The two slide shutters are located in the optical path for size blanking, and are
positioned by the blank shutter motor (M8).
The blanking shutters serve to create left and right margins by blacking (whiting) out
non-image widths (as in reduced copying).
Size blank optical path
Total blank optical path
Size blanking
reflecting plate
Total blanking
reflecting plate
Open/Close shutter
Image exposure
optical path
Slide shutter
Pre-exposure
optical path
Drum cleaner
assembly
Photosensitive drum
Figure 4-112
3. Controlling the Slide Shutters
The front and rear slide shutters are operated simultaneously by the work of the
blank shutter motor (M8).
When the power is on, M8 first rotates the slide shutters to home position; then, M8
starts to rotate to slide the shutters to a specific position in response to the drive pulses
sent from the DC controller according to the reproduction ratio, paper size, and copying
mode.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-15
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
H. Mesuring the Density of Originals
120mm/4.7"
(approx.)
1. Outline
The copier is equipped with an automatic density adjustment (AE) function used to
control the DC component of the developing bias according to the density of originals.
The AE function changes the DC component of the developing bias so as to ensure
copies free of fogging as long as the original is more or less even in density.
The DC component controlled in AE mode is indicated in the copy density indicator
on the control panel.
27 mm/1.1"
(approx.)
15mm/0.6" 25mm/1.0"
(approx.) (approx.)
98mm/3.9"
(approx.)
45mm/1.8"
(approx.)
center
A
Note: A indicates the position
of the sensor
Figure 4-113
4-16
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2. Operation
During initial rotation (INTR), the scanner is moved forward by about 70 mm / 2.8”,
and the scanning lamp (LA1) is tuned on at a specific intensity to illuminate the original.
Then, the density of the original is read by the AE sensor, and its output is sent to the
DC controller.
Based on the output of the AE sensor, the DC controller controls the DC component
of the developing bias.
Figure 4-114 shows a graph showing the changes in the developing bias occurring
in relation to various original densities.
The graph is based on a degree of exposure which provides optimum density without
fogging when a newspaper and the Test Sheet is copied.
Reference:
During AE control, the copy density varies between F5 and F7.5, possibly
preventing an appropriate copy density if the original is considerably dark or light.
Developing DC bias
Copy density 7.5
equivalent
Copy density 5
equivalent
Test Sheet
Original density
Newspaper
Figure 4-114
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-17
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
3. AE Adjustment
The copier provides the following three types of AE adjustment (service mode):
• Auto adjustment (No. 402)
• Scaning lamp ON voltage adjustment during AE exposure (No. 304)
• Development DC bias adjustment for newspaper originals in AE mode (No. 303)
Item
Function
Description
402
AE scanning
intensity
automatic
adjustment
Remarks
Automatic adjustment
occurs so that the
original is copied at copy
density 5 when ‘402’ is
executed.
Lighter
Note:
Copy
density 5
Darker
Test Chart
304
AE scanning
intensity
adjustment
1
Original
density
2
q When the setting is
decreased in service
mode, the AE copies
will be darker.
Lighter 7.5
Copy
density 5
w If the setting is
increased in service
mode, the AE copies
will be lighter.
Darker
Test Chart
303
If AE adjustment
fails, the density
indicator LED on
the control panel
F5 and F9 flash.
If such occurs,
make the
adjustment once
again.
Original
density
AE slope
1
Lighter 7.5
2
q If the setting is
increased in service
mode, the newspaper
copies will be lighter.
w If the setting is
decreased in service
mode, the newspaper
copies will be darker.
Copy
density 5
Darker
Test Chart
4-18
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Newspaper Original
density
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
I. Cleaning the Transfer Charging Wire
1. Outline
The machine is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism for the transfer
charging wire which turns on under the following conditions:
q At power-on, if the fixing temperature is 100°C or less.
w Last rotation at each cumulative count of 500.
e When charging wire cleaning (U25) is executed in user mode.
2. Operation
The charging wire is cleaned by moving the wire cleaner back and forth by the
cleaner motor (M11).
When the wire cleaner mount turns on the wire cleaner rear position switch (MSW2)
located at the rear of the charging assembly, the cleaner motor starts to rotate in reverse
until it reaches the wire cleaner home position switch (MSW1) located at the front of the
charging assembly. (The wire cleaner makes a single round trip in about 30 sec.)
If the switches are not turned on within a specific period of time, the DC controller will
stop the cleaner motor and, at the same time, will indicate ‘E060’.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-19
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
Wire cleaner mount
Wire cleaner
Tranfer corona unit
Cleaner motor
(M11)
Wire cleaner
rear position
switch(MSW2)
Wi
re
cle
an
er
rea
rp
os
itio
ns
ign
al
Wire cleaner
Wi
home position switch(MSW1)
sig re cl
e
na
l (W aner
CH hom
P)
ep
os
itio
n
(W
CR
P)
J109
J951
-13
J953
CLB
-1
CLA
-2
CLCCW
J114
-2A
Motor driver 2
PCB
-14
CLCW
-1A
-8A
-10A
DC controller PCB
Figure 4-115
4-20
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
II. DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY/DRUM CLEANER
A. Outline
The copier is designed in such a way so that its developing assembly is manually
locked/released together with its rail when a locking lever is operated.
The developing cylinder, the toner stirring roller inside the developing assembly, and
the blade inside the drum cleaner are rotated by the drive of the main motor (M1).
The level of toner remaining inside the developing assembly is monitored by a toner
sensor (TS1).
The waste toner gathered by the cleaning blade is collected inside the drum cleaner
container.
The copier is equipped with a torque limiter in its photosensitive drum drive
assembly. When an excess load is imposed on the photosensitive drum while the
photosensitive drum is rotating (as when the case becomes full of waste toner), the drive
from the main motor will be cut off to stop the rotation of the photosensitive drum.
Reference:
The copier does not have a mechanism to detect the level of waste toner inside the
drum cleaner. As a guide, keep in mind that the waste toner case becomes full
when about 60,000 copies (same as drum life) have been made of 6% duty
originals.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-21
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
Hopper motor
Hopper assembly
M4
Screw
Cleaning
blade
TS
Blade
Toner sensor
Torque limiter
Main motor / main
motor driver PCB
M1
toner empty signal (TEP*)
Stirring rods
Release
Cam
hopper motor drive command (HMD*)
Drum cleaning
assembly
Developing
cylinder
Lock
Photosensitive
drum
DC controller PCB
Figure 4-201
4-22
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
B. Detecting the Level of Toner and Controlling the Supply
The level of toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the toner sensor
(TS1) of a piezoelectric oscillator type which generates the toner absent signal (TEP*=0)
when the level drops below a specific value.
The DC controller turns on the hopper motor (M4) to start toner supply when it has
detected TEP*=0 for 1 sec or more continuously.
The hopper motor drive signal (HMD*) is generated so that it is ‘1’ for 1 sec and ‘0’
for 4 sec; this cycle of 5 sec is repeated as necessary.
The hopper motor (M4) is stopped when the toner absent signal (TEP*) goes ‘1’.
If the toner absent signal (TEP*) does not go 25 sec after the start of toner supply,
the DC controller PCB assumes the absence of toner inside the hopper and lights the
“Add Toner indicator” after copying operation (max : 100 sheets of paper).
Reference:
The detecting unit of the toner sensor used inside the developing assembly is of a
piezoelectric oscillator type; it vibrates at several kHz in the absence of toner with
its output ‘1’, and stops vibrating because of the weight of toner in the presence of
toner with its output going ‘1’.
Oscillator
circuit
Amplifier (R)
circuit
Phase detection circuit
Digital
processor
circuit
Output
circuit
Sensor
TEP*
Figure 4-202
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-23
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
C. Stopping the Hopper Motor in Response to a Rotation Error
If an excess load is imposed on the hopper motor (M4) and, as a result, variation
occurs in its rotation, the level of current entering the comparator circuit lowers and the
comparator circuit generates a negative voltage, causing the transistors Tr1 and Tr2 to
turn off and stopping the hopper motor.
Since the developing assembly will not be supplied with toner while an error exists
in the motor, the “Add Toner indicator” will be indicated.
±24VB
J106
-5B
J202
HMD*
J206
-11
-8
M4
DC
controller
PCB
Tr2
Hopper motor
-7
±5V
Tr1
±5V
Comparator
Motor driver 1 PCB
Figure 4-203
4-24
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to
disassemble/assemble the copier.
Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the copier.
1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for two of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the copier while any of its parts is removed.
7. Be sure to turn off the front door switch or the power switch before sliding out the
fixing assembly.
A. Scanning Lamp Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Scanning Lamp
Disconnect the power plug.
Remove the copyboard glass.
Remove the screw q, and remove the reflecting plate w.
w
q
Figure 4-301
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-25
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
4) Turn the flat-blade screwdriver in the direction of arrow e to open the electrode plate
in the direction of arrow r, and remove the scanning lamp t.
r
e
t
Figure 4-302
Note:
1. If the scanning lamp is hot, wait until it has cooled.
2. Do not leave fingerprints on the scanning lamp.
3. If the surface of the scanning lamp is soiled, dry wipe it.
2. Orientation of the Scanning Lamp
Orient the scanning lamp q so that the protrusion in its middle points in the direction
of the arrow (direction in which the mirror mount moves in reverse); for lengthwise
orientation, keep the logo mark facing the front.
Mirror mount reverse direction
q
Figure 4-303
Note:
When installing the scanning lamp, avoid touching its surface.
4-26
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
3. Removing the Thermal Fuse
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Remove the screw q, and remove the attraction plate w.
q
w
Figure 4-304
3) By pushing the middle of the No. 1 mirror mount e, move the mirror mount until it is
as indicated.
e
Figure 4-305
Note:
Whenever you must move the No. 1 mirror mount by hand, be sure to hold its
middle. Further, do not touch the surface of the lamp and the reflecting cover.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-27
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
4) Remove the two screws r, and remove the thermal fuse t.
r
t
Figure 4-306
B. Blank Exposure Lamp Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Removing the Blank Exposure Lamp Assembly
Remove the inside left cover.
Remove the developing assembly and drum unit.
Disconnect the two connectors q.
Remove the three screws w, and remove the harness retainer e.
e
w
q
Figure 4-307
4-28
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
5) Remove the two screws r.
r
Figure 4-308
6) Pull out the blank exposure lamp assembly t slowly to the front.
t
Figure 4-309
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-29
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2. Removing the Blank Exposure Lamp
1) Remove the blank exposure lamp assembly.
2) Remove the two screws q, and the connector w; then, turn over the blank exposure
upper plate e.
q
e
q
w
Figure 4-310
3) Disconnect the two connectors r, and remove the blank exposure assembly upper
plate t.
r
r
t
Figure 4-311
4) Remove the three screws y, and remove the blank exposure lamp u.
u
y
y
y
Figure 4-312
4-30
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
3. Removing the Blank Shutter Solenoid
1) Remove the blank exposure lamp assembly.
2) Remove the blank exposure assembly upper plate. (See 2. “Removing the Blank
Exposure Lamp.”)
3) Remove the screw q and the spring w; then, detach the link arm e from the blank
shutter.
q
w
e
Figure 4-313
4) Remove the two screws r, and disconnect the connector t; then, remove the blank
shutter solenoid y by lifting it.
t
r
y
Figure 4-314
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-31
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
4. Adjusting the Position of the Blank Shutter Solenoid
Adjust the position of the solenoid so that section A in the figure is 7.7 ±0.5 mm on
both sides when its plunger is moved in the direction of activation. (When taking
measurements, take care not to force the shutter with slide calipers.)
After making adjustments, check to make sure that the plunger of the solenoid
moves smoothly.
A
Figure 4-315
Figure 4-316
4-32
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
5. Removing the Blank Shutter Motor
1) Remove the blank exposure lamp assembly.
2) Remove the blank exposure assembly upper plate. (See 2. “Removing the Blank
Exposure Lamp.”)
3) Remove the two screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove the blank
shutter motor e by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
q
w
e
q
Figure 4-317
6. Routing the Blank Shutter Cable
Slide shutter
Windtwice
Windtwice
Figure 4-318
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-33
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
C. Drum Unit
1. Removing the Drum Unit
1) Open the front door.
2) Remove the connector cover q.
q
Figure 4-319
3) Turn the developing assembly releasing lever w counterclockwise to unlock the
developing assembly.
w
Figure 4-320
4-34
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
4) Open the hopper, and release the feeding assembly.
5) Remove the mounting screw e, and slide out the drum unit r slowly to the front.
e
r
Figure 4-321
Note:
Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum.
Note:
The photosensitive drum is very susceptible to light, and exposure to even room
lighting can cause copies with white spots or black bands.
As a rule, do not turn on the power after removing the drum unit; otherwise, the
following may occur:
• The registration roller and the transfer guide may interfere with each other; the
rotation of the registration roller during WMUPR will damage the roller.
2. Cleaning
If the surface of the photosensitive drum has become soiled, wipe it with a flannel
cloth (not paper, lint-free or otherwise) coated with toner.
Note:
Do not dry wipe or clean with solvent.
Do not use drum cleaning powder.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-35
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
D. Charging Assembly
1. Removing the Primary Charging Assembly
1) Remove the drum unit.
Note:
Take care not to expose the drum unit to light after taking it out of the copier.
Exposure to light for some time will cause copies with white spots or black bands.
2) Disengage the hook q, and remove the primary charging assembly w by pulling it
to the front from the drum unit.
q
Figure 4-322
w
Figure 4-323
4-36
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2. Removing the Transfer Charging Assembly
1) Remove the screw q, and remove the transfer charging assembly cover w; then,
remove the transfer charging assembly e by pulling it to the front.
q
w
e
Figure 4-324
3.
a.
1)
2)
Stringing the Primary/Transfer Charging Wire
Primary Charging Assembly
Remove the primary charging assembly.
Remove the four tension springs q (2 at front, 2 at rear), and remove the grid plate
w.
3) Remove the lid e (both front and rear).
w
q
q
e
e
Figure 4-325
4) Go to step 5) under b. “Transfer Charging Assembly.”
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-37
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
b. Transfer Charging Assembly
1) Remove the transfer charging assembly.
2) Pull out the static eliminator q.
q
Figure 4-326
3) Disengage the three hooks w, and remove the guide wire retainer e from the
charging assembly.
w
Figure 4-327
e
Figure 4-328
4-38
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
4) Remove the lid r (both front and rear).
r
r
Figure 4-329
5) Free a length of about 40 mm of charging wire from the reel (0.06-mm dia.), and form
a loop with a diameter of about 2 mm at the end.
Reference:
To form a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once, and twist the hex
key four to five times; then, twist the charging wire.
6) Cut the twisted end of the charging wire (excess) to 1 mm or less with a nipper.
less than 1mm
corona wire
Figure 4-330
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-39
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
7) Install the charging wire as shown in the figure.
7mm
spring
ring
height adjusting block
Primary charging wire
Figure 4-331
2mm
spring
ring
height adjusting block
Transfer charging wire
Figure 4-332
Note:
Keep the following in mind:
• Make sure that the charging wire is free of bends or twists and its gold-plating has
not peeled.
• Make sure that the charging wire is free of slack.
• Make sure that the charging wire is in the V-groove of the height-adjusting roll.
4-40
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
4. Stringing the Guide Wire
The guide wire is 0.148 mm in diameter.
A
3
2
1
5
4
6
7
8
9
12
10
11
13
B
Figure 4-333
5. Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire
The height of the charging wire may be adjusted by turning the screw located behind
the charging assembly. A full single turn of the screw raises or lowers the charging wire
by about 0.7 mm.
Corona Unit
Primary
Transfer
Height of Standard Position
A
B
A=10.6 ±0.3 mm
B=9.5 ±0.2 mm
Figure 4-334
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-41
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
E. Developing system
1. Removing the Developing Assembly
1) Open the copier front cover.
2) Remove the connector cover q.
q
Figure 4-335
3) Remove the connector w.
4) Turn the developing assembly releasing lever e counterclockwise to unlock.
5) Pull out the developing assembly r slowly to the front.
r
e
w
Figure 4-336
4-42
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2. Removing the Blade
1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier.
2) Remove the two screws q, and remove the developing assembly cover w.
q
q
w
Figure 4-337
3) Place a newspaper on the floor or a desk, and pour out the toner from the developing
assembly.
4) Remove the two screws e, and remove the blade r together with the mount.
e
r
e
Figure 4-338
Note:
The blade must be mounted with high accuracy. Do not remove it on its own in the
field. Rather, remove it together with its mount.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-43
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
3. Removing the Magnetic Seal (developing cylinder)
1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier.
2) Remove the blade
Note:
The blade must be mounted with high accuracy. Do not remove it on its own in the
field. Rather, remove it together with its mount.
3) Remove the screw q, and remove the fromt cover w.
q
w
Figure 4-339
4) Remove the screw e, and remove the electrode positioning plate r.
e
r
Figure 4-340
4-44
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
5) Remove the C-ring and the two screws; then, remove the butting roll t and the roll
case y.
t
y
Figure 4-341
6) Remove the two screws u, and remove the gear mount i.
i
u
u
Figure 4-342
7) Remove the two E-rings, and remove the gear o and the gear !0.
Remove the two screws, and remove the butting roll !1 and the roll case !2.
!0
!2
!1
o
Figure 4-343
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-45
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
8) Remove the developing cylinder !3.
!3
Figure 4-344
9) Remove the magnetic seal !4 (both ends).
!4
Figure 4-345
!4
Figure 4-346
4-46
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
4. Installing the Magnetic Seal and the Blade
1) Clean the contact face on the magnetic seal with alcohol.
2) Attach the magnetic seal as shown. (Pay attention; the magnetic seal is different in
shape between front and rear.)
Check to make sure that the magnetic seal and the case are in contact.
w
q
q
(rear)
w
(front)
Magnetic seal
Opening (butting reference)
Figure 4-347
3) Install all parts except the blade and the developing assembly cover.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-47
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
4) While butting the blade mount against the developing assembly, fix it in place with
two screws.
When installing the blade, place paper q on the developing cylinder first to protect
the cylinder. (Tighten the screw while pushing on section A.)
A
A
q
Figure 4-348
Reference:
S-B is adjusted to 230 ±30 µm.
5. Installing the Electrode Positioning Plate
Install the electrode positioning plate while orienting it as shown in Figure 4-349.
Electrode positioning plate
Cylinder shaft
Figure 4-349
4-48
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5
PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
This chapter describes the outline of the purposes, roles and operations of this copier
from feeding and delivering copy papar, the relationship between electric system and
mechanical system and the operational timing of each component.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1
A. Outline ...........................................5-1
PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE .....5-3
A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-3
B. Movement of the Cassette Lifter ...5-6
C. Identifying the Size of
Copy Paper ...................................5-8
PICK-UP FROM THE
MULTIFEEDER...................................5-13
A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-13
CONTROLLING THE
REGISTRATION CLUTCH .................5-16
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
V.
TWO-SIDED COPYING .....................5-18
A. Making Two-Sided Copies.............5-18
B. Lower Feeding Assembly ..............5-20
C. Horizontal Registration ..................5-30
VI. DETECTING JAMS ............................5-34
A. Outline ...........................................5-34
VII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......5-45
A. Pick-Up Assembly .........................5-46
B. Multifeeder Assembly ....................5-56
C. Registration Roller Assembly ........5-60
D. Feeding Assembly .........................5-62
E. Lower Feeding Assembly ..............5-68
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
A. Outline
The copier uses center reference, in which copy paper is fed centered along the path
of the pick-up/feeding assembly, and its sources of copy paper include two cassettes
(top, bottom) and a multifeeder.
Copy paper from the cassette or the multifeeder is controlled so that its leading edge
matches with the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum by the
registration roller; the paper is then sent to the copy tray through the transfer, separation,
feeding, and fixing assemblies.
The copier is equipped with a duplexing copying function, in which copy paper
leaving the fixing roller is sent to the lower feeding assembly by a paper detecting plate
for copying on both sides.
As many as eight sensors (Table 5-101) are used to monitor the movement of copy
paper, checking for jams and other errors.
Registration roller
PS11
Delivery
roller 2
Feeding
assembly
Delivery
roller 1
Multifeeder pick-up roller
Photosensitive drum
Fixing assembly
PS10
PS9
Horizontal
registration
roller
PS13
PS14
Lower feeder
inlet roller
PS12
Set-back
roller 1
Set-back
roller 2
Lower feeder
outlet roller
Cassette 1
PS7
pick-up roller
Cassette 2
pick-up roller
Vertical path
roller 0
Vertical path
roller 1
Cassette 1
feeding roller
Cassette 1
separation roller
PS8
Vertical path
roller 2
Cassette 2
feeding roller
Cassette 2
separation roller
Figure 5-101
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-1
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
No.
Name
PS7
Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor
PS8
Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor
PS9
Pre-registration paper sensor
PS10
Separation sensor
PS11
Delivery sensor
PS12
Lower feeder inlet paper sensor
PS13
Lower feeder outlet paper sensor
PS14
Horizontal registration paper sensor
Table 5-101
5-2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
II. PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE
A. Pick-Up Operation
1. Outline
The copy paper inside the cassette is held up by a lifter so that it remains in contact
with the pick-up roller.
When the pick-up clutch (CL2 or CL3) turns on, the pick-up roller starts to rotate to
feed copy paper. Then, the pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL1 or SL2) turns on so that
the pick-up roller leaves the copy paper.
The feeding roller and the separation roller make sure that only one sheet of copy
paper is picked up and sent to the feeding assembly; thereafter, the vertical path roller
moves the copy paper as far as the registration roller.
The registration roller controls the copy paper so that its leading edge matches the
image on the photosensitive drum.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-3
5-4
Vertical path roller 2 clutch drive command (VR2CD*)
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch drive command (C2PUCD*)
Cassette 2 pick-up release solenoid drive command (C2RSD*)
Main
motor
M1
Registration clutch drive
command(RGCD*)
Vertical path roller 1 drive
command (VR1CD*)
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch
drive command (C1PUCD*)
Cassette 1 pick-up release
solenoid drive command
(C1RSD*)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
DC controller PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Photosensitive
drum
Registration roller
CL1
PS9
Vertical path
roller 0
CL5
CL2
SL1
CL6
CL3
PS7
Vertical path
roller 1
PS8
Vertical path
roller 2
SL2
Figure 5-201
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations
a. Cassette 1, A4, 2 Copies, Continuous
COPY START key
ON
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
Forward
Reverse
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M1)
Cassette 1 pick-up
clutch (CL2)
Cassette 1 pick-up
release solenoid (SL1)
Vertical path roller 1
paper sensor (PS7)
Vertical path roller 1
clutch (CL5)
Pre-registration paper
sensor (PS9)
Registration clutch
(CL1)
Scanning motor (M2)
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Figure 5-202
b. Cassette 2, A4, 2 Copies, Continuous
COPY START key
ON
STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
Main motor (M1)
Cassette 2 pick-up
clutch (CL3)
Cassette 2 pick-up
release solenoid (SL2)
Vertical path roller 2
paper sensor (PS8)
Vertical path roller 2
clutch (CL6)
Vertical path roller 1
paper sensor (PS7)
Vertical path roller 1
clutch (CL5)
Pre-registration paper
sensor (PS9)
Registration clutch
(CL1)
Scanning motor (M2)
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Forward
Reverse
Figure 5-203
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-5
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
B. Movement of the Cassette Lifter
When the cassette is pushed inside the copier, the pick-up roller moves down, and
the light-blocking plate leaves the lifter position sensor (PS3, PS5), thereby turning on
the lifter motor (M9, M10) to move up the lifter. The lifter motor stops where the lifter
position sensor (PS3, PS5) can detect the top surface of the stack of copy paper on the
lifter.
When the cassette runs out of copy paper and the paper detection roll mounted to
the pick-up roller shaft falls and, as a result, the paper detecting lever leaves the paper
sensor (PS2, PS4), the “Add Paper indicator” will be lighted on the control panel.
Paper detecting lever (light-blocking plate)
Paper detecting roll
Copy paper
Paper sensor
Lifter
Figure 5-204
Paper detecting lever (light-blocking plate)
Paper detecting roll
Paper sensor
Lifter
Figure 5-205
5-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Main motor
M1
Feeding rollers
Pick-up roller
Separation roller
Lifter detecting
lever (light-blocking
plate)
Paper sensor
(PS2,PS4)
Lifter sensor
(PS3, PS5)
Paper detecting roll
Pick-up roller arm
Paper detecting lever
Pick-up roller
Lifter
Copy paper
M
Lifter motor
(M9,M10)
Figure 5-206
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-7
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
C. Identifying the Size of Copy Paper
1. Outline
The size of copy paper inside the cassette is identified by the paper size sensors
mounted to the rear of the cassette holder.
When the cassette is slid inside the cassette holder, the paper size sensors are
activated by the bosses on the cassette, enabling detection of the width and the length
of copy paper.
The copier identifies the size of paper based on combinations of paper width and
length and, at the same time, determines the point of scanner reversal and the control
method for blank exposure.
The bosses used to push the paper size sensors operate in conjunction with the
guide plate inside the cassette, and the arrangement is determined by adjusting the
guide plate to the size of paper to be used.
Variable resistor output
2. Identifying the Size of Copy Paper
The copy paper length sensor uses two photointerrupters, and the length of copy
paper is identified based on combinations of the outputs from these two
photointerrupters.
On the other hand, the copy paper width sensor uses variable resistors, and the
paper width is identified in reference to the resistance generated by these resistors.
Figure 5-207 shows the relationship between paper width and outputs of the variable
resistors. You must enter the basic values whenever you have replaced the DC controller
PCB or any of the sensors to ensure that the relationship remains correct.
A4/A3
A4R
STMTR
STMTR
(139.7mm)
A4R
(210mm)
A4
(297mm)
Paper width
Figure 5-207
5-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Width guide (rear)
Paper width detecting VR
Paper length sensor unit
Width guide (front)
Cassette
Length guide
Figure 5-208
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-9
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3. Markings on the Width Guide Rail
The width guide rail inside the cassette has paper size holes, marked A through M
as shown in Table 5-201.
Use these holes if the user reports skew movement of copy paper to find out if the
copy size width is correctly set. (Note that this information is not disclosed to the user.)
Marking
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Name
STMT-R
A5-R
B5-R
KLGL-R
GLTR-R
G-LGL
A4-R
LGL/LTR-R
FLSC
B4/B5
G-LTR
279mm × 432mm
(11" × 17") /LTR
A3/A4
Remarks
G3
G2
G1
G4
(For G1 through G4, see Table 5-203)
Table 5-201
5-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4. Paper Size
The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines the size of copy paper as
in Table 5-202 based on the paper width and length inputs.
Paper length PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/
sensor
PS104 PS103 PS104 PS103 PS104 PS103 PS104 PS103
Paper Signal
SZ 2 SZ 1 SZ 2 SZ 1 SZ 2 SZ 1 SZ 2 SZ 1
width
sensor
(slide level) ON/
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
OFF 0
unit: mm
288.5
273.7
261.8
238.0
212.9
206.6
196.6
186.0
165.2
144.1
A4
—
A3
—
(G4)
—
279 × 432mm
(11" × 17")
—
(G1)
—
—
—
B5
—
B4
—
STMT
LTRR
LGL
(G2)
A5
A4R
—
G-LTRR
—
—
K-LGLR
—
—
—
B5R
—
—
—
A5R
—
—
—
STMTR
—
—
—
(G3)
Table 5-202
The paper sizes shown in Table 5-203 are selected in respect of the paper sizes
determined within each group in service mode.
The asterisk (*) indicates the factory default paper size.
Group
Size
G1
*
G-LTR
K-LGL
G2
*
FOOLSCAP
OFFICIO
E-OFFI
A-LGL
A-OFFI
G3
*
G-LGL
FOLIO
AUS-FLS
G4
*
LTR
A-LTR
Table 5-203
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-11
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
• Paper Types
Paper
Size (vertical × horizontal; mm)
Notation
A3
A3
(297±1)
× (420±1)
A4R
A4R
(210±1)
× (297±1)
A4
A4
(297±1)
× (210±1)
A5
A5
(210±1)
× (148.5±1)
A5R
A5R
(148.5±1) × (210±1)
B4
B4
(257±1)
× (364±1)
B5R
B5R
(182±1)
× (257±1)
B5
B5
(257±1)
× (182±1)
279mm × 432mm (11" × 17") 11 × 17
(279±1)
× (432±1)
LETTER-R
LTRR
(216±1)
× (297±1)
LETTER
LTR
(297±1)
× (216±1)
STATEMENT
STMT
(216±1)
× (139.5±1)
STATEMENT R
STMTR
(139.5±1) × (216±1)
LEGAL
LGL
(216±1)
× (356±1)
KOREAN LEGAL
K-LGL
(265±1)
× (190±1)
KOREAN LEGAL R
K-LGLR
(190±1)
× (265±1)
FOOLSCAP
FLSC
(216±1)
× (330±1)
AUSTRALIAN FOOLSCAP
A-FLS
(206±1)
× (337±1)
OFICIO
OFI
(216±1)
× (317±1)
EQUADORAN OFICIO
E-OFI
(220±1)
× (320±1)
BOLIVIA OFICIO
B-OFI
(216±1)
× (355±1)
ARGENTINE LETTER
A-LTR
(280±1)
× (220±1)
ARGENTINE LETTER-R
A-LTRR
(220±1)
× (280±1)
GOVERNMENT LETTER
G-LTR
(267±1)
× (203±1)
GOVERNMENT LETTER-R
G-LTRR
(203±1)
× (267±1)
ARGENTINE LEGAL
A-LGL
(220±1)
× (340±1)
GOVERNMENT LEGAL
G-LGL
(203±1)
× (330±1)
FOLIO
FOLI
(216±1)
× (317±1)
ARGENTINE OFFICIO
A-OFI
(220±1)
× (340±1)
Table 5-204
5. Registering Paper Width Basic Values
See the Chapter 11.
5-12
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
III. PICK-UP FROM THE MULTIFEEDER
A. Pick-Up Operation
1. Outline
The multifeeder is a mechanism which picks up copy paper from the stack placed on
it and which is capable of continuous pick-up.
The copy paper on the tray is monitored by the multifeeder paper sensor (PS6).
The copy paper on the tray is butted against the pick-up roller by the paper guide
plate. The drive of the main motor (M1) is transmitted to the pick-up roller through a
multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL4) to rotate the pick-up roller.
The pick-up roller and the separation pad serve to make sure that only one sheet of
copy paper is picked up and sent to the registration roller.
This series of operations is executed for each pick-up operation.
Main motor
M1
Multifeeder
pick-up clutch
CL4
Multifeeder paper sensor
Paper sensor lever
Paper guide plate
PS6
Multifeeder tray
Photosensitive
drum
Registration roller
Separation pad
Multifeeder
pick-up solenoid
Paper guide plate cam
SL3
Spring clutch
Figure 5-301
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-13
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2. Identifying the Size of Paper on the Multifeeder
The width of copy paper is identified using a variable resistor which operates in
conjunction with the mevement of the slide guide on the multifeeder adjusted by the user
to suit the copy paper used.
The width of copy paper detected in this way is used to control blank exposure;
further, the length of copy paper when the multifeeder is used is identified in reference
to the period during which the pre-registration paper sensor (PS9) remains on.
Multifeeder paper width
size signal (MFPW)
Slide guide (rear)
Variable resistor
Multifeeder tray
Slide guide (front)
DC controller PCB
Figure 5-302
5-14
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3. Sequence of Multifeeder Pick-Up Operation
COPY START key
ON
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
Forward
Reverse
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M1)
Multifeeder paper
sensor (PS6)
Multifeeder pick-up
solenoid (SL3)
Multifeeder pick-up
clutch (CL4)
Pre-registration
paper sensor (PS9)
Registration clutch (CL1)
Scanning motor (M2)
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Figure 5-303
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-15
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
IV. CONTROLLING THE REGISTRATION CLUTCH
The registration clutch (CL1) controls copy paper so that it matches the image on the
drum at a specific position.
Unless binding mode is used, the registration clutch (CL1) controls copy paper so
that its leading edge and the leading edge of the image on the drum match.
In binding mode, control will be as shown in Figure 5-401 to create a binding margin
on copies.
Selected mode
one-sided original
→
Copy paper
timing
Shift (mm)
B
Copy paper on copy tray
D
5
one-sided copy
one-sided
original
↓
two-sided copy
copying on 1st
side
A
copying on
2nd side
B
two-sided
original
↓
two-sided copy
copying on 1st
side
A
copying on
2nd side
B
copying on 1st
side
B
copying on
2nd side
B
copying on 1st
side(left)
B
D
5
copying on
2nd side(right)
B
D
5
copying on 1st
side(left)
A
D
5
copying on
2nd side(right)
B
two-sided original
↓
one-sided copy
page separation
↓
(one-sided copy)
page separation
↓
two-sided copy
Copy paper
5-16
Image area
during copying
on 1st side
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
May be
between 1
and 20 mm;
figures
assume a
shift of 5 mm.
Image area during
copying on 2nd side
D
5
5 or
0
D
5
5
D
D
5
5 or
0
5
D area: erased by blank exposure lamp.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Drum
Drum
Image on drum
Image on drum
Copy paper
Copy paper
A
B
Copy paper ahead
of image on drum
Copy paper behind
image on drum
Figure 5-401
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-17
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
V. TWO-SIDED COPYING
A. Making Two-Sided Copies
1. Outline
The delivery motor (M6) starts to move in reverse a specific period of time after copy
paper (from the fixing assembly) has moved past the delivery sensor (PS11), thereby
moving the copy paper to the lower feeding assembly.
Upon arrival inside the lower feeding assembly, sheets of copy paper are stacked in
a staggered pattern.
DC controller PCB
M1
M6
Delivery
motor
Delivery
roller 1
Delivery
roller 2
Main motor
M7
Lower feeder motor
Lower feeder inlet roller
Figure 5-501
5-18
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2. Operations
1) After having moved through the fixing assembly, part of the copy paper is moved out
of the delivery assembly by the work of the delivery rollers 1 and 2.
Copy paper
Delivery roller 1
Delivery roller 2
Figure 5-502
2) When the leading edge of the copy paper has moved past section A, the delivery
roller 2 starts to rotate in reverse to move part of it to the inside of the copier.
A
Figure 5-503
3) Once inside the machine, the copy paper is moved to the lower feeding assembly by
the work of the delivery roller 2 and the lower feeding inlet roller.
Lower feeder inlet roller
Figure 5-504
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-19
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
B. Lower Feeding Assembly
1. Outline
In two-sided copying mode, the copier performs continuous copying using its setback mechanism and the lower feeder flapper.
The set-back mechanism serves to stack sheets of copy paper in the lower feeding
assembly in a staggered pattern, thereby preventing double feeding within a limited
space.
The set-back mechanism is used for the following conditions:
(1) Copy Paper Size
A3 (11” x 17”) to B5 (STMT)
(2) Number of Sheets (stack)
20 sheets : A4, LTR, G-LTR, K-LGL, B5, A5, STMT
1 sheet : A3, 11” x 17”, B4, LGL, B-OFFI, A-OFFI, A-LGL, AUS-FLS, FOOLSCAP,
FOLIO, G-LGL, E-OFFI, OFFICIO, A4R, A-LTRR, LTRR, K-LGLR,
G-LTRR, B5R, A-LTR, A5R, STMTR
Solenoid link
Lower feeder flapper
solenoid (SL6)
Lower feeder flapper
Lower feeder outlet
paper sensor (PS13)
Set-back
roller 2
Set-back
roller 1
Light-blocking plate
Lower feeding assembly
lower plate
Copy paper
Figure 5-505
5-20
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Lower feeder
inlet roller
Set-back roller 1
Set-back
roller 2
Lower feeder
flapper
Horizontal
registration
roller
Lower feeder
outlet roller
PS13
PS14
PS12
CL8
CL7
SL6
M6
M7
M1
Horizontal registration
clutch drive command (HRCD )
*
*
Lower feeder outlet
clutch drive command (LFCD*)
Lower feeder
motor
Lower feeder flapper solenoid
drive command (LFSD )
Delivery
motor
DC controller PCB
Figure 5-506
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-21
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2. Set-Back Operation
1) After copying on the first side, the first copy paper is sent from the delivery assembly
to the lower feeding assembly. At that time, the leading edge of the copy paper is
made to arch by the set-back roller 1.
from Delivery assembly
1st Copy paper
Lower feeder assembly
PS12
Set-back roller 1
Figure 5-507
2) The lower feeder flapper lowers and, at the same time, the set-back rollers 1 and 2
rotate to move the copy paper forward so that the paper leaves the lower feeder inlet
paper sensor (PS12)
Lower feeder
flapper
PS12
Set-back roller 2
Set-back roller 1
Figure 5-508
Reference:
If a large number of copies are made, its leading edge would reach the lower
feeding assembly outlet roller assembly when its trailing edge is moved away from
PS12; this problem is solved by changing the path of the paper by lowering the
lower feeder flapper.
5-22
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3) The set-back rollers 1 and 2 are rotated in reverse. The copy paper is then stopped
when the distance between its leading edge and the set-back roller 1 is 8 mm.
8mm
PS12
Set-back roller 1
Figure 5-509
4) The second copy paper is moved to the lower feeding assembly.
2nd copy paper
PS12
Figure 5-510
5) The leading edge of the second copy paper is made to arch by the set-back roller 1.
PS12
Set-back roller 1
Figure 5-511
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-23
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
6) The set-back rollers 1 and 2 rotate to move the first and second copy papers forward.
The trailing edge of the second copy paper is then moved away from the lower
feeder inlet paper sensor (PS12).
PS12
Set-back roller 2
Set-back roller 1
Figure 5-512
7) The set-back rollers 1 and 2 rotate in reverse. The copy paper is then stopped when
the distance between its leading edge and the set-back roller 1 is 8 mm.
8mm
PS12
Set-back roller 1
Figure 5-513
5-24
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
8) Steps 1) through 7) are repeated up to the last copy, and the copies are stacked in
the lower feeding assembly in a staggered pattern.
When the last copy has been stacked, the set-back rollers 1 and 2 are rotated, and
the first copy is moved forward until it is detected by the lower feeder outlet paper
sensor (PS13).
PS13
Set-back roller 1
Set-back roller 2
Figure 5-514
9) The set-back rollers 1 and 2 are rotated in reverse (at half speed), and the first copy
paper is stopped when it has moved past the lower feeder outlet paper sensor
(PS13).
PS13
Figure 5-515
Reference:
If only one paper can be feeded on the lower feeding assmbly because of the copy
paper seze, the copy paper is feeded the position 5 mm before the lower feeder
outlet roller after feeded to the lower feeding assembly.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-25
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3. Sequence of Set-back Operation
• A4, 2 Copies, Continuous
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M1)
Delivery motor (M6)
Delivery sensor (PS11)
Lower feeder inlet
paper sensor (PS12)
Half speed
Lower feeder motor (M7)
Lower feeder outlet
paper sensor (PS13)
Lower feeder flapper
solenoid (SL6)
: CW rotation
: CCW rotation
Figure 5-516
5-26
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4. Re-Pick Up
1) When the Copy Start key is pressed, the set-back rollers 1 and 2 start to rotate,
moving all copy papers inside the lower feeding assembly forward.
PS13
Set-back roller 2
Set-back roller 1
Figure 5-517
2) A specific period after the lower feeder outlet paper sensor (PS13) has detected the
first copy paper, the lower feeder flapper is lowered and, at the same time, the lower
feeder outlet roller start to rotate.
PS13 Lower feeder
flapper
Lower feeder outlet roller
Figure 5-518
3) The set-back rollers 1 and 2 and the lower feeding assembly outlet roller rotate to
separate the first copy paper from the subsequent copy papers.
PS13
Lower feeder outlet roller
Figure 5-519
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-27
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4) When the first copy paper has moved past the set-back roller 2, the set-back rollers
1 and 2 are rotated in reverse until the second copy paper moves past the lower
feeder outlet paper sensor (PS13); at the same time, the lower feeder flapper is
raised.
Lower feeder outlet
paper sensor (PS13)
Lower feeder
flapper
Set-back roller 2
Lower feeder outlet roller
Set-back roller 1
Figure 5-520
5) The re-pick up operation for the second copy paper is started as soon as the first
copy paper turns on the pre-registration paper sensor (PS9).
Photosensitive drum
Pre-registration paper sensor (PS9)
Horizontal
registration
roller
Horizontal registration
paper sensor (PS14)
Figure 5-521
5-28
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5. Sequence of Re-pick-up Operation
• A4, 2 Copies, Continuous
COPY START key
ON (2nd)
INTR
Scanner motor (M2)
Lower feeder motor (M7)
Lower feeder outlet
paper sensor (PS13)
Lower feeder flapper
solenoid (SL6)
Lower feeder outlet
clutch (CL7)
Horizontal registration
paper sensor (PS14)
Horizontal registration
clutch (CL8)
Pre-registration paper
sensor (PS9)
SCFW
SCRV
Forward
Reverse
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Forward Reverse
Registration clutch (CL1)
Figure 5-522
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-29
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
C. Horizontal Registration
1. Outline
The horizontal registration roller moves copy paper which has been re-picked up
from the lower feeding assembly to the front/rear while keeping it centered along its
feeding path.
Horizontal
registration
clutch
M1
Horizontal
registration roller
CL8
Main
motor
Horizontal
registration
roller home
position sensor
(PS15)
Horizontal
registration
solenoid (SL7)
Horizontal
registration
paper edge sensor (PS16)
Horizontal
registration
motor (M5)
Figure 5-523
5-30
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2. Operation
1) When the Copy Start key is pressed for the first side of a two-sided copy (auto mode)
the horizontal registration solenoid (SL7) turns on, and the horizontal registration
motor (M5) rotates to move the horizontal registration paper edge sensor (PS16) to
suit the size of the copy paper used.
Reference:
The horizontal registration paper edge sensor (PS16) moves to the center of the
feeding path (i. e. the position that PS16 has detected the light-blocking plate.)
when the power switch is turned, and moves to suit the width of paper when twosided copying starts. It moves from its previous position if a different size paper is
used.
Light-Blocking Plate (The plate's edge of re-pick feeding path)
Horizontal
registration
paper edge sensor (PS16)
Horizontal
registration
motor (M5)
Figure 5-524
2) When the Copy Start key is pressed for the second side copy, the horizontal
registration motor (M5) starts to rotate to move the horizontal registration roller to
home position. (The home position of the horizontal registration roller is where the
actuator has moved past the horizontal registration roller home position sensor
PS15.)
Horizontal registration roller
Horizontal registration roller
home position sensor (PS15)
PS15
PS15
Home position
Figure 5-525
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-31
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3) A specific period of time after the horizontal registration paper sensor (PS14) has
detected copy paper, the horizontal registration clutch (CL8) turns on to rotate the
horizontal registration roller.
4) If the horizontal registration paper edge sensor (PS16) is not detecting copy paper,
the horizontal registration motor (M5) is rotated to move the roller until PS16 detects
paper. (The horizontal registration roller moves to a point where paper has moved
PS16.)
Copy paper
Horizontal registration roller
Horizontal registration
paper edge sensor (PS16)
PS16
PS16
Figure 5-526
5) Steps 1) through 4) are repeated up to the last copy.
5-32
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3. Sequence of Operation
COPY START key
ON (2nd)
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M1)
Horizontal registration
clutch (CL8)
Horizontal registration
motor (M5)
Horizontal registration roller
home position sensor (PS15)
Horizontal registration
paper edge sensor (PS16)
Horizontal registration
paper sensor (PS14)
Pre-registration paper
sensor (PS9)
Registration clutch (CL1)
: roller moves in the rear direction
: roller moves in the front direction
Figure 5-527
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-33
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
VI. DETECTING JAMS
A. Outline
The following eight sensors are used to check the movement of copy paper:
Pre-registration paper sensor (PS9)
Separation sensor (PS10)
Delivery sensor (PS11)
Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS7)
Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor (PS8)
Lower feeder inlet paper sensor (PS12)
Lower feeder outlet paper sensor (PS13)
Horizontal registration sensor (PS14)
The copier detects a jam in reference to the presence/absence of paper at a specific
sensor at such times as programmed in the microprocessor in advance.
The copier is equipped with a mechanism to remember the remaining number of
copies to make at time of a jam and the effective copying mode even after the power is
turned OFF for jam removal.
The microprocessor possesses the following sequences of jam detection; it assumes
the presence of a jam also when any of the sensors detests copy paper at power-on.
When a jam is detected, power to the fixing heater (H1,H2) will be cut off and the
copier operation will be stopped immediately; at the same time, the Jam indicator will be
flashed on the control panel and the jam location indicator will also be flashed.
When the jam detection mechanism turns ON, the jam in question will not be counted
as a copy made.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-34
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
PS11
PS10
PS9
PS13
PS12
PS14
PS7
PS8
Figure 5-601
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-35
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
q Pick-Up Delay Jam (Cassette 1)
Copy Start key
ON
Jam indicator
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
Cassette 1 pick-up
clutch (CL2)
0.648sec
Jam check
Vertical path roller 1
paper sensor (PS7)
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-602
w Pick-Up Delay Jam (Cassette 2)
Copy Start key
ON
Jam indicator
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
Cassette 2 pick-up
clutch (CL3)
Jam check
0.648sec
Vertical path roller 2
paper sensor (PS8)
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-603
5-36
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
e Pick-Up Delay Jam (Multifeeder)
Copy Start key
ON
Jam indicator
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
Multifeeder pick-up
clutch (CL4)
0.945sec
Jam check
Pre-registration
paper sensor (PS9)
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-604
r Pick-Up Stationary Jam
Copy Start key
ON
Jam indicator
INTR
SCFW
SCRV SCFW
Vertical path roller
paper sensor*1
Ι
Jam check
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
*1:
Ι:
Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS7)
Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor (PS8)
Varies according to paper length (EX. A4:1.387sec)
Figure 5-605
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-37
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
t Registration Sensor Delay Jam (except for multifeeder pick-up)
Copy Start key
ON
Jam indicator
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
Vertical path roller 1
clutch (CL5)
Jam check
0.919sec
Pre-registration
paper sensor (PS9)
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-606
y Registration Sensor Stationary Jam
Copy Start key
ON
INTR
Jam indicator
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW SCRV
Pre-registration
paper sensor (PS9)
Ι
Jam check
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Ι: Varies according to paper length (EX. A4:1.343sec)
Figure 5-607
5-38
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
u Separation Sensor Delay Jam
Jam indicator
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
Registration clutch (CL1)
0.628sec
Jam check
Normal
Separation sensor (PS10)
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-608
i Separation Sensor Stationary Jam
Jam indicator
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
Separation sensor (PS10)
Ι
Jam check
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Ι:
Varies according to paper length (EX. A4: 1.593sec)
Figure 5-609
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-39
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
o Delivery Sensor Delay Jam
Jam indicator
SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV
LSTR
Separation sensor (PS10)
1.967sec
Jam check
Normal
Delivery sensor (PS11)
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-610
!0 Delivery Sensor Stationary Jam
Jam indicator
SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV
SCFW
Delivery sensor (PS11)
Ι
Jam check
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Ι:
Varies according to paper length (EX. A4:1.421sec)
Figure 5-611
5-40
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
!1 Lower Feeder Inlet Paper Sensor Delay Jam
Jam indicator
SCRV
Delivery motor (M6)
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
Reverse Forward
Ι
Jam check
Lower feeder inlet
paper sensor(PS12)
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
· The copy paper size is set so that the 20 sheets can be feeded
on the lower feeding assembly.
Ι : 0.473sec
· The copy paper size is set so that only one sheet can be feeded
on the lower feeding assembly.
Ι : 0.946sec
Figure 5-612
!2 Lower Feeder Inlet Paper Sensor Stationary Jam
Jam indicator
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
Lower feeder inlet
paper sensor(PS12)
Jam check
Ι
Normal
Error
Main motor
· The copy paper size is set so that the 20 sheets can be feeded
on the lower feeding assembly.
Ι : 1.143sec
· The copy paper size is set so that only one sheet can be feeded
on the lower feeding assembly.
Ι : 2.593sec
Figure 5-613
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-41
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
!3 Lower Feeder Outlet Paper Sensor Delay Jam (1 Sheet)
Jam indicator
LSTR
Lower feeder motor (M7)
Forward Reverse
1.24sec
Jam check
Lower feeder outlet
paper sensor(PS13)
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-614
!4 Lower Feeder Outlet Paper Sensor Stationary Jam (20 Sheets)
Jam indicator
SCFW
Lower feeder motor (M7)
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
Forward Reverse
Ι
Jam check
Lower feeder outlet
paper sensor(PS13)
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Ι:
Varies according to number of stack sheet
· 1 sheet of copy paper: 1.218sec
· 5 sheets of copy paper: 1.040sec
: but not detect a jam when copying more than 5 sheets of copy paper
Figure 5-615
5-42
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
!5 Lower Feeder Outlet Paper Sensor Delay Jam (20 Sheets)
Jam indicator
SCFW
Lower feeder motor (M7)
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
Forward Reverse
Ι
Jam check
Lower feeder outlet
paper sensor (PS13)
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Ι:
Varies according to number of stack sheet
· 5 sheets of copy paper: 0.444sec
· 10 sheets of copy paper: 0.814sec
· 20 sheets of copy paper: 1.702sec
Figure 5-616
!6 Lower Feeder Outlet Paper Sensor Stationary Jam(Re-pick-up)
Copy Start key
ON (2nd)
Jam indicator
INTR
Lower feeder motor (M7)
SCFW
SCRV
Forward Reverse
0.334sec
Jam check
Lower feeder outlet
paper sensor (PS13)
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-617
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-43
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
!7 Horizontal Registration Paper Sensor Delay Jam
Jam indicator
SCFW SCRV
SCFW SCRV SCFW
Lower feeder flapper
solenoid (SL6)
Jam check
0.984sec
Horizontal registration
paper sensor (PS14)
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-618
!8 Horizontal Registration Paper Sensor Stationary Jam
Jam indicator
SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV
SCFW
Horizontal registration
paper sensor (PS14)
Ι
Jam check
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Ι:
Varies according to paper length (EX. A4: 1.33sec)
Figure 5-619
5-44
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
VII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to
disassemble/assemble the copier.
Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the copier:
1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for two of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the copier while any of its parts is removed.
7. Be sure to turn off the front door switch or the power switch before sliding out the
fixing assembly.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-45
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
A. Pick-Up Assembly
1. Construction
q
w
e
q
w
e
q Vertical path roller clutch
w Pick-up clutch
e Pick-up release solenoid
Figure 5-701
r
e
q
w
q
1
r4
e
3
2
w
q
w
e
r
Pick-up roller
Separation roller
Feeding roller
Vertical path roller
Figure 5-702
5-46
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Removing the Pick-Up Assembly
Remove the cassette from the copier.
Remove the multifeeder inside cover and the right cover.
Remove the front right cover.
Disconnect the two connectors q of the lifter motor.
Remove the four screws w, and remove the cassette lifter motor assembly e.
w
e
q
w
e
q
Figure 5-703
6) If a pedestal is used, open the pedestal right door, remove the screw r and the leaf
spring t, and shift the registration guide y to the outside.
t
r
y
Figure 5-704
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-47
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
7) Disconnect the three connectors u of the pick-up assembly.
8) Remove the seven screws i, and remove the pick-up assembly o.
o
i
i
i
i
u
Figure 5-705
Note:
Be sure to hold the pick-up assembly side plates whenever you are installing or
removing the pick-up assembly.
3. Removing the Pick-Up Roller
1) Remove the pick-up assembly.
2) Remove the stop ring (plastic) q, and pull out the pick-up roller w together with its
collar.
w
q
Figure 5-706
5-48
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4. Points to Note When Installing the Pick-Up Roller
When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure that the round
marking w on the rubber portion is toward the front of the copier.
The pick-up rollers are identified by color as follows:
If brass, use it for the front.
If silver, use it for the rear.
w
q
(front of copier)
Collar
Figure 5-707
Note:
Do not separate the rubber portion of the pick-up roller from the collar.
5.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Feeding Roller
Remove the pick-up roller.
Remove the pick-up roller from the front and the rear.
Remove the screw q, and remove the pick-up roller arm bushing w and the pick-up
roller arm e.
e
w
q
Figure 5-708
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-49
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4) Disconnect the connector r and the stop ring t of the feeding roller; then, pull out
the pick-up roller unit y and the feeding roller u at the same time.
y
u
r
t
Figure 5-709
Reference:
Whenever installing the feeding roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure so that
the gear w attached to the feeding roller is toward the rear of the copier.
w
(front of copier)
q
Figure 5-710
5-50
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
6.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Separation Roller
Remove the pick-up assembly.
Remove the right door.
Remove the screw q, and remove the pick-up inlet guide w.
w
q
Figure 5-711
4) Free the spring e from the hook (one side).
5) Remove the two stop rings r (both right and left).
r
e
r
Figure 5-712
6) Remove the two screws t and the vertical path guide y; then, disconnect the
connector u.
t
y
u
t
Figure 5-713
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-51
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
7) Remove the stop ring i and the support shaft o.
8) Remove the separation roller unit !0.
!0
o
i
Figure 5-714
9) Pull out the separation roller shaft, and remove the separation roller.
Reference:
Whenever installing the separation roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure so that
the D-cut will be toward the front of the copier.
(rear)
q
(front of copier)
Figure 5-715
5-52
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
7. Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller
If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, change the position of the
pressure spring of the separation roller.
q If double feeding occurs, hook the spring on the side of A.
w If pick-up failure occurs, hook the spring on the side of B.
q
w
e
B
A
r
q Feeding roller
w Separation roller
e Locking lever
r Pressure spring
Figure 5-716
8. Positioning the Pick-Up Assembly Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL1,
SL2)
Install the solenoid so that the pick-up roller arm q shown in Figure 5-717 butts
against the upper stay w when the plunger of the solenoid is pushed in.
Butted
w
q
Figure 5-717
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-53
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
9. Releasing the Lifter
If the lifter is up, push the lifter releasing arm q to lower it.
q
Figure 5-718
5-54
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
10. Adjusting the Registration (left/right)
1) Loosen the screw q, and adjust the position of the cassette hook plate w so that the
reading is 0 ±1.5mm.
w
q
Figure 5-719
(–)
(+)
0 ± 1.5mm
0
2
4
6
8
10
Figure 5-720
2) After adjustment, register the paper width basic value for the cassette you have
adjusted. (See Chapter 11)
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-55
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
B. Multifeeder Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Multifeeder Assembly
Remove the multifeeder inside cover and the right cover.
Disconnect the connector q.
Remove the four screws w, and remove the multifeeder assembly e.
q
w
w
e
Figure 5-721
2.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller/Separation Pad
Remove the multifeeder assembly.
Remove the stop ring q.
While pushing down the separation pad w, remove the pick-up roller e.
e
q
w
Figure 5-722
5-56
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4) Raise the multifeeder tray.
5) Remove the screw r, and remove the separation pad assembly t.
t
r
Figure 5-723
Reference:
When installing the multifeeder pick-up roller q, be sure that the cross on the collar
w is toward the rear.
w
q
(front of copier)
Figure 5-724
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-57
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3. Adjusting the Pressure on the Separation Pad
If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, change the position of the
separation pad:
q If double feeding occurs, move the position of the spring holder q toward B.
w If pick-up failure occurs, move the position of the spring holder q toward A.
A
B
q
Figure 5-725
4. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration
If the left-right registration is wrong when pick-up occurs in the multifeeder, loosen
the screws q, and adjust the position of the tray.
q
Figure 5-726
5-58
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5. Adjusting the Paper Guide Plate Cam (multifeeder assembly)
Adjust the engagement of the 26T gear 1 and the 26T gear 2 so that, when the
solenoid plate is in contact with the claw of the control ring, the paper guide plate and
the paper guide plate cam are as shown in Figure 5-727.
26T gear 1
Control ring
,
Paper guide plate
Claw
Paper guide plate cam
Solenoid plate
26T gear 2
Figure 5-727
6. Routing the Timing Belt (multifeeder assembly)
Butt the rack plate of the multifeeder against section A (open condition).
Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt on the pulley.
Timing belt
Pulley
Section A
Rack plate
Pulley
B
Slide volume
Figure 5-728
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-59
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
C. Registration Roller Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Removing the Registration Roller
Remove the developing assembly and the drum unit.
Remove the inside left cover and the inside right cover.
Release the feeding assembly.
Remove the transfer charging assembly.
Remove the main drive assembly. (See p.7-19.)
Remove the screw q, and disconnect the connector w.
q
w
Figure 5-729
7) Remove the screw e and the bushing r; then, remove the transfer guide t.
t
r
e
Figure 5-730
5-60
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
8) Remove the shaft retaining spring y, two E-rings u, and two bushings i (both front
and rear).
i
u
y
(front)
Figure 5-731
i
u
(rear)
y
Figure 5-732
9) Remove the registration roller o.
o
Figure 5-733
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-61
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
D. Feeding Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Feeding Assembly
Remove the drum unit and the developing assembly.
Remove the fixing assembly.
Pull out the pin q, and remove the lower feeding assembly lever w.
w
q
Figure 5-734
4) Remove the screw e, and disconnect the connector r.
r
e
Figure 5-735
5-62
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5) While paying attention to the spring at the rear of the feeding assembly, slide out the
feeding assembly t to the front.
t
Figure 5-736
2.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Feeding Belt
Remove the feeding assembly.
Remove the transfer charging assembly.
Remove the two screws q, and remove the support w, bushing e, gear r, and four
fastons t.
t
q
q
w
e
Figure 5-737
r
t
Figure 5-738
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-63
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3) Disconnect the connector y, and disengage the hook u; then, remove the cleaning
motor assembly i.
u
y
i
Figure 5-739
4) Remove the three screws o, and remove the electrode mount !0.
o
!0
Figure 5-740
5-64
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5) Remove the screw !1, and remove the corona unit rail !2.
!2
!1
Figure 5-741
6) Disengage the hook !3, and remove the air duct !4.
7) Remove the E-ring !5, and remove the gear !6.
!6
!4
!3
!5
Figure 5-742
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-65
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
8) Remove the four rolls !7.
!7
!7
Figure 5-743
9) Remove the feeding belt !8.
!8
Figure 5-744
5-66
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3. Removing the Feeding Fan
1) Remove the feeding belt.
2) Disconnect the connector q, and disengage the hook w; then, remove the feeding
fan e.
q
w
e
Figure 5-745
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-67
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
E. Lower Feeding Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Lower Feeding Assembly
Slide out the cassette 1.
Remove the inside left cover and the inside right cover.
Remove the four connectors q and remove the four screws w ; then, remove the
horizontal registration motor assembly e.
q
w
w
e
q
q
w
Figure 5-746
4) Disconnect the connector r
r
Figure 5-747
5-68
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5) Remove the two screws t.
t
Figure 5-748
6) Remove the lower feeding assembly y.
y
Figure 5-749
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-69
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2. Attaching the Lower Feeding Assembly
When the lower feeding assembly is attached, follow the instructions below.
1) Make sure that a sheet is on the lower plate of the lower feeding assembly. If there
is no sheet on it, fix the sheet on the plate using a screwdriver.
Sheet
Screwdriver
Figure 5-750
2) Make sure that part of the plate of the lower feeding inlet assembly is on the upper
plate of the lower feeding assembly.
plate of the lower feeding
inlet assembly
Figure 5-751
5-70
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3. Removing the Set-Back Roller
1) Remove the lower feeding assembly.
2) Remove the E-ring q and the bushing w.
q
w
Figure 5-752
3) Remove the gear e, parallel pin r, and bushing t; then, remove the set-back roller
y.
y
t
r
e
Figure 5-753
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-71
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4. Removing the Lower Feeder Outlet Roller
1) Remove the lower feeding assembly.
2) Remove the gear q, parallel pin w, and bushing e.
e
w
q
Figure 5-754
3) Remove the bushing r, and remove the lower feeder outlet roller t.
t
r
Figure 5-755
5-72
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5. Removing the Lower Feeder Inlet Roller
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
2) Remove the E-ring q and the bushing w and the spring e.
q
w
Figure 5-756
e
Figure 5-757
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-73
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3) Disconnect the connector e, remove the E-ring r, spacer t, two gears y, and
bushing u; then, remove the lower feeder inlet assembly i.
t
r
u
i
y
e
Figure 5-758
4) Remove the bushing o; then, remove the lower feeder inlet roller !0.
!0
o
Figure 5-759
5-74
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6
FIXING SYSTEM
This chapter describes the outline of the purposes, roles and operations of fixing toner
on a paper, the relationship between electric system and mechanical system and the
operational timing of each component.
I.
II.
OPERATION.......................................6-1
A. Outline ...........................................6-1
CONTROLLING THE FIXING
TEMPERATURE.................................6-2
A. Controlling the Area of Heating
(fixing roller)...................................6-2
B. Controlling the Activation and the
Temperature of the Fixing Roller
(continuous copying) .....................6-3
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
III.
IV.
C. Protection Mechanism ...................6-5
D. Driving the Cleaning Belt...............6-7
DELIVERY ASSEMBLY......................6-8
A. Outline ...........................................6-8
B. Controlling the Delivery Motor .......6-9
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......6-11
A. Fixing Assembly ............................6-11
B. Delivery Assembly .........................6-30
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
I. OPERATION
A. Outline
The upper roller, lower roller, and delivery roller 1 are driven by the main motor (M1),
and the delivery roller 2 is driven by the delivery motor (M6).
The copier’s upper roller is heated by two fixing heaters (H1 : 750 W (220 / 240 V) /
700 W (120 V) ; H2 : 640 W (220 / 240 V) / 600 W (120 V)), and its surface temperature
is monitored by a thermistor (TH1).
The DC controller turns on and off the fixing heater drive command (MHRD, SHRD)
based on the fixing temperature signal (TH1, analog) from the thermistor.
The control temperature and the area of heating during copying are varied according
to the following:
• Copy paper size (width)
• Number of copies (continuous copying)
cleaning belt solenoid drive command (CBSD )
*
SL4
Cleaning belt solenoid
One-way
clutch
fixing thermistor signal (TH1)
Cleaning belt
Cleaning belt
guide plate
+24VB
Delivery
roller 2
Delivery
roller 1
Thermoswitch
(TSW)
H2
H1
power switch off command (PWOFF*)
AC power
DC
controller
PCB
main heater drive
command (MHRD)
sub heater drive
command (SHRD)
Thermistor (TH1)
main SSR drive
signal (MSSRD)
sub SSR drive
signal (SSSRD)
Fixing
roller
SSR
Figure 6-101
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-1
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
II. CONTROLLING THE FIXING TEMPERATURE
A. Controlling the Area of Heating (fixing roller)
The upper fixing roller is heated by two heaters: main heater (H1) and sub heater
(H2).
The copier’s main and sub heaters are halogen lamps with different thermal
distribution characteristics. (Figure 6-201)
The surface temperature of the fixing roller is maintained even by varying the period
in which these two heaters are turned ON while at the same time preventing overheating
of the ends.
Intensity
q
Intensity
w
e
q Main heater (H1) thermal distribution
w Sub heater (H2) thermal distribution
e Upper fixing roller external view
Figure 6-201
6-2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
B. Controlling the Activation and the Temperature of the Fixing
Roller (continuous copying)
1. Outline
The copier’s upper fixing roller is a special thin-coating roller, and its surface
temperature would tend to increase above the target temperature without control; to
ensure that it remains at the target temperature, its period of activation and control
temperature are controlled.
2. Controlling Period of Activation
The periods of activation for the main heater (H1) and the sub heater (H2) is
controlled according to the width of copy paper and the number of copies to be made.
As shown in Table 6-201, the period of activation of the sub heater is increased to
heat the area of contact (with copy paper; edge heating) for wide copy paper moving
through the fixing assembly.
The period of activation of the sub heater is decreased for narrow copy paper,
thereby preventing increase in temperature in areas not coming into contact with paper.
When the multi feeder is used, on the other hand, such control in relation to paper
width is only in response to an input of copy size; in the absence of an input, control is
based on A3 size (11” x 17”).
Period of activation
Paper width
Main heater (H1)
Sub heater (H2)
ON for 0.3 sec
ON for 0.2 sec
ON for 0.4 sec
ON for 0.1 sec
Up to
16th copy
ON for 0.4 sec
ON for 0.1 sec
17th copy
and later
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
A3, A4,
11” x 17”,
LTR
B4
A4R,
LGL,
LTRR
B5R/STMT
Table 6-201
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-3
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
3. Controlling the Control Temperature
The control temperature for the fixing roller in continuous copying is lowered in steps
according to copy size and the number of copies to make.
The count of copies used for temperature control is increased by 1 for each passage
of copy paper over the delivery sensor (PS11), and the control temperature is switched
when the count reaches a specific number.
The count is retained for 1 min after the end of copying operation (end of LSTR); if
copying operation is resumed during the period, the count is continued and appropriate
control is performed. (The count will be cleared, however, if a change is made to the copy
paper size or the power is turned off.)
Power switch COPY START key
ON
ON
WMUP WMUPR STBY SCFW SCRV
40th
copy
90th
copy
150th
copy
SCFW
SCFW
SCFW
200th
copy
SCFW SCRV LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M1)
5 sec.
Fixing main
heater (H1)
target temparature
*1
*1
*1
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
*1
190
185
180
175
170
: A3,A4,11"~17"
(c)
: A4R,LGL,LTRR
: B4,B5,LTR
: B5R or less
*1: Turns on the main heater for 0.1 sec and the sub heater for 1 sec alternately.
Figure 6-202
4. Controlling the temperature during Pre-heat mode
This copier alters the control temperature for the fixing assembly in the Pre-heat
mode according to the setting in the user mode. The following is the control temperature
for the fixing assembly for each setting in the user mode.
Saving rate
-10%
-25%
-50%
None
Control
185 °C/365F
170 °C/338F
125 °C/257F
190 °C/374F
Recovery (approx.)
5 sec
10 sec
20 sec
0
Reference:
In the Auto energy saver mode, the control temperature for the fixing assembly is
145 °C/293F.
6-4
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
C. Protection Mechanism
The copier uses the following three to prevent malfunction of its fixing heater:
• Signal from the thermistor
• Signal from the SSR
• Thermal switch
a. Protection with Signal from the Thermistor
The DC controller PCB monitors the voltage of the thermistor (TH1) and indicates a
self diagnosis code in response to overheating.
If the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 220°C (detected by the thermistor TH1),
‘E001’ will be indicated on the control panel and the copying operation will be stopped.
If the temperature of the fixing roller as detected by the thermistor (TH1) exceeds
220°C for some reason, the error auto power-off signal (PWOFF*) is generated to turn
off the power switch.
Table 6-202 shows the relation between the surface temperature of fixing roller and
the voltage of thermistor. (The voltage is theory value.)
Temperature of the
fixing roller (°C)
Voltage of the
thermister
Temperature of the
fixing roller (°C)
Voltage of the
thermister
0
4.98
120
3.23
10
4.97
130
2.87
20
4.95
140
2.51
30
4.92
150
2.16
40
4.87
160
1.84
50
4.80
170
1.56
60
4.70
180
1.30
70
4.56
190
1.09
80
4.39
200
0.91
90
4.16
210
0.75
100
3.89
220
0.63
110
3.58
Table 6-202
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-5
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
b. Protection with the Signals from the SSR
If the fixing heater continues to remain on because of a short circuit in the SSR, the
DC controller PCB generates the error auto power-off signal (PWOFF*) to turn off the
power switch.
The copier’s fixing heater drive SSR sends the SSR drive signal (MSSRD, SSSRD)
to the DC controller PCB when the SSR is ON; the DC controller PCB also monitors the
heater drive command (MHRD, SHRD) and the SSR drive signal (MSSRD, SSSRD) at
the same time.
If the main SSR drive signal (MSSRD) is ‘1’ when the main heater drive command
(MHRD) is ‘0’, the DC controller PCB will assume the condition as an error in the SSR
and will indicate ‘E004’ on the control panel. In about 2 sec thereafter, it generates the
error auto power-off signal (PWOFF*) to turn off the power switch.
c. Protection with a Thermistor
If the internal temperature of the thermal switch (TSW1) exceeds about 208°C, the
thermal switch turns OFF to cut off the power to the fixing heater.
If the thermal switch turns OFF, the error auto power-off signal (PWOFF*) will be
generated in about 1.5 sec to turn off the power switch.
Reference:
Once its contact opens, the thermal switch (TSW1) will not return to normal even at
ambient temperature. It may be used once again by cooling it to 0°C or less.
d. Recovery after Activation of the Protection Mechanism
If the error auto power-off signal (PWOFF*) has been generated, remove the cause,
and turn on the power switch to recover.
If ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, ‘E003’, or’E800’ has been indicated, remove the cause, and
execute ‘401’ in service mode [4] to recover.
Reference:
When selected in user mode, “auto power-off” will also turn off the power switch
when activated. To distinguish from such “auto power-off,” this manual refers to the
foregoing auto power-off as “error auto power-off.”
6-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
D. Driving the Cleaning Belt
The cleaning belt used to clean the upper fixing roller is driven by turning on and off
the cleaning belt solenoid (SL4) by causing the cleaning belt solenoid drive command
(CBSD*) generated by the DC controller circuit to go ‘1’ and ‘0’. The cleaning belt is
taken up about 0.04mm each time the cleaning belt solenoid is turned ON.
The area of contact between the cleaning belt and the upper fixing roller is increased
to improve clearing efficiency by means of a cleaning belt guide plate.
The cleaning belt solenoid (SL4) is turned on as soon as copy paper reaches the
separation sensor (PS10); the number of times the solenoid is turned ON, further, varies
according to the length of copy paper.
Activation (ON/OFF)
Length of copy paper
Less than 216mm
Once
216mm or more
Twice
Power switch
ON
COPY START key
ON
WMUP WMUPR STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Fixing main heater (H1)
Fixing sub heater (H2)
Main motor (M1)
Wait indicator
green
red
Delivery sensor (PS11)
Cleaning belt solenoid
(SL4)
Figure 6-203
The DC controller keeps count of the activation of the cleaning belt solenoid, and
issues ‘E005’ when the count reaches 250,000.
The count can be cleared by resetting the cleaning belt counter (‘619’ in service
mode; for details, see Chapter 11 “Service Mode.”)
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-7
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
III. DELIVERY ASSEMBLY
A. Outline
The copier performs delivery reversal for automatic duplexing copying.
The delivery roller 2 is driven by the delivery motor (M6). A transparent sheet is
attached to the feeding path between the delivery rollers 1 and 2; when the delivery roller
2 rotates in reverse and the paper reverses, its leading edge butts against the sheet,
causing the paper to move toward the lower feeding assembly inlet.
Copy paper
M1
Main motor
Reverse
Delivery
Delivery roller 1
Sheet
M6
Copy paper
Delivery motor
Delivery roller 2
Figure 6-301
6-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
B. Controlling the Delivery Motor
1. Outline
The delivery motor (M6) is a 2-phase stepping motor.
The five types of signals generated by the DC controller are converted into drive
pulse commands (DMA, DMA*, DMB, DMB*) by the motor drive circuit and the delivery
motor drive circuit on the motor driver 2 PCB, and are used to control the direction and
the speed of rotation of the delivery motor.
Figure 6-302 is a block diagram showing the circuit used to control the delivery
motor.
±24VB
J114
J951
-7A
DMCLK
-8
-6A
DMRON
-9
-5A
DMD
DMA
Drive circuit
DMA
-10
DC
controller
PCB
Delivery motor
drive circuit
±5V
-14A
DMI1
DMB
DMB
-1
M6
Delivery
motor
±5V
-13A
DMI2
-2
Motor driver 2 PCB
Figure 6-302
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-9
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
2. Operation
a. Turning On and Off the Motor
The delivery motor drive command (DMD) serves to turn on and off the motor.
When the DMD command goes ‘0’, pulse signals (A, A*, B, B*) are sent by the motor
drive circuit to the delivery motor drive circuit. In response, the motor drive circuit
generates drive pulse commands (DMA, DMA*, DMB, DMB*) to rotate the delivery
motor.
b. Controlling the Direction of Rotation of the Motor
The delivery motor rotation command (DMRON) is used to change the order in which
drive pulse signals are generated, thereby controlling the direction of rotation.
When the DMRON command is ‘1’, the motor rotates in the direction used to reverse
copy paper.
c. Controlling the Speed of Direction of the Motor
The delivery motor clock command (DMCLK) is used to control the speed of rotation
of the motor.
The copier controls the rotation of the motor as follows so that the speed of the
delivery motor is as follows according to mode of delivery/reversal and the length of copy
paper.
For delivery: 180 mm/sec
For reversal: 360 mm/sec (for copy paper 216 mm or less in feeding direction)
180 mm/sec (fro copy paper in excess of 216 mm in feeding direction)
d. Controlling the Drive Torque of the Motor
The drive torque of the motor varies according to the level of the drive current, and
the level of the drive current is switched by the delivery motor current control command
(DMI1, DMI2).
During delivery, the DC controller sends DMI1 command to the delivery motor drive
circuit on the motor controller PCB; during reversal, it sends DMI2 command. The
delivery motor drive circuit increases the drive current it generates in response to DMI2
command.
During reversal, the copy paper delivered by the delivery assembly is pulled into the
machine and, therefore, a lager load than during delivery is imposed on the delivery
motor; for this reason, the drive current is increased to raise the drive torque of the motor.
6-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to
disassemble/assemble the copier.
Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the copier:
1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for two of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the copier while any of its parts is removed.
7. Be sure to turn off the front door switch or the power switch before sliding out the
fixing assembly.
A. Fixing Assembly
1. Construction
q
r
t
w
y
e
q cleaning belt
w Sub heater
e Pressure adjusting screw
r Upper fixing roller
t Main heater
y Lower fixing roller
Figure 6-401
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-11
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
2. Removing the Fixing Assembly
1) Open the front door, and delivery cover.
2) Remove the screw q, and remove the fixing assembly knob w.
q
w
Figure 6-402
3) Open the delivery assembly.
4) Remove the screw e, and remove the connector cover r.
e
r
Figure 6-403
6-12
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
5) Disconnect the three connectors t.
6) Remove the two screws y, and remove the gear unit u.
y
u
y
t
Figure 6-404
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-13
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
8) Remove the two screws i, and remove the fixing assembly o in the direction of
delivery.
o
i
i
Figure 6-406
Note:
When removing the fixing assembly, take care not to damage the lower feeder inlet
roller.
6-14
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
3. Removing the Fixing Cleaning Belt
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the copier.
2) Remove the two screws q, and remove the fixing cleaner assembly w.
w
q
Figure 6-407
3) Insert a flat-blade screwdriver e into the stop plate r; then, release the pressure on
the fixing cleaning belt.
e
r
Figure 6-408
4) Turn the cleaning belt setting shaft t of the fixing cleaner assembly clockwise, and
remove the fixing cleaning belt y.
y
t
Figure 6-409
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-15
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
4. Installing the Fixing Cleaning Belt
The fixing cleaning belt consists of a feeding shaft, take-up shaft, and cleaning belt
constructed as a single entity (service part). Install the fixing cleaning belt by reversing
the steps used to remove it with the following in mind:
• Wind the cleaning belt two to three times around the cleaning belt take-up shaft.
At this time, check to make sure that the area that will come into contact with the
roller is impregnated with oil.
Note:
Check to make sure that the fixing cleaning belt is not wound askew or is free from
slack and wrinkling.
• After installing the fixing cleaning belt, insert a flatblade screwdriver in the fixing
cleaning belt drive shaft, and turn it counterclockwise until the cleaning belt is free
of slack.
Figure 6-410
Reference:
The fixing cleaner assembly is located above the fixing assembly and is used to
clean the surface of the upper roller by keeping the cleaning belt impregnated with
silicone oil against the roller. The cleaning belt is 15m long, and is given a marking
at a point 2.5m from its end.
Note:
If you have replaced the fixing cleaning belt, be sure to reset the reading of ‘619’ in
counter mode (service mode) to ‘0’.
6-16
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
5. Replacing the oil sheet
When the cleaning belt is repleced, the oil sheet has to be replaced at the same time.
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
2) Replace the oil sheet. (front and rear).
Oil sheet
Figure 6-411
Oil sheet
Figure 6-412
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-17
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
6. Removing the Fixing Heater
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the copier.
2) Remove the two screws q, and remove the fixing cleaner assembly w.
w
q
Figure 6-413
3) Remove the cord cover e from the thermal switch assembly.
e
Figure 6-414
4) Pull out the two fastons r of the heater (left when viewing the thermal switch).
r
Figure 6-415
6-18
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
5) Turn over the fixing assembly, and remove the cord cover t from the base of the
fixing assembly.
t
Figure 6-416
6) Pull out the faston y from the bottom of the fixing assembly.
7) Remove the screw u, and remove the round terminal i.
y
i
u
Figure 6-417
8) Remove the screw o, and remove the two cord covers !0.
!0
!0
o
Figure 6-418
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-19
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
9) Remove the screw !1, and remove the cord cover !2 from the front.
!1
!2
Figure 6-419
10) Remove the screw !3, and remove the heater mount (front) !4.
!3
!4
Figure 6-420
11) Remove the two screws !5, and remove the plate !6 and the heater mount (rear)
!7.
!7
!5
!6
!5
Figure 6-421
6-20
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
12) Pull out the two fixing heaters !8 slowly to the front.
!8
Figure 6-422
7.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Removing the Fixing Roller
Remove the fixing assembly from the copier.
Remove the fixing cleaner assembly.
Remove the fixing heater.
Remove the screw q, and remove the thermistor mount w.
Remove the two screws e, and remove the thermal switch mount r.
Remove the paper guide t from the fixing assembly.
e
r
e
w
q
t
Figure 6-423
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-21
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
7) Remove the C-ring y and the gear u at the front.
u
y
Figure 6-424
8) Remove the C-ring i, varistor ring o, and gear !0 at the rear.
!0
i
o
Figure 6-425
6-22
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
9) Remove the two screws !2 from the lower stay !1; then, fit them in the screw hole !3
(both sides), and release the lower roller.
!3
!1
!2
Figure 6-426
10) Remove the screw !4.
11) Remove the bearing !5 and the insulating bush !6.
!4
!5
!6
Figure 6-427
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-23
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
12) Pull out the upper fixing roller !7 to the front.
!7
Figure 6-428
13) Lift the lower fixing roller !8 together with the bearing.
!8
Figure 6-429
6-24
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
8. Installing the Upper Fixing Roller and the Heater
a. Points to Note When Installing the Upper Fixing Roller.
q If possible, wrap the roller in copy paper to protect its surface against dirt and
scratches.
w Orient the insulting bush as shown.
Insulating bushes
Rear plate
Front plate
Figure 6-430
e Orient the upper fixing roller so that its side with the longer bushing A is toward the
rear.
A
(rear)
(front)
Figure 6-431
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-25
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
b. Points to Note When Installing the Heater
q Do not touch the surface of the heater.
w For the sub heater, one of the terminals of the lead wires q is a round terminal w.
For the main heater, both sides are fastons.
<Main Heater>
q
Figure 6-432
The side with the longer lead wire q is toward the front of the copier.
<Sub Heater>
w
q
Figure 6-433
The round terminal is toward the rear. The faston is toward the front.
e Insert the main heater on the right side (pick-up side) and the sub heater on the left
side (delivery side) while viewing the fixing assembly from the front of the fixing
assembly.
Main heater
Sub heater
(delivery side)
(pick-up side)
Upper fixing roller
Figure 6-434
6-26
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
9. Adjusting the Nip (tightening the pressure adjusting nut)
The nip is correct if it is as indicated in Table 6-401; otherwise, adjust it by turning
the bolt.
,,,
c
A3
Feeding
direction
b
Center of
copy paper
a
Figure 6-435
Note:
a and c are points 10mm from both edges of copy paper.
Dimension
b
|a-c|
Measurement
Tracing paper
(SM-1); 64/80g
paper
5.5 ±0.5mm
0.5mm or less
Table 6-401
a. Measuring the Nip
Wait for 15 min after the copier ends warmup; then, make 20 copies before taking
measurements.
1) Place A3 paper on the multifeeder.
2) Open the copyboard cover.
3) Select ‘403’ in nip measurement mode of service mode [4].
4) Press the OK key.
The multifeeder picks up the paper, allowing you to take measurements as shown in
Figure 6-435. (The paper will then be discharged.)
Reference:
The paper will be stopped between the fixing rollers and then discharged about 10
sec later.
5) Measure the nip.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-27
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
10. Installing the Thermistor
Check to make sure that the detecting face of the thermistor is in even contact with
the upper fixing roller.
In addition, make sure that the lead wire from the thermistor is not forced taut.
Reference:
You need not adjust the position of the thermistor. If the contact is not even, suspect
deformation of the thermistor spring.
q
w
e
q Thermistor spring
w Upper fixing roller
e Thermistor
Figure 6-436
11. Installing the Thermal Switch
Check to make sure that the detecting face of the thermal switch is in even contact
with the upper fixing roller.
Reference:
You need not adjust the position of the thermal switch. If the contact is not even,
suspect deformation of the thermal switch spring.
q
w
e
q Thermal switch spring
w Upper fixing roller
e Thermal switch
Figure 6-437
6-28
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
12. Position of the Paper Guide
The paper guide is positioned by the paper guide mount.
Therefore, you need not adjust its position when installing the paper guide.
Note:
Do not loosen the screw on the paper guide; you will have to adjust the position of
the paper guide if you removed the paper guide. If you loosened the screw for some
reason, be sure to adjust the position with reference to the notch on the fixing
assembly mount.
13. Positioning the Cleaning Belt Solenoid
Install the solenoid so that the solenoid arm w butts against a when the plunger q
of the cleaning belt solenoid is pushed by a finger.
w
q
a
Figure 6-438
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-29
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
B. Delivery Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Delivery Assembly
Open the front door.
Open the delivery assembly.
Remove the screw q, and remove the connector cover w.
q
w
Figure 6-439
6-30
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
4) Disconnect the two connectors e, and remove the grounding wire fixing screw r.
5) Remove the wire t. (front ; hook, rear ; screw)
6) Remove the screw y, and remove the support plate u; then, remove the delivery
assembly i.
t
r
e
Figure 6-440
t
u
y
i
Figure 6-441
Note:
When removing the wire fixing screw (front), be sure to support the delivery
assembly.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-31
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
2. Removing the Upper Separation Claws
1) Open the delivery assembly.
2) Remove the screw q, and remove the insulating cover w.
w
q
Figure 6-442
3) Remove the two screws e, and remove the upper separation claw unit r.
e
r
Figure 6-443
4) Remove the spring t, and remove the upper separation claws y.
y
t
Figure 6-444
Note:
When installing the upper separation claw unit, be sure to do so while forcing it
toward the front.
6-32
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
3.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Lower Separation Claws
Open the delivery assembly.
Remove the four springs q of the lower separation claws.
Remove the two screws w, and remove the lower separation claw support plate e.
e
w
e
q
Figure 6-445
4) Remove the four lower separation claws r.
r
Figure 6-446
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-33
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
4. Removing the Delivery Motor
1) Open the delivery assembly.
2) Remove the screw q , and remove the connector cover w.
q
w
Figure 6-447
3) Disconnect the connector e.
e
Figure 6-448
6-34
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
4) Remove the two screws r, and remove the motor cover t.
5) Remove the two screws y, and remove the harness cover u.
r
u
y
t
Figure 6-449
6) Remove the two screws i, and remove the delivery motor o.
i
o
Figure 6-450
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-35
CHAPTER 7
CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
This chapter describes the outline of the purposes, roles and operations of the
mechanisms for auxiliary control of this copier, the relationship between the electric
system and mechanical system, and the operational timing of each component.
I.
II.
III.
FANS ..................................................7-1
POWER SUPPLY ...............................7-3
A. Outline of Power Supply................7-3
B. Protection Mechanisms of the
Power Supply Circuit .....................7-5
ERROR DETECTION CIRCUIT .........7-6
A. Outline ...........................................7-6
B. Scanning Lamp Error Activation
Detection Circuit ............................7-7
C. Fixing Heater Error Activation
Detection Circuit ............................7-7
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
IV.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......7-8
A. Externals........................................7-9
B. Control Panel.................................7-14
C. Copyboard Cover ..........................7-15
D. Fans...............................................7-15
E. Main Motor Assembly....................7-17
F. Mirror Guide Assembly..................7-18
G. Main Drive Assembly.....................7-19
H. Cleaning Belt Drive Assembly .......7-23
I. DC Controller PCB ........................7-24
J DC Power Supply PCB .................7-25
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
I. FANS
As many as five fans are used in the copier. See Table 7-101 for the orientation and
the function of each fan and the filters used, and see Figure 7-101 for when each of the
fans turn on.
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
Figure 7-101
No.
Name
FM1
Scanner cooling fan
FM2/
FM3
Exhaust fan 1/
Exhaust fan 2
Orientation
Blowing
Blowing
Filter
Air
Ozone
Function
• Cools the scanner.
• Exhausts ozone generated
by charging assemblies
through a filter.
• Exhausts air drawn by the
feeding fan.
• Keeps copy paper against
the feeding belt.
FM4
Feeding fan
Drawing
FM5
Power supply PCB
cooling fan
Blowing
• Exhausts ozone generated
by charging assemblies to
the outside of the copier.
• Cools the DC power supply
PCB
Table 7-101
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-1
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
Power switch
ON
WMUP WMUPR
COPY START key
ON
STBY
Power switch
OFF
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Scanner cooling fan
(FM1)
Exhaust fan 1 (FM2)
Exhaust fan 2 (FM3)
*1
*1
*1
*1
5min
Feeding fan (FM4)
Power supply PCB
cooling fan (FM5)
*1: Exhaust fan is rotated at a half speed during stand-by state.
Figure 7-102
7-2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
II. POWER SUPPLY
A. Outline of Power Supply
Drum heater
CB1
NF1
DSW1
SW1
Fixing main heater
Fixing sub heater
24VB
Lamp regulator
Scanning lamp
24VA
Photointerrupter /
Variable resistor / Micro switch
24VB(/12V)
5V
24VA
DC power
supply
PCB
24VB
24VB
DC controller
PCB
15V
24VB
5V
5V
Sorter
DF
24VB/5V
24VA
5V
Power supply
PCB cooling 24VB
fan
24VB
Clutch / Solenoid / Fan
Toner sensor
Counter
Lifter motor
Control panel
HVT
Main motor
dviver PCB
Main
motor
5V
24VB
24VA
5V
24VB
5V
24VA
Motor
driver 1 PCB
24VB
24VB/5V
24VB 12V
Pedestal
Photointerrupter
AE sensor
Scanning motor
Hopper motor
Horizontal registration motor
Lens motor
5V
5V
Motor
driver 2
PCB
24VB
Photointerrupter
Delivery motor
Lower feeder motor
24VB/5V Blank shutter motor
12V
Cleaner motor
Figure 7-201
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-3
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
AC power is supplied to the DC power supply PCB and other loads when the door
switch (DSW1) and the power switch (SW1) are turned on.
The DC power supply PCB generates +24 VA, +24 VB, +12 V, and +5 V.
The drum heater is supplied with power when the power switch is turned off.
The DC power supplied to the DC controller is cut off when the copier’s power switch
is turned off; to back up any data, the RAM on the DC controller PCB is equipped with a
lithium battery (BAT101).
Reference:
The tolerances of the DC voltage generated by the DC power supply PCB are as
follows:
• +24 VA ±3%
• +24 VB ±10%
• +12 V ±10%
• +5 V ±3%
Caution:
Replace the lithium battery only with the one listed in the Parts Catalog. Use of
another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a
fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose
of it in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard any used battery
promptly.
7-4
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
B. Protection Mechanisms of the Power Supply Circuit
The DC power supply PCB is equipped with an overcurrent protection circuit and an
over voltage protection circuit.
If an error, and as a result a short circuit, occurs in any of the loads, the protection
circuits will turn on to cut off the output of power.
The protection circuits can be reset by depriving the DC power supply PCB of AC
power for 1 min or more (by disconnecting the power plug). Be sure to remove the cause
of activation before turning on the power switch once again.
Note:
Repeated short circuiting and recovering of a load can cause the built-in fuse to
melt.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-5
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
III. ERROR DETECTION CIRCUIT
A. Outline
The copier’s power switch (SW1) is equipped with a relay which turns on in response
to the following to cut off the AC power to the DC power supply PCB:
q Error in the scanning lamp
w Error in the fixing heater
Reference:
The relay will also turn on to turn off the power switch when the copier is not
operated for a specific period of time set in user mode.
FU1
Lamp ON (LMPON)
Lamp
regulator
LA1
Lamp ON detection (LDT)
+24VB
Power switch OFF (PWOFF*)
Gate
array
(IC115)
I/O
port
(IC109)
SW1
TSW1
Fixing main heater ON detection (MSSRD)
Fixing sub heater ON detection (SSSRD)
SSR
TH1
Fixing main heater ON (MHRD)
H1
H2
Fixing sub heater ON (SHRD)
+5V
Comparator
circuit
Fixing heater
Master
temperature
CPU
error
(IC116)
DC controller PCB
Figure 7-301
7-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
B. Scanning Lamp Error Activation Detection Circuit
The state (activation) of the scanning lamp (LA1) is monitored by the gate array
(IC115) on the DC controller PCB.
The lamp regulator sends the lamp ON detection signal (LDT) to the DC controller
while the scanning lamp remains on. If the gate array detects the LDT signal for 22 sec
continuously, it will identify the condition as an error in the lamp and, as a result, will
cause the error auto power-off signal (PWOFF*) to go ‘0’. In response, the relay inside
the power switch (SW1) turns on to turn off the power switch, thereby cutting off the AC
power to the DC power supply PCB.
C. Fixing Heater Error Activation Detection Circuit
1. Detection by an SSR
The SSR sends the SSR drive signal (MSSRD, SSSRD) to the DC controller while
the fixing heater (H1, H2) remains on.
If the gate array (IC115) on the DC controller PCB detects the MSSRD signal or the
SSSRD signal in the absence of the heater drive command (MHRD, SHRD), it will
identify the condition as an error in the heater and, as a result, will indicate ‘E004’ and
at the same time will cause the error auto power-off signal (PWOFF*) to go ‘0’. In
response, the relay inside the power switch (SW1) will turn on to turn off the power
switch, thereby cutting the AC power to the DC power supply PCB.
2. Detection by a Thermistor
The upper fixing roller is equipped with a thermistor (TH1) used to detect fixing
temperature.
If the temperature of the upper fixing roller fails to reach a specific level within a
specific period of time or it exceeds 220°C, an error code will be indicated; at the same
time, the gate array on the DC controller PCB will turn off the power switch to cut off the
AC power to the DC power supply PCB. (See Chapter 11.)
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-7
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains machanical characteristics and describes how to disassemble
/assemble the copier.
Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the copier:
1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for two of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the copier while any of its parts is removed.
7. Be sure to turn off the front door switch or the power switch before sliding out the
fixing assembly.
7-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
A. Externals
q
w
u
e
y
t
r
i
!1
o
!0
Figure 7-401
q
w
e
r
t
y
Copyboard cover
Left cover (3)
Front door (1 + pin x 2)
Front left cover (2)
Cassette
Front right cover (2)
u
i
o
!0
!1
Control panel
Multifeeder inside cover (2)
Right cover (5)
Rear cover (4)
Right door (2)
Note:
The number in parentheses indicates the number of mounting screws used.
Remove the covers as necessary to clean, inspect, or repair the inside of the copier.
Those cover that may be detached by mere removal of the mounting screws used
on their own are left out of the discussions.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-9
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
q
w
q Left inside cover (4)
w Right inside cover (2)
Figure 7-402
Remove the covers as necessary to clean, inspect, or repair the inside of the copier.
Those covers that may be removed through mere removal of mounting screws on
their own are omitted from the discussions.
7-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
1.
1)
2)
3)
Remove the left inside cover
Open the front door and delivery cover.
Remove the screw q and two pins w ; then, remove the front door e.
Open the hopper r.
r
q
e
w
Figure 7-403
4) Remove the screw t, and remove the fixing assembly knob y.
5) Remove the four screws u, and remove the left inside cover i.
u
u
i
y t
u
Figure 7-404
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-11
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
2. Remove the right inside cover
1) Remove the left inside cover.
2) Remove the connector cover q.
q
Figure 7-405
3) Turn the feeding assembly releasing lever w counterclockwise to release the feeding
assembly.
4) Disconnect the connector e.
e
w
Figure 7-406
7-12
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
5) Remove the grip ring r, and remove the feeding assembly releasing lever t.
6) Remove the two knob y.
7) Remove the two screws u, and remove the right inside cover i.
y
u
i
t
r
y
u
Figure 7-407
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-13
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
B. Control Panel
1. Removing the Control Panel
1) Remove the left inside cover and right inside cover.
2) Disconnect the four connectors q.
q
q
Figure 7-408
3) Remove the four screws w.
w
w
w
Figure 7-409
4) Remove the magnet plate retaining screw e, and remove the control panel r.
e
r
Figure 7-410
7-14
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
C. Copyboard Cover
1. Replacing the Copyboard Cover Sheet
The copyboard cover sheet is attached to the copyboard cover by means of doublesided tape, allowing you to remove it by simply pulling on its corners.
Be sure to press the entire surface of the sheet after attachment.
D. Fans
1.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Removing the Scanner Cooling Fan
Remove the rear cover.
Disconnect the connector q.
Free the harness w from the harness retainer.
Remove the four screws e, and remove the scanner cooling fan r.
q
e
e
r
w
e
e
Figure 7-411
2.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Exhaust Fan
Remove the drum unit.
Remove the left cover and the inside left cover.
Remove the screw q, and disconnect the connector w; then, put the connector
inside the copier.
q
w
Figure 7-412
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-15
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
4) Remove the ozone filter e.
e
Figure 7-413
5) Remove the fixing assembly.
6) Remove the two screws r, and remove the fan t in the direction of delivery
together with the duct.
r
r
t
Figure 7-414
7-16
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
7) Remove the two screws y, and disconnect the connector u; then, remove the
exhaust fan i.
u
i
y
Figure 7-415
3. Removing the Feeding Fan (See p. 5-67)
E. Main Motor Assembly
1. Removing the Main Motor Assembly
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the four screws q, and disconnect the two connectors w; then, remove the
main motor assembly e.
q
q
e
w
Figure 7-416
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-17
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
F. Mirror Guide Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Mirror Guide Plate
Remove the copyboard glass.
Remove the lens hood.
Remove the screw q, and remove the mirror guide plate w.
w
q
Figure 7-417
7-18
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
G. Main Drive Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Main Drive Assembly
Remove the developing assembly and the drum unit.
Remove the rear cover.
Remove the screw q, and disconnect the three connectors w; then, remove the
lamp regulator PCB e.
w
e
w
q
Figure 7-418
4) Remove the faston r.
r
Figure 7-419
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-19
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
5) Remove the two screws t, and slide the high-voltage terminal y upward. (Be sure
to release the feeding assembly in advance.)
y
t
t
Figure 7-420
6) Remove the two grip rings u, and disconnect the two connectors i; then, remove
the registration roller clutch o and the horizontal registration roller clutch !0.
u
o
!0
i
Figure 7-421
7-20
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
7) Remove the connector !1.
!1
Figure 7-422
8) Remove the six screws !2, and detach the timing belt from pulleys A and B (Figure
7-424); then, remove the main drive assembly !3.
!2
!3
!2
!2
!2
!2
!2
Figure 7-423
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-21
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
2. Attaching the Drive Belt
Attach the drive belt on the gears and rollers as shown in the figure.
Main motor
Pulley A
Pulley B
Drum drive belt
Drive belt
Figure 7-424
7-22
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
H. Cleaning Belt Drive Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Cleaning Belt Drive Assembly
Remove the rear cover.
Disconnect the connector q.
Remove the screw w, and remove the cleaning belt drive assembly e.
e
q
w
Figure 7-425
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-23
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
I. DC Controller PCB
1. Removing the DC Controller PCB
1) Disconnect all connectors from the DC controller PCB.
2) Remove the two screws q, and remove the DC controller PCB w together with its
mount.
q
q
w
Figure 7-426
Note:
The DC controller PCB is equipped with a battery (BAT101). Keep the following in
mind when handling the battery, as shorting its both terminals can lead to
overheating.
2. Points to Note When Handling the DC Controller PCB
• When sending the DC controller PCB to the workshop or factory, be sure to put it in
a conducting bag without separating it from its mount.
Use a conducting bag whose one side is transparent, and put the PCB so that its
face shows through the transparent side.
• After replacement, be sure to make adjustments and settings in service mode and
user mode.
• Enter the settings recorded on the service label attached to the front door.
7-24
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 CONTROLS AND EXTERNALS
J. DC Power Supply PCB
1. Removing the DC Power Supply PCB
1) Remove the three screws q, and disconnect the six connectors w; then, remove the
motor driver 1 PCB e together with its mount.
w
e
q
w
q
w
Figure 7-427
2) Disconnect all connectors from the DC power supply PCB.
3) Remove the four screws r, and remove the DC power supply PCB t.
t
r
r
Figure 7-428
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-25
CHAPTER 8
PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
This chapter describes the outline of the purposes, roles and operations of each
mechanism for the paper deck pedestal, the relationship between the electric system
and mechanical system, and the operational timing of each component.
I.
II.
III.
BASIC OPERATION...........................8-1
A. Outline of Electrical Circuit ............8-1
INPUTS TO AND OUTPUTS FROM
PEDESTAL CONTROLLER ...............8-2
A. Outline ...........................................8-2
B. Inputs to and Outputs from
Pedestal Controller ........................8-3
PEDESTAL MOTOR CONTROL
CIRCUIT .............................................8-5
A. Outline ...........................................8-5
B. Mechanism ....................................8-5
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
IV.
V.
VI.
PAPER DECK UNIT ...........................8-6
A. Basic Construction ........................8-6
B. Pick-Up/Feeding Operation ...........8-7
C. Lifter Operation..............................8-9
D. Detecting Paper in the Deck .........8-11
DETECTING JAMS ............................8-13
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......8-15
A. Externals........................................8-16
B. Pedestal Motor Drive Assembly ....8-19
C. Paper Deck....................................8-20
D. Pick-Up System .............................8-28
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
I. BASIC OPERATION
A. Outline of Electrical Circuit
The operation of the pedestal is controlled by the pedestal controller PCB, which
functions according to the communication control signal from the copier.
The communication between the machine and the copier is in the form of IPC
communication, and is handled by the communication IC on the copier’s DC controller
PCB and the pedestal controller PCB of the machine.
DC controller PCB
J112
IPC
J101
J102
IPC
1.5K
Deck
Pedestal
Controller PCB
Figure 8-101
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-1
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
II. INPUTS TO AND OUTPUTS FROM PEDESTAL
CONTROLLER
A. Outline
<Output>
<Input>
Sensor
Pedestal controller PCB
Motor
IC103
(CPU)
Deck size
Switch PCB
Solenoid
IC101
(ROM)
Clutch
IC109
(IPC)
Copier
(DC controller PCB)
Figure 8-201
8-2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
B. Inputs to and Outputs from Pedestal Controller
1. Inputs and outputs (1/2)
Pedestal controller PCB
Right door open
sensor
Vertical path
roller 3
paper sensor
Deck vertical
path roller
paper sensor
Deck paper
sensor
Deck lifter
position sensor
Deck lifter upper
limit sensor
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
J36
-1
J32
-4
-7
J107
-7
-2
-6
-5
-6
-3
-5
-6
-5
J37
-1
J33
-3
-1
-10
-1
-10
-2
-2
-2
-9
-2
-9
-3
-1
-3
-8
-3
-8
J91
-1
J80
-3
-1
J169
J110
-A3
-3
-10
-2
-2
-2
-2
-11
-A2
-3
-1
-3
-1
-12
-A1
J92
-1
J88
-3
-4
-6
-7
-A6
-2
-2
-5
-5
-8
-A5
-3
-1
-6
-4
-9
-A4
J93
-1
-12
-1
-A12
-2
-11
-2
-A11
-3
-10
-3
-A10
J94
-1
J88
-6
-1
-9
-4
-A9
-2
-5
-2
-8
-5
-A8
-3
-4
-3
-7
-6
-A7
J110
-A14
-A13
Deck open
sensor
PS7
SWUD1
Deck size switch
PCB
+5V
When '0', right door is open.
RDOD* (light-blocking plate is not at PS1)
+5V
PS2D
+5V
DVRPD
When PS3 detects paper, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS3)
+5V
DPD
When paper is present in paper deck, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS4)
+5V
DEL
When lifter is at upper position, '1'.
(when light-blocking plate is at PS5)
+5V
DLP
When lifter reaches upper limit, '1'.
(when light-blocking plate is at PS6)
ID-E
When '0', Paper Deck Pedestal-M1
is identified.
J95
-1
J89
-4
-1
J156
-7
-2
-2
-3
-2
-6
-3
-B6
-3
-2
-3
-5
-4
-B5
-1
J64
-6
J110
-B8
SIZE 2
-2
-5
-B9
SIZE 1
-3
-4
-B10
J110
-B7
When PS2 detects paper, '1'.
(light-blocking plate is at PS2)
+5V
DEOP*
When '0',deck is open.
(light-blocking plate is not at PS7)
See p. 8-11.
Figure 8-202
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-3
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
2. Inputs and outputs (2/2)
Pedestal controller PCB
M1
J201
-1
J108
-1
-2
J202
-2
J109
-1
-5
Pedestal motor
-5
-1
-2
-4
Motor driver -3
-2
PCB
-3
CL1
CL2
PEDMD (output) When '1', pedestal motor is ON.
When '1', pedestal motor is normal.
LOCK* (input)
PEDSP
'1' or '0' depending on the type of copier,
thereby changing revolution.
-1
-2
-3
J32
-8
J107
-3
+24VB
-2
-1
-4
-7
-4
CL1D*
-1
-2
J156
-1
-8
J110
-B1
+24VB
-2
-1
-2
-7
-B2
CL2D*
-1
-2
-3
-6
-B3
+24VB
-2
-1
-4
-5
-B4
J83
Deck pick-up clutch
+5V
-4
J35
Vertical path roller 3
drive clutch
+24VB
When '0', CL1 goes ON.
When '0', CL2 goes ON.
J84
Deck vertical path
roller drive clutch
CL3
CL3D*
When '0', CL3 goes ON.
J86
Deck lifter drive
clutch
CL4
-1
-2
-B11
-2
-1
-B12
-1
-2
-B13
-2
-1
-B14
+24VB
CL4D*
When '1', CL4 goes ON.
J87
Deck pick-up roller
release solenoid
SL1
+24VB
DEPRL*
When '0', SL1 goes ON.
Figure 8-203
8-4
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
III. PEDESTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
A. Outline
Figure 8-301 shows the circuit that controls the pedestal motor (M1), and the circuit
has the following functions:
q Turns on and off the pedestal motor
w Rotates the pedestal motor at a specific speed
The pedestal motor (M1) is a DC motor equipped with a clock pulse generator. When
the motor rotates, clock pulses (MMCLK) corresponding to the revolution of the motor
are generated. The speed control circuit maintains the revolution of the motor by
matching the phase of the frequency of these pulses and that of the frequency of the
reference signal.
J108
-1
24VB
J109
-1 PEDMD
Clock pulse
generator
Drive
Pedestal
-2
controller
-3
PCB
LOCK*
Speed
circuit
control
circuit
MMCLK
Reference signal
Drive
current
M1
Pedestal
motor
Hall IC output
Motor driver PCB
Figure 8-301
B. Mechanism
When the pedestal motor drive signal (PEDMD) from the pedestal controller circuit
goes ‘1’, the drive circuit of the motor driver turns on, thereby rotating the pedestal motor
at a specific speed.
While the pedestal motor is rotating at a specific speed, the motor driver PCB sends
the constant speed state signal (LOCK*=1) to the pedestal controller PCB. The signal
goes ‘0’ if the revolution of the motor fluctuates for some reason.
If LOCK*=0, the operation of the machine is stopped, and ‘E901’ is indicated on the
copier’s display.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-5
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
IV. PAPER DECK UNIT
A. Basic Construction
The paper deck unit controls the operation of each load according to the signals from
the pedestal controller PCB to send paper to the copier.
Each of the loads used to pick-up and feed paper or raise the lifter is driven by the
pedestal motor.
If you operated the deck size switch, the size of the paper inside the deck is
communicated to the copier through the pedestal controller PCB.
J110-A2 Deck vertical path roller paper sensor signal (DVRPD)
J110-B4 Deck vertical path roller drive command (CL3D*)
J109-1 Pedestal motor drive command (PEDMD)
J109-2 Pedestal motor speed error signal (LOCK*)
Deck vertical
path roller
M1
CL3
Pedestal
controller
PCB
J110-B2 Deck pick-up drive command (CL2D*)
J110-A5 Deck paper sensor signal (DPD)
J110-B12 Deck lifter drive command (CL4D*)
CL4
CL2
PS3
J110-B13 Deck pick-up roller release command (DEPRL*)
SL1
J110-A11 Deck lifter position sensor signal (DEL)
J110-A8 Deck lifter limit sensor signal (DLP)
PS4
J110-B6 Deck open sensor signal (DEOP*)
PS7
PS6
PS5
Pick-up
roller
Copy paper
Feeding
roller
Separation roller
Lifter
M1 : Pedestal motor
CL2 : Deck pick-up clutch
CL3 : Deck vertical path roller drive clutch
CL4 : Deck lifter drive clutch
SL1 : Deck pick-up roller release solenoid
PS3 : Deck vertical path roller paper sensor
PS4 : Deck paper sensor
PS5 : Deck lifter position sensor
PS6 : Deck lifter upper limit sensor
PS7 : Deck open sensor
Figure 8-401
8-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
B. Pick-Up/Feeding Operation
1. Mechanism
When the copier’s COPY START key is pressed, the deck pick-up clutch (CL2) turns
on to rotate the deck pick-up roller. The deck pick-up roller leaves the paper when the
deck pick-up roller release solenoid (SL1) turns on after feeding the paper.
The feeding roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that no more than one
sheet of paper is fed to the feeding path; after leaving both rollers, the paper is moved
to the inside of the copier by the vertical path roller.
J109-1 PEDMD
M1
Deck vertical
path roller
Pedestal
controller
PCB
J110-B4
CL3D*
J110-A2
DVRPD
CL3
PS3
CL2
J110-B2
CL2D*
J110-B14
DEPRL*
SL1
Feeding
roller
Pick-up roller
Separation roller
Copy paper
Lifter
M1 : Pedestal motor
CL2 : Deck pick-up clutch
CL3 : Deck vertical path roller drive clutch
SL1 : Deck pick-up roller release solenoid
PS3 : Deck vertical path roller paper sensor
Figure 8-402
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-7
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
2. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations
A4, 2 Copies, Continuous
COPY START key
ON
INTR
SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV
LSTR
Pedestal
request signal
Copier Pick-up
(from copier)
Deck pick-up clutch
(CL2)
Deck pick-up roller
release solenoid (SL1)
Deck vertical path roller
paper sensor (PS3)
Vertical path roller 3
paper sensor (PS2)
Deck vertical path roller
drive clutch (CL3)
Vertical path roller 3
drive clutch (CL1)
Figure 8-403
8-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
C. Lifter Operation
1. Operation
When the deck is slid inside the pedestal, the pick-up roller lowers and the lightblocking plate leaves the deck lifter position sensor (PS5). The condition causes the lifter
drive clutch (CL4) to turn on, and the drive of the pedestal motor (M1) is transmitted to
the cable take-up shaft, thereby raising the lifter.
The lifter keeps rising until the deck lifter position sensor (PS5) detects the top sheet
of the paper stack placed on the lifter.
The deck lifter upper limit sensor (PS6) serves to stop the lifter in the event that the
sensor arm should block the deck lifter position sensor (PS5) for some reason.
When the lifter has reached its upper limit, it is maintained in position by the work of
a one-way gear.
When the deck is removed from the pedestal, the take-up gear disengages itself from
the one-way gear, thereby allowing the lifter to lower on its own weight.
Feeding roller
Deck lifter position
sensor
(PS5)
Lifter detecting
lever
Paper detecting
spacer
Pick-up roller shaft
Pick-up
roller arm
Separation roller
Copy paper
Lifter
Deck
: Pick-up roller up, i.e., the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever
lowers to block the lifter position sensor (PS5).
: Pick-up roller down, i.e., the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting
lever rises to leave the lifter position sensor (PS5).
Figure 8-404
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-9
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
2. Lifting Operation
Main motor
M1
Feeding roller
Pick-up roller
Separation roller
Deck lifter position
sensor (PS5)
Paper sensor (PS4)
Paper detecting lever
Paper detecting spacer
Pick-up roller
Deck lifter
upper limit
sensor (PS6)
Lifter limit detecting lever
Copy paper
Oil damper
Figure 8-405
8-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
D. Detecting Paper in the Deck
1. Identifying the Size of Paper
You must set the switch (SWUD1) on the deck size switch PCB to suit the size of
paper set inside the paper deck.
When you set the switch, the paper size signal (SIZE1 and SIZE2) sent to the
pedestal controller PCB changes to ‘1’ or ‘0’.
Based on the combination of these paper size signals, the pedestal controller PCB
identifies the size of the paper inside the paper deck as follows:
Paper size*
B5
A4
LTR
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
SIZE1
SIZE2
1
1
0
1
1
0
* The configuration of SWUD1 represents when the switch is viewed from the front.
Table 8-401
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-11
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
2. Identifying the Presence/Absence of Paper
The presence and absence of copy paper inside the paper deck is identified by the
deck paper sensor (PS4).
When the paper deck runs out of paper, the paper detecting spacer attached to the
pick-up roller shaft drops.
As a result, the paper detecting lever leaves the deck paper sensor (PS4), causing
the pedestal controller PCB to identify the absence of paper.
Paper detecting lever (light-blocking plate)
Paper detecting roll
Copy paper
Deck paper sensor (PS4)
Lifter
Figure 8-406
Paper detecting lever (light-blocking plate)
Paper detecting roll
Deck paper sensor (PS4)
Lifter
Figure 8-407
8-12
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
V. DETECTING JAMS
1. Outline
The pedestal is equipped with the following paper sensors to check the presence/
absence of copy paper and to make sure that copy paper is moved properly.
• Vertical path roller 3 paper sensor (PS2)
• Deck vertical path roller paper sensor (PS3)
The presence or absence of paper or a jam condition is checked in reference to the
presence/absence of paper over each of the sensor at such times as programmed in
advance in the pedestal controller PCB.
PS2
PS3
Figure 8-501
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-13
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
q Pick-Up Delay Jam
Copy Start key
ON
Jam indicator
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
Pick-up clutch*1
Jam check
Vertical path roller
paper sensor*2
Normal
Error
Pedestal motor (M1)
*1:
Vertical path roller 3 drive clutch (CL1)
Deck pick-up clutch (CL2)
*2:
Vertical path roller 3 paper sensor (PS2)
Deck vertical path roller paper sensor (PS3)
Figure 8-502
w Pick-Up Stationary Jam
Copy Start key
ON
Jam indicator
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
Vertical path roller
paper sensor*1
Ι
Jam check
Normal
Error
Pedestal motor (M1)
*1:
Ι:
Vertical path roller 3 paper sensor (PS2)
Deck vertical path roller paper sensor (PS3)
Varies according to paper length (EX. A4: 1.443sec (PS3))
Figure 8-503
8-14
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
VI. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to
disassemble/assemble the pedestal.
Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the pedestal.
1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for two of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the copier while any of its parts is removed.
7. Be sure to turn off the front door switch or the power switch before sliding out the
fixing assembly.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-15
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
A. Externals
1. Paper Deck Pedestal-M1
The number in parentheses indicates the number of mounting screws.
q
q
w
e
r
t
y
Upper front cover (4)
Front left cover (2)
Deck front cover (4)
Front right cover (2)
Right cover (4)
Right door cover (4)
y
w
e
t
r
Figure 8-601
u Rear cover (4)
i Left cover (4)
u
i
Figure 8-602
8-16
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
2. Detaching the Copier from the Pedestal
1) Disconnect the copier’s power plug.
2) Disconnect the pedestal’s connector q from the copier.
q
Figure 8-603
3) Open the pedestal’s right door.
4) Push in the leaf spring w, and release the vertical path roller 3 unit e.
w
e
Figure 8-604
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-17
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
5) Hold the copier’s four grips, and detach the copier from the pedestal.
Figure 8-605
8-18
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
B. Pedestal Motor Drive Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the pedestal motor drive assembly
Remove the rear cover.
Disconnect the two connectors q.
Remove the four screws w, and remove the pedestal motor drive assembly e.
e
w
q
w
Figure 8-606
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-19
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
C. Paper Deck
1. Removing the Paper Deck
1) Remove the front right cover and the front left cover.
2) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the stopper plate w from both left and
right.
q
w
Figure 8-607
w
q
Figure 8-608
3) Slide out the paper deck slowly to the front.
8-20
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
2.
1)
2)
3)
Removing the Lifter Wire
Remove the paper deck.
Remove the deck front cover.
Remove the two screws q from the inside of the deck, and remove the guide plate
w from both front and rear.
w
q
Figure 8-609
4) Mark the position of the latch assembly, and remove the latch assembly by removing
the mounting screws e on both left and right (4 in total).
e
Figure 8-610
e
Figure 8-611
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-21
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
5) Remove the mounting screw r from the front right, and remove the gear cover t.
t
r
Figure 8-612
6) Remove the mounting screw y from the front, and remove the oil damper plate u.
y
u
Figure 8-613
8-22
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
7) Remove the E-ring i from the lifter drive shaft (rear); then, remove the gear o, two
washers, and spring !0.
o
!0
i
Figure 8-614
8) Remove the E-ring !1; then, remove the gear !2, parallel pin, and pulley cover
(front/ rear in common).
!1
!2
Figure 8-615
9) Remove the end of the wire from the pulley (front/rear in common).
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-23
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
10) Remove the fastener !3 from the wire relay assembly; then, remove the pulley cover
and the wire from the pulley (front/rear in common).
!3
Figure 8-616
11) Remove the mounting screw !4, and remove the wire together with the mounting
support.
!4
Figure 8-617
8-24
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
3. Setting the Deck Size
To change the paper deck size, change the position of the guide plate at the front,
rear, and rear left.
1) Slide out the deck toward the front until it stops.
2) Remove the mounting screw from the guide plate at the front, rear, and rear left;
then, remove the guide plates.
Stopper (rear)
Screw
Screw
Stopper (front)
Stopper (left)
Screw
Figure 8-618
B5
LTR
A4
A4
LTR
B5
3) Fix each guide plate in position referring to the size indexes on the base plate, front
side plate, and guide plates.
LTR
A4
B5
Figure 8-619
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-25
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
Note:
Make sure that the front and rear guide plates are attached as follows:
• Perpendicular to the base plate of the deck.
• Parallel to the metal plates at the front and the rear.
4)
5)
6)
7)
Place paper in the deck, and slide the deck into the pedestal.
Open the right door of the deck.
Remove the switch cover.
Set the deck size switch q to reflect the new paper size.
q
Figure 8-620
8) Install the switch cover.
9) Attach the size seal to the front cover of the deck.
10) Switch on the copier, and check that the new deck size is indicated in the control
panel.
8-26
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
4. Adjusting the Deck Registration
Remove the deck front cover, and loosen the mounting screws on both left and right
of the deck (4 in total); then, move the latch assembly to the front and rear until the
standards shown in Figure 8-623 are met.
Adjusting screw
(left)
Figure 8-621
Adjusting screw (right)
Figure 8-622
(–)
(±)
±1.5mm
0
2
4
6
8
10
Figure 8-623
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-27
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
D. Pick-Up System
1. Cross Section of Pick-Up Assembly
Paper Deck Pedestal-M1
Figure 8-624
Figure 8-625
8-28
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
2. Removing the Pick-Up Assembly
1) Slide out the paper deck.
Note:
• Do not try to remove the pick-up assembly without sliding out the paper deck from
the pedestal; the lifter will make the removal of the pick-up assembly impossible.
• Do not slide out the paper deck too far toward the front; doing so would cause the
pedestal to tilt to the front when the pick-up assembly is removed
2) Remove the right cover.
3) Push is the leaf spring q, and release the Vertical path roller 3 unit w.
q
w
Figure 8-626
4) Remove the screw e, then remove the stop plate.
5) Disconnect the four connectors r.
r
e
r
Figure 8-627
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-29
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
6) Remove the nine mounting screw t, and remove the pick-up assembly y.
y
t
t
Figure 8-628
3. Removing the Pick-Up Roller
1) Remove the pick-up assembly.
2) Remove the stop ring q, and remove the pick-up roller w together with the roller
collar.
w
q
Figure 8-629
n Points to Note
When attaching the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, make sure that the
round mark w on its rubber portion is toward the front of the pedestal.
w
q
(front of pedestal)
Collar
Figure 8-630
a. The collars for the pick-up roller are identified by the color: use the gold collar for the
front, and the silver color for the rear.
b. Do not separate the rubber portion of the pick-up roller from the collar.
8-30
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
4. Removing the Feeding Roller
1) Remove the pick-up roller from the front.
2) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the pick-up roller arm bushing w.
q
w
Figure 8-631
3) Remove the pick-up roller arm e and the weight r from the pick-up roller shaft.
r
e
Figure 8-632
4) Remove the stop ring t for the feeding roller.
t
Figure 8-633
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-31
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
5) Remove the pick-up roller from the rear, and remove the pick-up roller shaft from the
bushing at the rear.
6) Remove the drive belt y from the feeding roller u, and remove the feeding roller
and the roller shaft i.
u
i
y
Figure 8-634
n Points to Note
When attaching the feeding roller q, make sure that the belt pulley w attached to
the feeding roller is toward the rear of the pedestal.
w
q
(front of pedestal)
Figure 8-635
8-32
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
5. Removing the Separation Roller
1) Open the right door, and remove the two mounting screws q from the separation
roller assembly support plate w; then, remove the separation roller together with the
pressure arm.
q
w
Figure 8-636
2) Remove the stop ring e, and remove the separation roller r.
r
e
Figure 8-637
n Points to Note
When attaching the separation roller q, make sure that the D-cut in the roller collar
is toward the front of the pedestal.
(rear)
q
(front of pedestal)
Figure 8-638
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-33
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
6. Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller
If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs frequently during pick-up operation, adjust
the position of the pressure spring for the separation roller.
q if double feeding is frequent, move the hook of the spring toward A.
w if pick-up failure is frequent, move the hook of the spring toward B.
q
w
e
B
A
r
q Feeding roller
w Separation roller
e Pressure lever
r Pressure spring
Figure 8-639
7. Position of the Pick-Up Roller Release Solenoid (SL1)
Attach the solenoid so that the pick-up roller arm q butts against the upper stay w
when the plunger of the solenoid is pushed in.
Butted
w
q
Figure 8-640
8-34
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK PEDESTAL
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-35
CHAPTER 9
INSTALLATION
This chapter describes how to install this copier.
I.
II.
SELECTING THE SITE ......................9-1
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION....9-2
A. Unpacking and Removing
the Metal Fixings ...........................9-2
B. Supplying Toner.............................9-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
III.
C. Stirring the Toner ...........................9-8
D. Installing the Drum Unit .................9-10
E. Checking Images and
Operations .....................................9-11
RELOCATING THE COPIER .............9-13
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
I. SELECTING THE SITE
Keep the following in mind when selecting the site of installation; if possible, pay a
visit to the user’s before the delivery of the copier:
1. There must be a power outlet that satisfies the required power ratings and that may
be used exclusively for the copier.
2. The temperature must be between 7.5°/45.5F and 32.5°C/90.5F and the humidity,
between 5% and 85%. In particular, avoid areas near water faucets, water boilers,
humidifiers, and refrigerators.
3. Avoid areas near sources of fire and areas subjected to dust or ammonium gas.
Avoid direct rays of the sun; provide curtains as necessary.
4. The level of ozone generated when the copier is in operation will not affect the health
of the individuals near it. However, since some may find it unpleasant, be sure that
the room is well ventilated.
5. The floor must be flat so that the feet of the copier will remain in contact and the
copier will be kept level.
6. The space must be large enough to allow at least 10cm/3.9”. from all walls so that
the copier may be operated without obstacles.
10 cm / 3.9 " min.
50 cm / 19.5" min.
50 cm / 19.5 " min.
Copier
50 cm / 19.5 " min.
Figure 9-101
7. The site must be well ventilated. If multiple copiers are installed, be sure that the
exhaust from other copiers will not flow into the copier.
Be sure not to install the copier near air inlets used for ventilating the room.
Note:
Generally, silicone gas (vapors of silicone oil from the fixing assembly) emitted by
a copier soils corona charging wires, making the life of the wires shorter. This is
more conspicuous in a low humidity environment.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-1
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
Bringing in a metal object from a cold to warm place can cause droplets of water on
its surface. This phenomenon is known as condensation, and copiers subject to
condensation can generate blank copies.
If condensation is expected, leave the copier without unpacking it for 1 hour or more,
and start the installation work after it has become used to the room temperature.
A. Unpacking and Removing the Metal Fixings
No.
Checks/remarks
Work
1
Unpack the copier, and remove the
plastic sheets.
2
Working in a group of three, hold the
copier’s grips, and place the copier on
the pedestal.
Note:
Before placing the copier on the
pedestal, check to make sure that
the pedestal has been properly
installed according to its Installation
Procedure.
Check to make sure that two cassettes
are set inside the copier.
Grip
Left dummy
cover
When the copier is lifted, always
use the handles and don’t use the
left and right dummy covers.
4
9-2
Open the cardboard box that comes
with the copier, and take out the parts
and materials.
Grip
Note:
If the INCH configuration copier, the
copyboard cover isn’t attached.
Note:
3
Grip
Grip
Check to make sure that none of the
following is missing:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copy tray
Operator’s Manual
Drum unit
Power cord (220 / 240 V only)
Lower right cover
Screw for original tray (2pcs.)
Original tray
Cassette size label (inside the
cassette)
Remove the external taping, and slide
out the cassettes. Remove the
cushioning materials from inside the
cassettes, and slide in the cassettes.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
No.
5
Work
Checks/remarks
If you are not installing a paper deck
pedestal, install the lower right cover.
If you are installing any of the above
pedestals, you will not need the lower
right cover.
2
1
Lower right cover
6
Remove the taping from the scanner
metal fixing found outside the left cover;
then, slide the metal fixing to the right,
and pull it to the front to remove.
Scanner fixing
• You may like to store away the metal
fixing for possible relocation of the
copier in the future.
7
Open the copyboard cover, and remove
the protection paper.
8
Peel the protection seal off the control
panel.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-3
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
No.
Checks/remarks
Work
9
Open the front cover, and open the
delivery assembly.
10
Push up the spacer (one each at front
and rear) of the fixing roller in the
direction of the arrow until a click is
heard.
11
Remove the spacer.
Spacer
Spacer
• You will not be using the spacer.
Note:
When removing the spacer, pay
attention to the leaf spring of the
fixing unit and the separation claw of
the delivery assembly.
Leaf spring
Spacer (rear)
12
9-4
Close the delivery assembly.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
No.
Checks/remarks
Work
13
Remove the connector cover.
14
Turn the developing assembly releasing
lever in the direction of the arrow to
unlock the developing assembly.
Connector cover
Developing assembly
Developing assembly
releasing lever
Disconnect the connector, and remove
the developing assembly. Check the
developing cylinder for scratches and
dirt.
Connector
15
Install the developing assembly; then,
connect the connector.
16
Open the hopper to the front, and shift
the feeding assembly releasing lever in
the direction of the arrow to unlock the
developing assembly.
17
Developing
assembly
Hopper
Developing
assembly
releasing
lever
Remove the screw, and slide out the
dummy drum to the front.
• You will be using the removed screw
later when installing the drum unit.
18
Screw
Connector
Dummy drum
Feeding assembly
releasing lever
Look the developing assembly in
position.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-5
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
B. Supplying Toner
No.
Checks/remarks
Work
1
Shake the toner cartridge left and right
vigorously so that the toner inside it is
even.
2
Fit the boss of the toner cartridge in the
groove found at the rear of the hopper;
then, wiggle the cartridge slightly until a
click is heard, indicating that the
cartridge has settled in position.
3
While holding lightly down on the
cartridge, pull out the black grip of the
hopper to the front.
4
While holding the grip of the cartridge,
pull the cartridge to the front until it
stops.
9-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
No.
Work
5
Tap lightly on the top of the toner
cartridge so that all toner moves to the
hopper.
6
Push the grip of the hopper back to the
rear, and detach the cartridge.
Checks/remarks
Reference:
If the grip is returned to the end, this
side of the cartridge will be removed
from the hopper.
7
Put the hopper back into its initial
position.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-7
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
C. Stirring the Toner
No.
Work
1
Connect the power plug.
2
Using the door switch actuator, turn on
the door switch, thereby turning on the
power.
Note:
Checks/remarks
• Check to make sure that the Add
Paper indicator has turned on opening and closing the copyboard cover.
• Press the keys on the keypad and
the Clear key to make sure that the
correct copy count is indicated.
Check to make sure the feeding
assembly has been unlocking.
3
4
Check to make sure that the hopper is
securely set inside the copier.
Note:
If the hopper is not securely set
inside the copier, the developing
assembly will not be supplied with
toner correctly, possibly locking the
hopper motor.
Press the service mode switch (SSW)
with a hex key.
The copier will operate about 6 min,
during which the developing assembly is
supplied with toner from the hopper.
• The indicator indicates ‘[1]’
Execute ‘No. 407’ in service mode.
• Press the ‘4’ on the keypad, OK key,
‘0’ and ‘7’ on the keypad, and OK
key in sequence.
Perform steps 5) and 6) during this
period.
Note:
Do not ever turn off the power or
remove the door switch actuator
while the copier is in operation.
SSW
9-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
No.
5
Work
Fit the stepped screws as shown, and
install the original tray.
Checks/remarks
• You may install the original tray on
either left or right.
Stepped screws
Original tray
Stepped screws
Original tray
6
Install the copy tray to the delivery
assembly.
7
Pull out the static eliminator, and clean it
with the static eliminator cleaning brush.
Thereafter, set the static eliminator, and
put the cleaning brush back into its
original place.
Static eliminator
cleaning brush
8
Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect the power plug.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-9
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
D. Installing the Drum Unit
The copier’s photosensitive drum is highly susceptible to light. Exposure to even
room light can cause white spots or black bands on copies. Try to work as quickly as
possible.
No.
Checks/remarks
Work
1
Keep the developing assembly
unlocked, and open the hopper.
2
Open the drum unit, and remove the
light-blocking sheet.
3
Set the drum unit in the copier, and fix it
in place using the screw removed from
the dummy drum.
Rail (right)
Rail (left)
Drum unit
Be sure to slide in the drum straight
along the rails in the copier.
4
Fill out the label which comes with the
drum unit, and attach the label to the
cover of the drum unit.
date
date
5
Move the knob of the drum unit back
and forth two to three times to clean the
primary charging wire.
6
Put the hopper back into its original
position.
7
Lock the developing assembly in place.
8
Lock the feeding assembly in place.
9
Attach the connector cover.
9-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Datum
counter
compteur
Zähler
notes
note
Notiz
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
E. Checking Images and Operations
No.
Work
1
Remove the door switch actuator, and
close the front door.
2
Connect the power plug, and turn on the
power switch.
3
Switch the cassette size according to
the needs of the user.
Checks/remarks
• Check to make sure that the Add
Paper indicator turns on, opening and
closing the copyboard cover.
First, switch the size guide plate to suit
the paper size. Then, put copy paper
inside the cassette, and move the
trailing edge guide plate until it comes
into contact with the trailing edge of the
copy paper.
4
Remove the cassette size plate from
each cassette holder, and attach the
appropriate size label to the size plate.
Put the size plate back into its initial
position.
5
Set the cassettes in the copier.
• Check to make sure that the paper
indicator matches with the size of the
cassette.
• Press keys other than the Copy Start
key on the control panel to make sure
that the operation is normal.
6
Set the Test Sheet on the copy board,
and make copies; then, check the
images.
• Check to make sure that no abnormal
noise is heard.
• Check the images at each default
reproduction ratio.
• Check to make sure that as many
copies as has been specified have
been made.
7
Make two-sided copies.
• Check to make sure that copying
operation is normal.
• Check to make sure that no abnormal
noise is heard.
8
Make copies in manual feed mode.
• Check to make sure that copying
operation is normal.
9
Check the external covers for damage
and deformation.
10
Clean the area around the copier.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-11
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
No.
Work
11
Move the copier to the site of
installation.
12
Enter the necessary information in the
Service Sheet.
9-12
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Checks/remarks
• Check to make sure that the copier is
more or less level.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
III. RELOCATING THE COPIER
Perform the steps that follow before relocating the copier by truck or other means of
transportation.
Step
Work
1
Move the lens to Direct position.
2
Remove the drum unit.
3
Fix the scanner in place.
4
Tape the charging assembly
and feeding assembly releasing
levers in place to avoid shifting
by vibration.
5
Tape the front door and the
delivery assembly in place.
6
Place A3/11”×17” copy paper on
the copyboard glass, and tape
the copyboard cover in place.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Checks
Remarks
What is referred to as
Direct position is
where the lens is
when warm-up ends
after power-on.
Put the drum unit in a
box for transportation.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-13
CHAPTER 10
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
This chapter describes the components useful for maintenance of this copier and the
checking methods.
I.
II.
PERIODICALLY REPLACED
PARTS ................................................10-1
A. Periodically Replaced Parts ..........10-1
CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES ...10-2
A. Copier ............................................10-2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
III.
IV.
B. Paper Deck Pedestal.....................10-3
C. Cassette Feeding Unit...................10-3
SCHEDULED SERVICING.................10-4
PERIODICALLY SERVICED PARTS..10-6
A. Copier ............................................10-6
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS
Some of the copier’s parts must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a
specific level of performance. Replace them as indicated regardless of the
presence/absence of external damage.
(Schedule the replacement so that it coincides with scheduled servicing.)
A. Periodically Replaced Parts
as of May 1997
No.
Parts
Parts No.
Q’ty
Life (copies)
1
Ozone filter
FL5-0486-000
1
60,000
2
Static eliminator
FF2-3902-000
1
60,000
3
Transfer corona wire
FY3-0040-000
AR
60,000
4
Scanner cooling fan filter
FB1-7671-000
1
180,000
Remarks
Or 1yr.
Or 1yr.
Note:
The above values are estimates only and are subject to change based on future
data.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
10-1
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES
Some of the copier’s parts may have to be replaced once or more because of
deterioration or damage over the period of warranty. Replace them as necessary.
A. Copier
as of May 1997
Parts
No.
Parts No.
Q’ty
Life (copies)
1
Pick-up roller (front)
FF5-1221-000
2
240,000
2
Pick-up roller (rear)
FF5-1220-000
2
240,000
3
Feeding roller
FB1-7061-000
2
120,000
4
Separation roller
FB1-7060-000
2
120,000
5
Fixing cleaning belt
FA3-8908-000
1
200,000
6
Upper fixing roller
FB1-7956-000
1
200,000
7
Lower fixing roller
FB1-7957-000
1
200,000
8
Upper fixing separation claw
FB1-7075-000
5
200,000
9
Lower fixing separation claw
FA2-9037-000
4
200,000
10
Insulating bush (fixing
assembly)
FB1-6823-000
2
200,000
11
Fixing
heater
120V
FH7-4545-000
1
300,000
220/240V
FH7-4536-000
120V
FH7-4547-000
1
300,000
220/240V
FH7-4538-000
120V
FH7-3320-000
1
100,000
220/240V
FH7-3321-000
Main
Sub
12
Scanning lamp
13
Pre-exposure lamp
FG5-1788-000
1
200,000
14
Thermistor
FH7-7429-000
1
300,000
15
Scanner drive wire (front)
FB1-7090-000
1
500,000
16
Scanner drive wire (rear)
FB1-7874-000
1
500,000
17
Developing cylinder
FB1-8119-000
1
300,000
18
Separation pad
FC1-9022-030
1
120,000
19
Registration roller
FF5-1009-000
1
300,000
Remarks
Note:
The above are estimates only and subject to change to reflect data from the field.
10-2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
B. Paper Deck Pedestal
as of MAY 1997
No.
Parts
Parts No.
Q’ty
Life (copies)
1
Pick-up roller (front)
FF5-1221-000
1
240,000
2
Pick-up roller (rear)
FF5-1220-000
1
240,000
3
Feeding roller
FB1-7061-000
1
120,000
4
Separation roller
FB1-7060-020
1
120,000
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Remarks
10-3
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
III. SCHEDULED SERVICING
Note:
1. As a rule, perform scheduled servicing every 20,000 copies.
2. Before setting out for a visit, check the service book, and take parts likely to need
replacement.
No.
Checks
Work
1
Meet the person
incharge
Check the general
condition.
2
Record the counter
reading
Check fault copies.
3
Make test copies:
a. Image density
b. Soiling of white
background
c. Clarity of characters
d. Leading edge margin
Direct, reduce, Enlarge,
page separation mode,
duplexing mode.
e. Left/right margin
f. Fixing, registration,
soiling on back
g. Abnormal noise
h. Counter operation
Remarks
Standard: 2.0 ±1.0mm
(Direct/one-sided, twosided)
Standard: 2.5 ±1.5mm
(Direct/one-sided, twosided)
4
Clean the static
eliminator
Use the cleaning brush.
5
Clean the feeding
assembly
Use a moist cloth.
• Transfer guide
• Feeding belt
• Feeding assembly
mount
6
10-4
Clean the fixing/delivery
assembly
• Upper fixing roller
Use solvent
• Lower fixing roller
Use solvent
• Separation claw (upper,
lower)
Use cleaning oil
• Paper guide plate
Use cleaning oil
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
No.
Work
7
Provide scheduled servicing to suit the number
of copies made (P.10-7).
8
Clean the copyboard
cover and the copyboard
glass.
9
Make test copies.
10
Make sample copies.
11
Put sample copies in
order, and clean up the
area around the copier.
12
Record the final counter
reading.
13
Fill out the service sheet
and report to the person
in charge.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Checks
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Remarks
10-5
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
IV. PERIODICALLY SERVICED PARTS
A. Copier
:Clean
Part
Unit
Externals
X:Oil
:Replace
every every every
20,000 60,000 180,000
copies copies copies
:Adjust
1yr.
:Inspect
Remarks
Copyboard glass
Use alcohol
Ozon filter
Replace every
60,000 copies or 1yr.
Pick-up assembly
Pick-up roller
Scanner drive
assembly
Scanner rail
Scanner drive wire
Mirror positioning tool
Feeding
assembly
Transfer guide
assembly
Use a moist cloth.
/X
Use alcohol
Feeding belt
Feeding assembly
mount
Optical path
Scanner reflecting
plate
Scanner side
reflecting plate
Use a blower brush;
if dirt persists, use
alcohol.
No.1 through No.6
mirrors
Lens
Dust-proofing
glass
Original size
detecting unit
Scanner cooling
fan filter
10-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Replace every
180,000 copies or
1yr.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Unit
Corona unit
Fixing assembly
Parts
every every every
20,000 60,000 180,000
copies copies copies
1yr.
Remarks
Transfer corona
wire
Static eliminator
Use the cleaning
brush
Upper fixing roller
Use cleaning oil
Lower fixing roller
Separation claw
(upper, lower)
Use solvent
Fixing inlet guide
Caution:
Do not use solvents/oil other than those specified.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
10-7
CHAPTER 11
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes the maintenance, checks, standards, adjustment,
troubleshooting for image fault, operation fault and feeding fault of this copier, electrical
component arrangement, their roles, service mode and self-diagnosis.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION....................................11-3
A. Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure ....................................11-3
B. Points to Note for Scheduled
Servicing ......................................11-5
STANDARDS AND
ADJUSTMENTS ...............................11-7
A. Adjusting the Images ...................11-7
B. Exposure System.........................11-22
C. Image Formation System.............11-29
D. Pick-Up / Feeding System ...........11-34
E. Fixing System ..............................11-40
F. Electrical System .........................11-43
TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE
FAULTS ............................................11-53
A. Making Initial Checks ...................11-53
B. Image Fault Samples ...................11-56
C. Troubleshooting Faulty Images....11-57
TROUBLESHOOTING
MALFUNCTIONS .............................11-73
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions ......11-73
B. Troubleshooting Malfunctions in
the Pedestal .................................11-102
TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING
FAULTS ............................................11-107
A. Copy Paper Jams ........................11-107
B. Troubleshooting Feeding Faults ..11-112
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
VI.
ARRANGEMENT AND
FUNCTIONS OF THE
ELECTRICAL PARTS.......................11-113
A. Sensors ........................................11-114
B. Switches, clutches, and
solenoids ......................................11-116
C. Heaters, lamps, and motors.........11-118
D. PCBs ............................................11-120
E. Paper deck pedestaL-M1.............11-122
F. Variable Resistors, Light-Emitting
Diodes, and Check pins by PCB .11-124
VII. SERVICE MODE ..............................11-129
A. Outline..........................................11-129
B. Using Service Mode.....................11-130
C. Using Adjustment Mode and
Optional / Setting Mode ...............11-131
D. Control/Display Mode [1] .............11-132
E. I/0 Display Mode [2] .....................11-147
F. Adjustment Mode [3] ....................11-171
G. Function Mode [4] ........................11-173
H. Optional Settings Mode [5] ..........11-175
I. Counter Mode [6] .........................11-177
VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS............................11-179
A. Copier ..........................................11-179
B. Pedestal Self Diagnosis ...............11-183
C. RDF/ADF Self Diagnosis .............11-184
D. Sorter Self Diagnosis ...................11-185
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Guide to Troubleshooting Tables
The troubleshooting procedures in this manual are prepared in the form of tables,
rather than flow charts. Study the following for an idea of how to consult the tables.
EX. AC power is absent.
Checks
Remedies
YES/NO
Cause/Fault
Step
Power plug
1
Is the power plug connected to the outlet?
NO
Connect the plug.
Covers
2
Are the front door and delivery cover closed properly?
NO
Close the door and cover.
Main power
3
Is the specified voltage
present at the power outlet?
NO
The problem is not the
copier’s; advise the user.
4
Is the specified voltage present between J1-1 and J12? (J1 is located near the
power supply cord mount.)
YES
Go to step 6.
n To find out the cause (faulty part) of a single problem, see the Cause/Fault column.
In the case of “AC power is absent,” you will learn that the power plug may not be
connected, the covers may not be closed properly, or the main power may be absent.
n To find out checks to make or remedies to provide for a single problem, see the
Remedy column as guided by YES/NO to the checks; or, move to the next step as
necessary.
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Remedies
1
Is the power
plug connected to
the outlet?
NO
Connect the
plug
NO
Close the door
and cover.
NO
The problem is not
the copier’s: advise
the user.
YES
2
Are the front door
and delivery cover
closed properly?
YES
3
Is the specified
voltage present at the
power outlet?
YES
n The instruction “Measure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and J109-2 (–) on the DC
controller PCB” asks you to connect the meter’s positive probe (+) to J109-1 and
negative probe to J109-2 (–).
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-1
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-2
I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure
non-AE, copy density at 5
Pre-Check
Start
Execute 'U25' in user
mode (wire cleaning) to
clean the transfer
charging wire.
Clean the primary
charging wire and the
static eliminator.
Checks on Solid Black Density
Is the density of
gray scale No. 1
too light?
YES
Turn the adjusting screws
in the front and at the rear
of the primary corona
assembly counterclockwise
to move the primary corona
wire closer to the drum.
NO
Adjustment on Density Slope
Is there a
difference in density between
front and rear?
YES
Adjust the slit according to the slit plate
adjustment procedure (next page)
Set it to the middle value.
NO
Make a copy.
Is the setting of ‘U21’
(density correction) in user
mode the middle
value?
Is the density
of gray scale No. 9
identical to the density of No. 8
through No. 9 of
the chart?
NO
Turn the adjusting screw
at the front of the primary
corona assembly
counterclockwise.
Turn the adjusting screw
at the front of the primary
corona assembly
clockwise.
End
NO
YES
Decrease the setting of
‘302’ in service mode [3]
so that the density of No.
9 decreases (Note 1)
YES
YES
NO
Is the density
of gray scale No. 9 too
high (dark)?
Is it higher at front
Check the height of the
corona wires.
NO
Optimum Density Adjustment
Increase the setting of
‘302’ in service mode [3]
so that the density of No.
9 increases (Note 1)
Make a copy.
YES
Check to make sure that the
settings of ‘301’ and ‘302’ in
service mode [3] are as
indicated on the service
label attached to the front
door; otherwise, correct the
settings.
Make a copy.
Note1: A shift is mode in the
control table for the
intensity of scanning
lamp.
non-AE, copy density at 5,
2 to 3 copies (NA-3)
Check the following:
1. difference in density
between front and rear
2. density of gray scale
No. 9
3. presence/absence of
fogging in white
background
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-3
Adjusting the Slit Plate
Note:
• Use only the slit plate at the front.
• If you must replace the drum unit, be sure to put the slit plate back to the white marking.
1) Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
2) Remove the copyboard glass, and move the No.1 mirror mount to the center, where work is facilitated.
3) Adjust the slit plate at the front by referring to the table below.
1
2
1
3
2
4
Rear slit plates
(These plates cannot be adjusted.)
A
B
A
B
A
If you adjusted the slit q by loosening the screw r, the change will affect
the area from the center to the rear end.,
B
If you adjusted the slit w by loosening the screw e, the change will affect
the image end (up to a point about 30 mm from the rear).
A3
Leading edge
A3
Leading edge
Slit adjustment direction
A
B
11-4
Image density
Lighter
Darker
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
B. Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing
Optical path
Copyboard/Scanning system
Part
tool/solvent
Copyboard glass
Alcohol
Original size sensor Blower blush
Cleaning
Cleaning
Lens
Dust-proofing
glass
Scanning lamp
Lint-free paper
Dry-wiping
Reflecting plate
No.1 to No.4
Blower blush.
If dirt cannot be
removed, use
lint -free paper.
Mirror cleaning
tool
Cleaning
mirrors
No.5 to No.6
mirrors
Part
work/remarks
tool/solvent
work/remarks
Brower brush
Brower brush
Cleaning
Cleaning
tool/solvent
work/remarks
Corona units
Part
Fixing assembly
Part
Separation claw
Upper roller/
Lower roller
Inlet guide
Dry wipe it,
there after,
clean it using
lint-free paper
with alcohol
Primary
corona unit
Transfer
corona unit
Alcohol
lint-free paper
Static
eliminator
Brush
Use a cleaning
brush
Primary
corona unit
grid
Blower brush
Cleaning
Pick-up/feeding assembly
tool/solvent
Solvent
Cleaning oil
(TKN-0464)
Solvent
work/remarks
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Part
Pick-up
roller
Transfer guide
Feeding belt
tool/solvent
Moist cloth*
work/remarks
Cleaning
Feeding
assembly mount
*Make sure the parts are completely dry.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-5
11-6
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
II. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjusting the Images
1
Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin [3] No. 305
Select [3] No. 305 (leading edge margin adjustment) in service mode, and make
adjustments so that the image leading edge margin is 2.5 ±1.5 mm when the Test Sheet
is copied in Direct.
2.5 ± 1.5 mm
Figure 11-201
Reference:
2nd side of 2-sided copy: 2.5 ±2.0 mm
Making Adjustments
1) Start [3] in service mode, and select No. 305 using the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘305’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates the stored setting.
3) Using the keypad or the Zoom keys, change the setting.
• The indicator flashes the setting.
• To enter a negative setting, press the % key.
4) Press the OK key.
• The new setting is stored.
• The indicator stops flashing and remains on.
• A press on the Copy Start key starts copying.
5) To change the settings in succession, repeat steps 3) and 4).
6) Press the Clear key to return to item selection.
The settings and the image positions have the following relationships:
• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the margin width changes about 0.4 mm.
• A higher setting decreases the margin width.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-7
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width [3] No. 306
Select [3] No. 306 in service mode (leading edge non-image width adjustment), and
make adjustments so that the leading edge non-image width is 2.0 ±1.0 mm when the
Test Sheet is copied in Direct.
The copier adjusts the leading edge non-image width in relation to the timing at
which the blank shutter is closed.
Be sure to perform the following steps whenever you have replaced the blank shutter
solenoid or the blank exposure assembly.
2.0 ± 1.0 mm
Figure 11-202
Reference:
6 mm or less in Reduce or Enlarge mode (however, 8 mm or less at 50%)
Making Adjustments
1) Start [3] in service mode, and select No. 306 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘306’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates the stored setting.
3) Using the keypad or the Zoom keys, change the setting.
• The indicator flashes the setting.
• To enter a negative setting, press the % key.
4) Press the OK key.
• The new setting is stored.
• The indicator stops flashing and remains on.
• A press on the Copy Start key starts copying.
5) To change the settings in succession, repeat steps 3) and 4).
6) Press the Clear key to return to item selection.
The settings and the image positions have the following relationships:
• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the margin width changes about 0.4 mm.
• A higher setting increases the margin width.
11-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3
Adjusting the Trailing Edge Non-Image Width [3] No. 307
Select [3] No. 307 in service mode (trailing edge non-image width adjustment), and
make adjustments so that the trailing edge non-image width is 2.5 ±1.5 mm when the
Test Sheet is copied in Direct.
The copier adjusts the trailing edge non-image width in relation to the timing at which
the blank shutter is closed.
Be sure to perform the following steps whenever you have replaced the blank shutter
solenoid or the blank exposure assembly.
2.5 ±
1.5 mm
Figure 11-203
Reference:
8 mm or less in Reduce or Enlarge mode
Making Adjustments
1) Select [3] in service mode, and select No. 307 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘307’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates the stored setting.
3) Change the setting using the keypad or the Zoom keys.
• The indicator flashes the setting.
• To enter a negative setting, press the % key.
4) Press the OK key.
• The new setting is stored.
• The indicator stops flashing and remains on.
• A press on the Copy Start key starts copying.
5) To change the settings in succession, repeat steps 3) and 4).
6) Press the Clear key to return to item selection.
The settings and the image positions have the following relationships:
• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the margin width changes about 0.4 mm.
• A higher setting decreases the margin width.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-9
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4
Adjusting the Left-Right Registration
Make adjustments so that the edges of the copy image and the copy are 0±1.5 mm
from each other.
(–)
(+)
0 ± 1.5 mm
0
2
4
6
8
10
Figure 11-204
Reference:
2nd side of 2-sided copy: 0 ±2.0 mm
a. Pick-Up from the Cassette
Loosen the screw q, and adjust the position of the cassette hook plate w.
w
q
Figure 11-205
11-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
b. Pick-Up from the Multifeeder
Loosen the screw q, and adjust the position of the tray.
q
Figure 11-206
c. Pick-Up from the Paper Deck
Remove the deck front cover, and loosen the screw q (deck left/right); then, adjust
the position of the latch assembly in front/rear direction.
q
Figure 11-207
q
Figure 11-208
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-11
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
5
Adjusting the Image Left-Right Margin [3] No. 308
Select [3] No. 308 in service mode (left/right margin adjustment), and make
adjustments so that the image left/right margin is 2.5 ±1.5 mm when the Test Sheet is
copied in Direct.
Be sure you have adjusted the left/right registration before performing the following
steps.
Reference:
2nd side of 2-sided copies: 2.5 ±2.0 mm
Making Adjustments
a. Margin Width
1) Select [3] in service mode, and select No. 308 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘308’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates the stored setting.
3) Using the keypad or the Zoom keys, change the setting.
• The indicator flashes the new setting.
4) Press the OK key.
• The new setting is stored.
• The indicator stops flashing and remains on.
5) To change the settings in succession, repeat steps 3) and 4).
6) Press the Clear key to return to item selection.
The settings and the image positions have the following relationships:
• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the margin width changes about 0.37 mm.
• A higher setting increases the margin width.
Shutter
Adjusts the distance
between the two shutters
(+)
(-)
Figure 11-209
11-12
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
b. Adjusting the Position of the Left/Right Margin
Turn the screw, and make adjustments to suit the standards.
• A clockwise turn moves the margin toward the front.
• A counterclockwise turn moves the margin to the rear.
• A full turn of the screw moves the image by about 1 mm.
Adjusting screw
Figure 11-210
Shutter
Shifts the entire
shutter
Figure 11-211
Note:
For both a. and b., be sure to try different reproduction ratios after adjustments so
that a blank shutter home position search will be executed.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-13
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
6
AE Adjustments
If you have replaced the scanning lamp, AE sensor, or DC controller PCB, you must
make the adjustments indicated by O; make the adjustments indicated by ∆ as
necessary.
First, execute [4] No. 402 in service mode (AE auto adjustment) for automatic
adjustments.
If the appropriate adjustments cannot be made after several tries (density indicator
LED F5 and F9 flash), or if copies of the Test Sheet made in AE mode are too dark or
too light, execute [3] No. 304 in service mode (AE mode scanning lamp activation
voltage auto adjustment).
Be sure to follow the numerical sequence of the table.
No.
Item
After replacing AE sensor
After replacing controller PCB
1
402
O
O
2
304
∆
∆
3
303
∆
∆
Table 11-201
•
In No. 402, auto adjustment is not executed for the AE slope, and the standard slope
is used. To adjust the slope, execute No. 303.
11-14
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
AE Auto Adjustment [4] No. 402
In AE auto adjustment, adjustments are made so that the intensity of the lamp in AE
mode matches the AE sensor output of manual copy density 5 in reference to copies of
an original (Test Sheet) on the copyboard glass.
Making Adjustments
1) Place the Test sheet (NA-3) on the Copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.
2) Start [4] in service mode, and select No. 402 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘402’.
3) Press the OK key.
• The scanning lamp turns on, and the scanner moves to the AE position.
• AE scanning is executed, and the intensity for AE scanning is automatically set.
• Thereafter, the scanner returns to home position, and the scanning lamp turns off.
4) Press the Reset key.
• Mode selection mode starts, indicating [4].
• If necessary, execute No. 304.
Item
Function
402
AE scanning
intensity
automatic
adjustment
Description
Remarks
Automatic adjustment
occurs so that the original is copied at copy
density 5 when ‘402’ is
executed.
Lighter
Note:
Copy
density 5
Darker
Test Chart
Original
density
If AE adjustment
fails, the density
indicator LED on
the control panel
F5 and F9 flash.
If such occurs,
make the adjustment once again.
Table 11-202
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-15
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Scanning Lamp Activation Voltage Auto Adjustment in AE Mode [3] No. 304
Making Adjustment
1) Start [3] in service mode, and select No. 304 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘304’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator flashes the stored setting.
3) Using the keypad or the Zoom keys, change the settings according to the table
below.
• The indicator flashes the setting.
4) Press the OK key.
• The new setting is stored.
• The indicator stops flashing and remains on.
• A press on the Copy Start key starts copying.
5) Press the key.
• Item selection mode starts, indicating ‘304’.
• If necessary, execute No. 303.
Item
Function
304
AE scanning
intensity
adjustment
Description
Remarks
1
2
Lighter 7.5
q When the setting
is decreased in
service mode, the
AE copies will be
darker.
w If the setting is
increased in
service mode, the
AE copies will be
lighter.
Copy
density 5
Darker
Test Chart
Original
density
Table 11-203
11-16
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Newspaper Original DC Bias Adjustment in AE Mode [3] No. 303
After executing No. 402 and No. 304, make a copy of a newspaper. If the copy is too
dark or too light, make the following adjustments:
Making Adjustments
1) Start [3] in service mode, and select No. 303 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘303’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator flashes the stored setting.
3) Using the keypad or the Zoom keys, change the setting according to the table below.
• The indicator flashes the setting.
4) Press the OK key.
• The new setting is stored.
• The indicator stops flashing, and remains on.
• Press the Copy Start key to start copying.
5) Press the Reset key twice.
• These presses end service mode.
Item
Function
303
AE slope
Description
Remarks
1
Lighter 7.5
2
Copy
density 5
q If the setting is
decreased in
service mode, the
newspaper copies
will be lighter.
w If the setting is
increased in
service mode, the
newspaper copies
will be darker.
Darker
Test Chart
Newspaper Original
density
Table 11-204
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-17
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
7
Adjusting the Developing Bias DC Component [3] No. 302
Make adjustments according to the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure.
Making Adjustments
1) Start [3] in service mode, and select No. 302 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘302’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator flashes the stored setting.
3) Using the keypad or the Zoom keys, change the setting.
• The indicator flashes the setting.
• To enter a negative setting, press the % key.
4) Press the OK key.
• The setting is stored.
• The indicator stops flashing and remains on.
5) Press the Clear key to start copying.
The settings and the developing bias have the following relationships:
• For each ‘1’ of the setting, the output of the developing bias DC component
changes by about 5 V.
• A higher setting decreases the developing bias DC component, making the
copies darker.
• A lower setting increases the developing bias DC component, making the copies
lighter.
11-18
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
8
Adjusting the Horizontal Registration Paper Edge Sensor Position [3] No. 324
If a discrepancy is noted between front and rear margins on the second side of a twosided copy, make the following adjustments:
Making Adjustments
1) Start [3] in service mode, and select No. 324 using the keypad.
The indicator indicates ‘324’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates the stored setting.
3) Using the keypad or the Zoom keys, change the setting.
• The indicator flashes the setting.
• To enter a negative setting, press the % key.
4) Press the OK key.
• The new setting is stored.
• The indicator stops flashing and remains on.
• A press on the Copy Start key starts copying.
5) Press the Reset key twice.
• These presses end service mode.
The settings and the margin have the following relationships:
• For each ‘1’, the non-image width changes by about 0.5 mm.
• A higher setting increases the margin at the front.
• A lower setting decreases the margin at the rear.
Note:
After making adjustments, turn off and then on the power switch to move the
horizontal paper end sensor to home position.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-19
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Adjusting the Trailing Edge Margin for Pick-Up from the Multifeeder [3] No. 327
Make adjustments so that the trailing edge margin is 2.5 ±1.5 mm when free-size
copying is executed using the multifeeder.
2.5 ±
1.5 mm
Figure 11-212
Making Adjustments
1) Start [3] in service mode, and select No. 327 using keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘327’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates the stored setting.
3) Using the keypad or the Zoom keys, change the setting.
• The indicator flashes the setting.
• To enter a negative setting, press the % key.
4) Press the OK key.
• The new setting is stored.
• The indicator stops flashing and remains on.
• A press on the Copy Start key starts copying.
5) To change the settings in succession, repeat steps 3) and 4).
6) Press the Clear key to return to item selection.
The settings and the image position have the following relationship:
• For each ‘1’, the margin width changes about 0.4 mm.
• A higher setting decreases the margin width.
11-20
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
10
Adjusting the Book Erasing Width [3] No. 326
Adjust the width that runs in the middle of an original in book erase mode.
The Length of χ in Figure 11-213 may be changed.
This mode does not allow changing the left/right edge of a book original.
Book original
χ
Figure 11-213
Making adjustment
1) Start [3] in service mode, and select No. 326 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘326’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates the stored setting.
3) Using the keypad or the Zoom keys, change the setting.
• The indicator flashes the setting.
• To enter a negative setting, press the % key.
4) Press the OK key.
• The new setting is stored.
• The indicator stops flashing and remains on.
• A press on the Copy Start key starts copying.
5) To change settings in succession, repeat steps 3) and 4).
6) Press the Clear key to return to item selection.
The settings and the book erasing width have the following relationship.
• For each ‘1’, the frame erasing width changes by about 1 mm.
• A higher setting increases the frame erasing width.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-21
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
B. Exposure System
1
Routing the Scanner Drive Cable
Route the cable in the order indicated; then, adjust the tension of the cable and the
position of the mirror.
Note:
Before starting the work, be sure to fix the No. 2 mirror mount temporarily in place
to the front and rear side plates.
q
y
e
w
Put the steel ball
into the hole
of the pully.
r
Wind
eight times.
o
u
=0 –
3mm
t
Fix in place
temporarily.
i
Figure 11-214
11-22
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Adjusting the Position of the Mirror (optical path length between No. 1
mirror and No. 2/No. 3 mirror)
1) Remove the screw used to temporarily fix the No.2 mirror mount in position (both
front, rear).
2) Loosen the four screws on the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3002-000), and extend
the two arms fully; then, tighten the screws (both front and rear).
Reference:
The mirror positioning tool is used in common with other models. Adjust the length
of the arms to suit the copier in advance.
3) Remove the pin from the mirror positioning tool (front and rear).
4) Mount the mirror positioning tool q to the No.1 mirror mount and the No.2 mirror
mount.
q
(front)
Figure 11-215
q
(rear)
Figure 11-216
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-23
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
5) Mount the fixing of the scanner cable to the No.1 mirror mount (both front and rear)
with screws w.
w
w (rear)
Figure 11-217
w
(front)
Figure 11-218
11-24
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3
Adjusting the Tension of the Scanner Cable
Loosen the binding screw, and align the tensioner plate to the line marked with a
scribe in advance.
Or, tighten the binding screw so that the wire spring and the hole in the side plate
shown in Figure 11-219 is 0 to 3 mm when viewed from the front.
Line drawn with a scribe
Binding screw
r=0 – 3mm
Wire spring
Tensioner plate
Figure 11-219
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-25
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4
Adjusting the Tension of the Lens Drive Belt
Move the lens motor support q and fit it in place so that the reading of the spring
gauge is 1000 ± 50g when motor support q is pulled with a spring gauge in the direction
of the arrow at the point A indicated in Figure 11-220.
q
A
Figure 11-220
5
Cleaning the No.4 Mirror
1) Remove the copyboard glass and the lens hood.
2) Remove the screw q and the mirror guide plate w; then, clean the No.4 mirror.
w
q
Figure 11-221
11-26
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
6
a.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Cleaning the No.5/No.6 Mirror
Removing the Mirror Cleaning Tool
Remove the copyboard glass.
Remove the lens hood.
Remove the mirror guide plate.
Move the lens stage in enlargement direction.
Remove the screw q, and remove the mirror cleaning tool w.
Use the tool for cleaning the No.5/No.6 mirror.
q
w
Figure 11-222
b. Cleaning the No.5 Mirror
1) Remove the mirror cleaning tool.
2) As shown, put the mirror cleaning tool q against the No.5 mirror, and move the tool
in the direction of the arrow to clean. (At this time, take care so that the cleaning tool
or your fingers will not touch the No.4 mirror.)
q
Figure 11-223
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-27
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
c.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Cleaning the No.6 Mirror
Remove the mirror cleaning tool.
Open the front door, and remove the developing assembly and the drum unit.
Remove the dust-proofing glass.
While keeping the mirror cleaning tool q (sides A and B) against the lens mount,
move it in the direction of the arrow to clean.
Side B
Side A
q
Figure 11-224
d. Installing the Mirror Cleaning Tool
When installing the mirror cleaning tool to the right stay, butt the side C of the tool
against the right stay q and then fix it in place with a screw.
Thereafter, check to make sure that the cleaning tool and the No.1 mirror mount are
not interfering with each other.
Side C
q
Figure 11-225
11-28
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
C. Image Formation System
1
Orientation of the Scanning Lamp
Install the scanning lamp so that the boss at the center (lamp q) faces in the
direction of the arrow (mirror mount reverse direction), and the longer side is positioned
so that the logo mark is at the front.
Mirror mount reverse direction
q
Figure 11-226
Note:
Do not touch the lamp assembly.
2
Position of the Blank Shutter Solenoid
Adjust the position of the solenoid to that A is 7.7 ±0.5 mm on both sides when the
solenoid is moved in the direction of activation. When taking measurements, be careful
not to force the shutter with calipers or the like.
After making adjustments, check to make sure that the solenoid moves smoothly.
A
Figure 11-227
Figure 11-228
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-29
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3
Routing the Blank Shutter Cable
Slide shutter
Windtwice
Windtwice
Figure 11-229
11-30
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4
Routing the Charging Wire
<Primary charging wire>
7mm
spring
ring
height adjusting block
Figure 11-230
<Transfer charging wire>
2mm
spring
ring
height adjusting block
Figure 11-231
Note:
Keep the following in mind:
• Make sure that the charging wire is free of bends or twists and its gold-plating has
not peeled.
• Make sure that the charging wire is free of slack.
• Make sure that the charging wire is in the V-groove of the height-adjusting roll.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-31
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
5
Stringing the Guide Wire
The guide wire is 0.148 mm in diameter.
When stringing it, be sure to follow the order indicated in the figure.
A
3
2
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
10
11
13
B
Figure 11-232
6
Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire
The height of the charging wire may be adjusted by turning the screw located behind
the charging assembly. A full single turn of the screw raises or lowers the charging wire
by about 0.7 mm.
Corona Unit
Height of Standard Position
Primary
A=10.6 ± 0.3mm
A
Transter
B=9.5 ± 0.2 mm
B
Figure 11-233
11-32
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
7
Position of the Developing Assembly Magnetic Seal
Attach the magnetic seal firmly in contact with the opening shown in Figure 11-234.
Magnetic seal
Opening (butting reference)
Figure 11-234
Be sure that the correct magnetic seal is used; different seals are used for the front
and the rear.
w
q
q
Rear
w
Front
Figure 11-235
8
After Replacing the Drum unit
Whenever you have replaced the drum unit, record the date and the current counter
reading on the label which comes with the drum unit, and attach the label to the front
over; then, perform the image adjustment basic procedure.
date
date
Datum
counter
compteur
Zähler
notes
note
Notiz
Figure 11-236
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-33
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
D. Pick-Up/Feeding System
1
Orientation of the Pick-Up Roller
When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure that the round
marking w on the rubber portion is toward the front of the copier.
• Use the brass-colored collar at the front.
• Use the silver-colored collar at the rear.
w
q
(front of copier)
Collar
Figure 11-237
2
Orientation of the Separation Roller
When installing the separation roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure so that the
D-cut is toward the front.
(rear)
q
(front of copier)
Figure 11-238
11-34
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3
Orientation of the Feeding Roller
When installing the feeding roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure that the gear
w on the feeding roller is at the rear of the copier.
w
q
(front of copier)
Figure 11-239
4
Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller
If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the
pressure spring of the separation roller:
q If double feeding occurs, move the spring toward A.
w If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring toward B.
q
w
e
B
A
r
q Feeding roller
w Separation roller
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
e Locking lever
r Pressure spring
Figure 11-240
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-35
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
5
Position of the Pick-Up Roller Solenoid (pick-up assembly; SL1, SL2)
Install the solenoid so that the pick-up roller arm q shown in Figure 11-241 butts
against the upper stay w when the plunger of the solenoid is pushed in.
Butted.
w
q
Figure 11-241
6
Orientation of the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller
When installing the multifeeder pick-up roller q, be sure that the side whose collar
has a crossing w is toward the rear.
w
q
(front of copier)
Figure 11-242
11-36
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
7
Position of the Pick-Up Guide Plate Cam (multifeeder assembly)
Adjust the engagement of the 26T gear 1 and 26T gear 2 so that the paper guide
plate and the paper guide plate cam are as shown in Figure 11-243 when the solenoid
plate is in contact with the claw of the control ring.
26T gear 1
Control ring
Paper guide plate
,
Claw
Paper guide plate
Solenoid plate
cam
26T gear 2
Figure 11-243
8
Routing the Timing Belt (multifeeder assembly)
Butt the rack plate of the multifeeder against section A (open state).
Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt to the pulley.
Timing belt
Pulley
Section A
Rack plate
Pulley
B
Slide volume
Figure 11-244
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-37
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Pad (multifeeder assembly)
If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the
pressure spring q of the separaiton pad.
q If double feeding occurs, move the spring holder toward B.
w If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring holder toward A.
A
B
q
Figure 11-245
10
Routing the Drive Belt
Route the drive belt through the gears and rollers as shown in Figure 11-246.
Main motor
Pulley A
Pulley B
Drum drive belt
Drive belt
Figure 11-246
11-38
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11
Adjusting the Position of the Horizontal Registration Solenoid
Move the position of the solenoid q so that the link w butts against the plate e
when the plunger of the solenoid is pushed in.
q
w
e
Butted.
Figure 11-247
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-39
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
E. Fixing System
1
Points to Note When Installing the Fixing Heater
a. Do not touch the surface of the heater.
b. One of the terminals (lead wire q) of the sub heater is a round terminal w. Both
terminals of the main heater are fastons e.
<Main Heater>
The longer lead wire must be at the front of the copier.
e
q
Figure 11-248
<Sub Heater>
The round terminal must be at the rear of the copier. The fastons must be at the front
of the copier.
w
q
Figure 11-249
c. Insert the main heater to the right side (pick-up side) and the sub heater to the left
side (delivery side) when viewing from the front of the fixing assembly.
Sub heater
Main heater
(delivery side)
(pick-up side)
Upper fixing roller
Figure 11-250
11-40
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Adjusting the Nip (tightening the pressure adjusting nut)
Use the bolt if the nip is not as indicated in Table 11-205.
Feeding
direction
A3/11"×17"
,
c
b
Center of
copy paper
a
Figure 11-251
Note:
a and c represent points 10 mm from each edge of paper.
Dimension
b
|a-c|
Measurement
Tracing paper
(SM-1); 64/80g
paper
5.5 ±0.5mm
0.5mm or less
Table 11-205
•
Measuring the Nip
Make 20 A4/LTR copies 15 min after the end of the copier’s warm-up period before
measuring the nip.
If the copier is equipped with a sorter, remove the sorter before making adjustments.
Note:
You must make sure that the fixing assembly is sufficiently heated before taking
measurements; otherwise, the toner from the areas of the copy where fixing has not
occurred will soil the fixing roller, ultimately requiring cleaning.
1) Place A3/11”×17” copy paper on the multifeeder.
2) Open the copyboard cover.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-41
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3) Start [4], and select No. 403 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘403’.
4) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates ‘NIP’.
• Paper will be picked up from the multifeeder and delivered, enabling
measurements as in Figure 11-251.
Reference:
Delivery stops after discharging the paper halfway; it will automatically resume
about 10 sec to fully discharge the paper.
5) Measure the nip.
3
Position of the Fixing Assembly Paper Guide
The paper guide is positioned by the paper guide mount, and you need not adjust its
position when installing the paper guide.
Note:
Do not loosen the screw on the paper guide plate; otherwise, you will have to adjust
the position of the paper guide. If you should have loosened it for some reason, be
sure to put the fixing assembly base back to its original position.
4
Position of the Cleaning Belt Solenoid
Install the cleaning belt solenoid so that the solenoid arm w butts against a when
the plunger q of the solenoid is pushed by a finger.
q
w
a
Figure 11-252
11-42
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
F. Electrical System
1
Registering the Cassette/Multifeeder Paper Width Basic Setting [4]
Perform the steps for the following:
• If you have replaced the paper width detection VR (including the multifeeder) of
the copier.
• If you have adjusted the cassette front/rear registration.
For each of the cassettes 1 and 2, paper width basic setting registration must be
executed under both ‘STMTR’ and ‘A4R’; for the multifeeder, registration must be
executed under ‘A6R’, ‘A4R’, and ‘A4’.
a. Cassette 1
1) Start [4] in service mode, and select No. 413 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘413’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates ‘S-r’.
3) Slide out the cassette 1, and set the paper width guide plate inside the cassette to
‘STMTR’.
4) Set the cassette to the copier.
5) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates ‘A4r’.
6) Slide out the cassette 1, and set the paper width guide plate inside the cassette to
‘A4R’.
7) Set the cassette to the copier.
8) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates ‘S-r’.
9) Press the Clear key.
• The indicator indicates ‘413’.
You may make the same adjustment for cassette 2. (No. 414 in service mode [4])
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-43
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
b. Multifeeder
1) Start [4] in service mode, and select No. 412 using the keypad.
• The indicator indicates ‘412’.
2) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates ‘A6’.
3) Set the manual guide plate of the multifeeder to A6R (105 mm).
Guide
Paper
Guide
m
5m
10
Figure 11-253
4) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates ‘A4r’.
5) Set the manual guide plate to A4R (210 mm).
6) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates ‘A4’.
7) Set the manual guide plate to A4 (297 mm).
8) Press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates ‘A6’.
9) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.
11-44
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
<Reference>
Variable resistor output
A4/A3
A4R
STMTR
STMTR
A4R
(139.7 mm) (210 mm)
A4
(297 mm)
Paper width
Figure 11-254
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-45
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Adjusting the Original Stop Position with the DF in Use [3] No. 325
START
Place the AF Test Sheet
(FY9-9081) on the original tray.
Start the copier’s service
mode [3].
Select ‘325’, and
press the OK key.
Press the OK key so that the
Test Sheet will be stopped on
the copyboard glass.
Open the DF slowly.
Is the
standard
met?
YES
NO
Close the DF slowly, and
press the OK key so that the
Test Sheet will be discharged.
Change the stop position
setting; between -7 and +7.
END
11-46
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
A higer setting will move the original stop position to the left. (unit: 0.33 mm)
Copyboard glass
Copy paper
Standard stop position
= 0 ±1 mm
Figure 11-255
3
Checking the Photointerrupters
The copier photointerrupters may be checked using a convertional meter or its
service mode.
1. Using a Meter
1) Set the meter range to 30VDC.
2) Connect the -probe of the meter to J101-8 (GND) on the DC controller PCB.
(Pedestal controller PCB: J102-8 (GND))
3) Connect the +probe to the terminal indicated on the DC controller PCB (or the
pedestal controller PCB).
4) Make checks as indicated.
2. Using Service Mode
1) Open the front door and insert a door switch activator into the door switch.
2) Press the service mode switch (SSW) with a hex key.
3) Press the 2 key on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘[2]’.
4) Press the OK key.
• The copier activates I/O display mode, and indicates ‘201’.
5) Enter a number with the keypad, and press the OK key.
• The copier checks each photointerrupter; see the indicator on the control panel.
(For details, see “VII.SERVICE MODE”.)
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-47
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Copier
+ probe
Name
PS1
Service
mode
J113-2B
Scanner home
position sensor
(SCHP)
No.212
1-b
PS2
J116-8A
Cassette 1 paper
sensor (C1PD)
No.203
1-c
PS3
J116-5A
Cassette 1 lifter
sensor (C1LTP)
No.203
1-e
PS4
J115-2B
Cassette 2 paper
sensor (C2PD)
No.203
1-d
PS5
J115-5B
Cassette 2 lifter
sensor (C2LTP)
No.203
1-f
PS6
J104-6B
Multifeeder
paper sensor
(MFPD)
No.203
1-b
PS7
J116-2A
Vertical path
roller 1 paper
sensor (PDP2*)
No.206
1-a
PS8
J115-7A
Vertical path
roller 2 paper
sensor (PDP1*)
No.206
1-b
11-48
Checks
Display
indication
Voltage
reading
on meter
Move the
scanner by
hand while in
standby.
When the
scanner is at
home position.
0
5V
When the
scanner is not at
home position.
1
0V
Move the paper
detecting roll by
hand while in
standby
When the roll is
up.
1
5V
When the roll is
down.
0
0V
Move the pickup roller up and
down by a
finger while in
standby.
When the roller
is up.
1
5V
When the roller
is down.
0
0V
Move the paper
detecting roll by
hand while in
standby.
When the roll is
up.
1
5V
When the roll is
down.
0
0V
Move the pickup roller up and
down by a
finger while in
standby.
When the roller
is up.
1
5V
When the roller
is down.
0
0V
Place paper in
the multifeeder
tray while in
standby.
When paper is
not placed.
1
5V
When paper is
placed.
0
0V
Move the
sensor flag of
PS7 by a finger
while in
standby.
When the flag is
moved.
1
5V
Wen the flag is
not moved.
0
0V
Move the
sensor flag of
PS8 by a finger
while in
standby.
When the flag is
moved.
1
5V
When the flag is
not moved.
0
0V
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
+ probe
Name
PS9
Service
mode
J117-13B
Pre-registration
paper sensor
(PDP3)
No.206
1-c
PS10
J109-5A
Separation
sensor (PDP4*)
No.206
1-d
PS11
Delivery sensor
(PDP5*)
J109-4B
No.206
1-e
PS12
J109-7B
Lower feeder
inlet paper
sensor (PDP6*)
No.209
1-b
PS13
J108-2
Lower feeder
outlet paper
sensor (PDP7)
No.209
1-a
PS14
J117-8B
Horizontal
registration paper
sensor (PDP8)
No.209
1-c
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Checks
Display
indication
Voltage
reading
on meter
Place a stack
of two to three
sheets of paper
in the registration front guide
assembly.
When paper is
inserted.
1
5V
When paper is
not inserted.
0
0V
Release the
feeding assembly, and move
the sensor flag
of PS10 by a
finger.
When the flag
is moved.
0
0V
When the flag
is not moved.
1
5V
Open the delivery assembly,
and feed paper
through the
deliveryassembly.
When paper is
not fed.
1
5V
When paper is
fed.
0
0V
Open the delivery assembly,
and feed paper
through the
lower feeding
assembly inlet.
When paper is
not fed.
1
5V
When paper is
fed.
0
0V
Move the
sensor flag of
PS13 while in
standby.
When the flag
is moved.
0
0V
When the flag
is not moved.
1
5V
Put paper into
the re-pick up
feeding
assembly while
in standby.
When paper is
put.
1
5V
When paper is
not put.
0
0V
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-49
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
+ probe
Name
Service
mode
PS15
J117-5B
Horizontal
registration roller
home position
sensor (HRHP)
No.209
1-d
PS16
J117-2B
Horizontal
registration paper
edge sensor
(HRPD)
No.209
1-e
PS17
J102-9A
Copyboard cover
open/closed
sensor (CBCC)
No.225
1-f
PS18
J116-11A
Right door
sensor (RDC*)
No.203
1-a
PS19
J107-10
Lens home
position sensor
(LHP)
No.225
2-a
J114-12A
PS20
Blank shutter
home position
sensor (BLHP)
11-50
Checks
No.222
1-b
Display
indication
Voltage
reading
on meter
Remove the
horizontal
registration unit
assembly, and
install J50, J53,
and J85. Put
paper over
PS15.
When paper is
present.
1
5V
When paper is
not present.
0
0V
Make an
A4/LTR twosided copy.
Put copy paper
into the re-pick
up feeding
assembly while
in standby.
(Slide it toward
the front.)
When paper is
present.
1
5V
When paper is
not present.
0
0V
Open and close
the copyboard
cover while in
standby.
When the copyboard cover is
opened.
0
0V
When the
copyboard
cover is closed.
1
5V
Open and close
the right door
while in
standby.
When the right
door is opened.
1
5V
When the right
door is closed.
0
0V
Put paper over
PS19 while in
standby.
When paper is
present.
0
5V
When paper is
not present.
1
0V
Remove the
blank exposure
assembly, and
remove the
blank upper
plate. Install J24
and J91. Move
the sensor flag
while in
standby.
When the flag is
moved.
(The flag is at
PS20.)
0
5V
When the flag is
not moved.
(The flag is not
at PS20.)
1
0V
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
+ probe
Name
PS101
Service
mode
J104-2A
Cassette 1 paper
length sensor 1
(C1SZ1)
No.219
1-a
PS102
J104-1A
Cassette 1 paper
length sensor 2
(C1SZ2)
No.219
1-b
PS103
J104-6A
Cassette 2 paper
length sensor 1
(C2SZ1)
No.219
1-c
PS104
J104-5A
Cassette 2 paper
length sensor 2
(C2SZ2)
No.219
1-d
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Checks
Display
indication
Voltage
reading
on meter
Set the
cassette 1 to
A4/LTR, and
set it to the
copier.
When the cassette is present.
0
0V
When the cassette is not
present.
1
5V
Set the
cassette 1 to
A4/LTR, and
set it to the
copier.
When the cassette is present.
0
0V
When the cassette is not
present.
1
5V
Set the
cassette 2 to
A4/LTR, and
set it to the
copier.
When the cassette is present.
0
0V
When the cassette is not
present.
1
5V
Set the
cassette 2 to
A4/LTR, and
set it to the
copier.
When the cassette is present.
0
0V
When the cassette is not
present.
1
5V
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-51
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Paper deck pedestal
+ probe
Name
PS1
Service
mode
J107-6
Right door open
sensor (RDOD*)
No.233
1-e
PS2
J107-9
Vertical path
roller 3 paper
sensor (PS2D)
No.232
1-d
PS3
J110-A2
Deck vertical
path roller paper
sensor (DVRPD)
No.232
1-e
PS4
J110-A5
Deck paper
sensor (DPD)
No.228
1-g
PS5
J110-A11
Deck lifter
position sensor
(DEL)
No.231
1-e
PS6
J110-A8
Deck lifter upper
limit sensor
(DLP)
No.231
1-g
PS7
J110-B6
Deck open
sensor (DEOP*)
No.233
1-c
11-52
Checks
Display
indication
Voltage
reading
on meter
Open the
pedestal right
door while in
standby.
When the right
door is opened.
0
0V
When the right
door is closed.
1
5V
Move the
sensor flag of
PS2 by a finger
while in
standby.
When the flag is
moved.
1
5V
When the flag is
not moved.
0
0V
Move the
sensor flag of
PS3 by a finger
while in
standby.
When the flag is
moved.
1
5V
When the flag is
not moved.
0
0V
Move the paper
detecting roll by
a finger while in
standby.
When the roll is
up.
1
5V
When the roll is
down.
0
0V
Move the pickup roller up and
down by a
finger while in
standby.
When the roller
is up.
1
5V
When the roller
is down.
0
0V
Move the
sensor flag of
PS6 while in
standby.
When the flag is
moved.
1
5V
When the flag is
not moved.
0
0V
Slide out the
deck while in
standby.
When the deck
is out.
0
0V
When the deck
is slid in.
1
5V
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS
A. Making Initial Checks
1. Installation Environment
a. Be sure that the power supply provides the rated voltage (±10%; do not disconnect
the power plug during the night.)
b. Avoid areas which are subject to high/low temperature/humidity (near a water faucet,
water boiler, humidifier) or dust. Avoid areas near sources of fire.
c. Avoid areas subject to ammonium gas.
d. Avoid areas subject to direct rays of the sun; as necessary, provide curtains.
e. Make sure that the site is well ventilated.
f. Make sure that the copier is kept level.
g. Be sure that the copier remains powered throughout the night.
Check the site against the foregoing.
2. Checking the Originals
Find out whether the problem is due to the originals used or the copier.
a. The density correction setting in user mode is best when set to ‘5 ±1’.
b. Originals with a reddish background tend to have poor contrast; for example, red
sheets, slips.
c. Originals which are diazo copies or with transparency tend to produce copies which
can be mistaken for “foggy” copies.
Originals which are prepared in light pencil tend to produce copies which can be
mistaken for “light” copies.
3. Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White Plate
Check the copyboard cover, copyboard glass, and standard white plate for dirt; if dirt
is found, clean them with a solution of mild detergent or alcohol; if scratches are found,
on the other hand, replace them.
4. Charging Assemblies
a. Check each charging assembly for dirt and fault (scratches, for example).
b. Check to make sure that each charging assembly is properly set.
5. Developing Assembly
a. Check to make sure that the rolls of both ends of the developing assembly are in
contact with the drum.
b. Check to make sure that the surface of the developing cylinder is coated with an
even film of toner.
6. Paper
a. Check to make sure that the paper is of a type recommended by Canon.
b. Check to make sute that the paper is not moist. (Try using paper fresh out of
package.)
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-53
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
7. Periodically Replaced Parts
Check the parts against the scheduled servicing chart and the periodically replaced
parts table. Replace the parts as necessary.
8. Others
Bringing a machine from a cold to warm place (from a warehouse to the site of
installation, for example) in winter can cause condensation to occur inside the machine,
leading to various problems; for example,
a. Condensation on the scanning system (glass, mirror, lens) can cause light images.
b. Condensation on the charging system can cause leakage.
c. Condensation on the pick-up/feeding guide can cause feeding faults.
If condensation is noted, dry-wipe the part or keep the machine powered for 60 min.
11-54
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-55
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
B. Image Fault Samples
Not available in electronic format.
11-56
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
C. Troubleshooting Faulty Images
1
The copy is too light. (halftone only)
Cause
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
1
Perform the Image Adjustment
Basic Procedure. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
AE adjustment
2
Make a copy in AE mode. Is the
copy too light?
YES
Execute AE adjustment.
Developing
assembly
3
Are the rolls of the developing
assembly in firm contact with the
drum during copying operation?
NO
Check the developing
assembly locking lever.
Developing
assembly
4
Is the coating of toner on the
developing cylinder even?
NO
Check the developing
assembly.
Scanner
5
Clean the standard white plate,
mirror, lens, and dust-proofing
glass. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the drum unit.
Replace the lamp regulator. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
1. Check the highvoltage cord for
electrical continuity.
2. Check the highvoltage power supply
PCB and the DC
controller PCB.
Photosensitive
drum
Lamp regulator
6
High-voltage
cord, Highvoltage power
supply PCB,
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-57
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
The copy is too light. (solid black also)
3
The copy is too light. (entire copy, considerably)
Cause
Step
YES/NO
Checks
Action
1
Perform the Image Adjustment
Basic Procedure. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
2
Turn off the power switch in the
middle of copying, and open the
front door. At this time, is the toner
image on the surface of the
photosensitive drum before
transfer more or less normal?
NO
Go to step 6.
Transfer
charging
assembly
3
Is the transfer charging assembly
set securely?
NO
Set the charging
assembly securely.
4
Is the charging wire of the transfer
charging assembly hooked
properly, and is its height normal?
NO
Re-string the charging
wire.
Copy paper
5
Try fresh copy paper. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
1. The paper may be
moist; advise the
user on the correct
method of storage.
2. Advise the user that
the use of paper not
recommended by
Canon may not bring
about the best
results.
Lower transfer
guide
6
Set the feeding assembly, and
measure the resistance between
the lower transfer guide and the
base (metal portion) of the transfer charging assembly. Is it 0 Ω?
NO
Check to make sure that
the lower transfer guide
is not in contact with a
metal portion (like the
side plate of the feeding
assembly).
Developing
assembly
7
Is the developing assembly set
securely? (Are the rolls of the
developing assembly in firm contact with the photosensitive
drum?)
NO
Re-set the developing
assembly.
8
Execute idle rotation of the developing assembly in service mode
[4]. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
9
Is toner present inside the
developing assembly?
NO
See “The Add Toner
indicator fails to turn off.”
Toner level
detecting
mechanism
11-58
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Cause
Drum unit
Step
10
High-voltage
cord, highvoltage power
supply PCB,
DC controller
PCB
Checks
Replace the drum unit. Is the
problem corrected?
YES/NO
YES
End.
NO
1. Check the highvoltage cord for
electrical continuity.
2. Check the highvoltage power supply
PCB and the DC
controller PCB
4
The copy has uneven density. (darker at front)
5
The copy has uneven density. (lighter at front)
Cause
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
Action
1
Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, side reflecting plate,
mirror, lens, and dust-proofing
glass. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
2
Perform the Image Adjustment
Basic Procedure. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
Transfer
charging
assembly
3
Is the transfer charging assembly
set securely?
NO
Set the charging
assembly securely.
4
Is the charging wire of the transfer
charging assembly hooked
properly, and is its height normal?
NO
Re-string the charging
wire.
Pre-exposure
lamp
5
Is the pre-exposure lamp on
during copying operation?
NO
See “The pre-exposure
lamp fails to turn on.”
Developing
assembly
6
Is the coating of toner on the
developing cylinder even?
NO
• Check the edge of the
blade of the developing
assembly.
• Dry wipe the surface of
the developing cylinder.
YES
• Clean all charging
wires once again, and
check their position.
• Try replacing the copy
paper.
Scanner
Charging wire,
copy paper
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-59
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
6
The copy is foggy. (entire copy)
Cause
Step
YES/NO
Checks
Action
1
Perform the Image Adjustment
Basic Procedure. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
Scanner
2
Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, side reflecting plate,
mirror, lens, and dust-proofing
glass. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Pre-exposure
lamp
3
Is the pre-exposure lamp on
during copying operation?
NO
See “The pre-exposure
lamp fails to turn on.”
Developing rolls
4
Are the developing rolls worn?
YES
Replace the developing
rolls.
Developing
assembly
5
Is the developing cylinder insulated from the copier GND?
Turn off the power, and disconnect
the connector Dp from the highvoltage power supply PCB; then,
check the length between the connector on the developing assembly side and the copier GND for
electrical continuity using a meter.
NO
Check the developing
cylinder and the area
around the developing
connector.
Drum unit
6
Replace the drum unit. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
Lamp
regulator
7
Replace the lamp regulator. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
High-voltage
cord, highvoltage power
supply PCB,
DC controller
PCB, scanning
lamp
11-60
NO
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
1. Check the highvoltage cord for
electrical continuity.
2. Check the highvoltage power supply
PCB and the DC
controller PCB.
3. Replace the scanning
lamp.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
7
The copy has vertical fogging.
8
The copy has black lines. (vertical, blurred, thick)
Cause
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
1
Perform the Image Adjustment
Basic Procedure. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
Scanner
2
Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, side reflecting plate,
lens, mirror, and dust-proofing
glass. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Pre-exposure
lamp
3
Clean the pre-exposure lamp. Is
the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Developing
assembly
4
Is the coating of toner on the
developing cylinder even?
NO
• Check the edge of the
blade of the
developing assembly.
• Dry wipe the surface
of the developing
cylinder.
YES
Check the fixing
assembly and the drum
cleaner assembly.
Fixing assembly, drum cleaner assembly
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-61
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
The copy has black lines. (vertical, thin)
Action
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Press the Copy Start key, and turn
off the power switch while the
copy paper is in the feeding
assembly. Does the copy image
before the paper goes through the
fixing assembly have black lines?
YES
Go to step 4.
Lower transfer
guide
2
Is the lower transfer guide soiled?
YES
Clean it.
Photosensitive
drum
3
Are there scratches or black lines
in the peripheral direction of the
surface of the photosensitive
drum?
Remove the black lines off the
surface of the photosensitive drum
with a dry flannel cloth coated with
toner. Is the problem corrected?
YES
If scratches are found on
the drum, replace the
drum unit.
If scratches or black
lines are found, be sure
to find out the cause.
NO
Check the developing
system and the
exposure system.
Are there scratches or black line
in the peripheral direction of the
surface of the upper fixing roller?
YES
1. Replace the upper
roller.
2. Check to find out if
the cleaning belt is
taken up properly.
3. Check and clean the
separation claws.
NO
Check the fixing
assembly inlet for dirt.
Cause
Developing
assembly,
exposure
system
Fixing assembly
11-62
4
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
10
The copy has white spots. (vertical)
11
The copy has white lines. (vertical)
YES/NO
Action
Make a copy while keeping the
copyboard cover open. Turn off
the power switch while the copy
paper is moving through the
feeding assembly. At this time,
does the copy image before the
paper goes throughout the fixing
assembly have white spots or
white lines?
YES
1. Clean the inlet guide
of the fixing
assembly.
2. Check to find out if
the cleaning belt is
taken up properly.
3. Check and clean the
separation claws.
2
Clean the charging wire, grid, and
shielding plate of the primary
charging assembly. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
Dry wipe the part with
lint-free paper; then,
clean it with alcohol. If
the dirt cannot be
removed, replace the
charging wire.
Developing
assembly
3
Is the coating of toner on the
developing cylinder even?
NO
Check the edge of the
blade of the developing
assembly for paper lint
and dust. If there is not
toner inside the
developing assembly,
see “The Add Toner
indicator fails to turn off.”
Copy paper
4
Try fresh copy paper. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
The copy paper may be
moist; advise the user
on the correct method of
storage.
Photosensitive
drum
5
Are there scratches in the
peripheral direction of the surface
of the photosensitive drum?
YES
Replace the drum unit.
(Be sure to find out the
cause of the scratches.)
Transfer charging assembly
6
Clean the transfer charging wire.
Is the problem corrected?
YES
Dry wipe with lint-free
paper; then, clean it with
alcohol. If the dirt cannot
be removed, replace the
charging wire.
Static eliminator
7
Clean the static eliminator. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
Cause
Step
Fixing assembly
1
Primary
charging
assembly
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Checks
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-63
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Blank exposure
assembly
8
Does the blank shutter solenoid
operate where white spots or
white lines occur in the copy
image while the scanner is moving
forward?
NO
Check the blank
exposure assembly.
Outside light
9
Is the photosensitive drum
exposed to light from outside?
YES
Find out the cause of the
infiltration of light.
YES/NO
Action
12
Action
The copy has white spots. (horizontal)
Cause
Step
Checks
1
Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 3.3 cm? (scratches on
the developing cylinder)
YES
1. Clean the developing
rolls.
2. Clean the surface of
the developing
cylinder.
3. If scratches are
found on the surface
of the developing
cylinder, replace the
developing cylinder.
2
Execute “408” in service mode [4].
Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Photosensitive
drum
3
Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 9.4 cm? (scratches on
the photosensitive drum)
YES
1. Clean the drum.
2. If scratches are
found on the drum,
replace the drum
unit. (Be sure to find
out the cause of the
scratches.)
Copy paper
4
Try fresh copy paper.
Is the problem corrected?
YES
The copy paper may be
moist; advise the user
on the correct method of
storage.
Scanner rail,
scanner cable
5
Is the problem noted at the same
location on all copies?
YES
1. Check the scanner
rail for foreign matter.
2. Adjust the tension of
the scanner cable.
Clean each charging
wire. If the dirt cannot be
removed, replace the
charging wire.
Developing
assembly
Charging wire
11-64
NO
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
The back of the copy is soiled.
Cause
Developing
assembly
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Turn off the power switch while
the copy paper is moving through
the feeding assembly. At this time,
is the back of the copy paper
soiled?
YES
Go to step 4.
2
Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 3.3 cm horizontally?
YES
1. Clean the registration
roller and the lower
transfer guide plate.
2. Check the
developing assembly
for leakage of toner.
3
Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 1.6 cm horizontally?
YES
1. Clean the manual
feed feeding roller.
2. Check the
developing assembly
for leakage of toner.
NO
1. Clean the feeding
assembly.
2. Check the cleaning
assembly for leakage
of toner.
YES
1. Check to see if the
cleaning belt is taken
up properly.
2. Clean the fixing roller
(upper, lower).
3. Check the cleaning
belt for soiling with
toner. If the dirt is
excessive, replace
the roller.
4. Clean the fixing
assembly inlet guide.
NO
Clean the delivery roller,
separation claws, and
fixing assembly paper
guide plate.
Drum cleaner
assembly
Fixing assembly
4
Delivery
assembly
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Is the fixing roller (upper, lower)
soiled with toner?
Action
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-65
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
14
The copy has faulty fixing.
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
Fixing roller
(upper, lower)
1
Is the problem noted vertically?
YES
Check to find out if there
are scratches on the fixing roller (upper, lower).
Fixing heater
(H1, H2)
2
Does the fixing heater (H1, H2)
turn on immediately after poweron?
NO
See “The fixing heater
fails to operate.”
Lower fixing
roller pressure
3
Is the nip of the fixing assembly
within standard?
NO
Adjust the lower fixing
roller pressure.
YES
Try recommended
paper; if the results are
good, advise the user to
use recommended
paper.
Copy paper
11-66
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
16
17
The copy has a displaced leading edge.
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
Original
1
Is the original placed properly?
NO
Place it properly.
Copy paper
2
Is the copy paper of a type
recommended by Canon?
NO
Try recommended
paper; if the results are
good, advise the user to
use recommended
paper.
Pick-up roller,
feeding roller,
separation roller
3
Has the pick-up roller, feeding
roller, or separation roller of the
cassette holder suffering from a
displaced leading edge reached
its average life?
YES
Check each of the
rollers; then, replace any
worn roller.
NO
1. Check the placement
of copy paper inside
the cassette.
2. Check the area
around the paper
guide for foreign
mater.
4
Is the registration roller rotating
normally?
NO
See “The registration
roller fails to rotate.”
5
Execute leading edge margin
adjustment. Is the problem
corrected? (See p.11-7)
YES
End.
6
Is the problem noted only on the
second side of a two-sided copy?
YES
See “Lower feeding
assembly.”
NO
• Make checks and
clean. (Check each
registration roller and
the pick-up/feeding
guide for wear.)
Cassette, paper
guide plate
Leading edge
margin
Registration
roller, feeding
guide
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-67
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
18
The copy has a blurred image.
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
Scanner drive
cable
1
Is the cable overlapping on the
cable pulley while the scanner is
moving? Is the cable too slack or
taut?
YES
1. Re-route the cable.
2. If the cable is twisted
or frayed, replace it.
Scanner rail
2
Is the scanner rail soiled?
Is there foreign matter on the
scanner rail?
YES
Clean the surface of the
scanner rail.
Scanner drive
assembly
3
Is any of the teeth of the gear in
the scanner drive assembly
chipped?
YES
Replace the gear.
Photosensitive
drum
4
Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 9.4 cm?
YES
1. Check the drum drive
gear.
2. Check the edge of
the drum (in contact
with the developing
roll) for scratches
and protrusions).
Developing
gear
5
Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 3.3 cm?
YES
Check the developing
assembly.
NO
Check the drum drive
assembly.
Drum gear
assembly
11-68
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
19
The copy has horizontal fogging.
Cause
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
1
Is the problem noted at the same
location on all copies made in
Direct?
YES
Go to step 5.
Scanning lamp,
lamp regulator
2
Does the scanning lamp flicker
while the scanner is moving
forward?
YES
Check the scanning
lamp and the lamp
regulator.
Developing rolls
3
Are the developing rolls soiled
with toner or are the rolls
deformed? Or, is the area where
the developing rolls come into
contact (surface of the photosensitive drum) soiled with toner?
YES
Clean, or replace the
developing rolls as
necessary.
Developing bias
4
Is the developing bias applied
normally?
NO
1. Re-set the developing assembly, and
check the wiring.
2. Replace the highvoltage power supply
PCB.
Scanning
system
5
Make a reduced copy and,
compare it against a copy made in
Direct. Is the problem noted at
different locations?
YES
Check the scanning
system
NO
Check the feeding
system.
Feeding system
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-69
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
20
The copy has poor sharpness.
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
1. Check the copyboard
cover for warping.
2. Advise the user on
how to place an
original.
• Clean the copyboard
glass.
• Install the copyboard
glass.
Check the lens drive
assembly.
Original
1
Is the original off the copyboard
glass?
YES
Copyboard
glass
2
Is the copyboard glass soiled with
oil?
Is the copyboard glass installed
properly?
YES
Lens drive
assembly
3
Turn off and then on the power
switch. Does the lens move
smoothly?
NO
Mirror
4
Is the horizontal reproduction ratio
in Direct within specification?
NO
Re-route the scanner
drive cable.
YES
Clean the scanning
lamp, reflecting plate,
mirror, lens, and dustproofing glass.
Scanner
Transfer
charging
assembly
5
Is the transfer charging assembly
set securely?
NO
Set the charging
assembly securely.
6
Is the charging wire of the transfer
charging assembly hooked
properly, and is its height normal?
NO
Re-string the charging
wire.
Developing
assembly
7
Is the developing assembly set
securely? (Check to make sure
that the rolls of the developing
assembly are in firm contact with
the photosensitive drum.)
NO
Re-set the developing
assembly.
Developing bias
8
Is the developing bias generated
normally?
NO
1. Replace the highvoltage power supply
PCB.
2. Replace the DC
controller PCB.
11-70
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
21
The copy is blank.
Cause
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
Drum unit
1
Is the drum unit set?
NO
Set the drum unit.
Drum drive
assembly
2
Is the photosensitive drum rotating
during copying operation?
NO
1. Check to see if the
photosensitive drum
is rotating smoothly.
2. Check the drum drive
assembly.
Primary charging assembly
3
Is the primary charging assembly
set properly?
NO
Set it properly.
4
Is the charging wire broken?
YES
Re-route the charging
wire.
5
Is the grid installed properly?
YES
Install it properly.
Blank exposure
assembly
6
Does the blank shutter solenoid
operate during copying operation?
NO
Check the blank
exposure assembly.
(Replace the solenoid.)
Developing
assembly
7
Is the developing assembly set?
NO
Set the developing
assembly.
8
Is there toner over the toner sensor of the developing assembly?
NO
See “The Add Toner
indicator fails to turn off.”
Developing
assembly drive
assembly
9
Is the developing cylinder rotating
during copying?
NO
Check the developing
assembly drive
assembly.
Transfer charging assembly
10
Is the transfer charging assembly
set securely?
NO
Set the charging
assembly securely.
11
Is the charging wire broken?
YES
Replace the charging
wire.
12
Is there electrical continuity
between connectors of the highvoltage cord connected to the
developing assembly and each
charging assembly?
NO
Replace the high-voltage
cord.
YES
Replace the high-voltage
power supply PCB.
High-voltage
cord
High-voltage
power supply
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-71
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
22
The copy is solid black.
Cause
High-voltage
power supply
PCB
11-72
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
1
Is the scanning lamp on during
copying operation?
NO
See “The scanning lamp
fails to turn on.”
2
Is the pre-exposure lamp on
during copying?
NO
See “The pre-exposure
lamp fails to turn on.”
3
Replace the high-voltage power
supply PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the drum unit.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions
1
E000
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Reset ‘E000’ using No.401 in
service mode [4].
Open the front door and the
delivery assembly to cool the
fixing roller. Does the fixing heater
turn on when the power switch is
turned on once again? (Check by
the eye. Be sure to turn off the
power switch immediately after the
check.)
NO
See “The fixing heater
fails to operate.”
Thermistor
(TH1; connector
or open circuit)
2
Open the front door and the
delivery assembly to cool the
fixing roller. Close the front door
and the delivery assembly, and
check No.106 in service mode [1].
Has the value changed? (Be sure
to turn off the power switch after
the check.)
YES
Check the wiring from
J109 on the DC controller PCB through the
relay connector (J34) to
the thermistor; if normal,
replace the thermistor.
Thermistor
3
Is the thermistor in even contact
with the upper fixing roller?
NO
Re-install it.
Thermistor
4
Clean the contact face of the thermistor. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Operating
environment
5
Does the problem occur only
when the power is turned on for
the first time for the day?
YES
• Advise the user that
the operating environment is outside
the specifications.
• Advise the user not
to turn on the power
before the room is
warm enough.
Thermistor
6
Replace the thermistor. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Cause
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Action
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-73
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
E001
Cause
Thermistor
(TH1; short
circuit)
DC controller
PCB
11-74
Action
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Reset ‘E001’ using No.401 in
service mode [4].
Open the front door and the
delivery assembly to cool the
fixing roller. Is ‘E001’ indicated
immediately after the power switch
is turned on once again?
NO
See “E004.”
2
Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect J109 from the DC
controlled PCB. Set the meter to
the x1KΩ range, and connect its
probes to J109-9 and J109-10 on
the harness side. Is it about 0Ω?
(Be sure to connect J109 after the
check.)
YES
Check the wiring from
J109 on the DC controller PCB through the
relay connector (J34) to
the thermistor; if normal,
replace the thermistor.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3
E002, E003
Action
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Reset ‘E002’, ‘E003’ using No.401
in service mode [4].
Does any of the following apply
when the power switch is turned
on once again?
• The fixing heater fails to operate.
• E000
YES
See the corresponding
section.
Thermistor
(TH1; connector
or open circuit)
2
Is the wiring from J109 on the DC
controller PCB through the relay
connector (J34) to the thermistor
normal?
NO
Re-install the thermistor.
Thermistor
3
Is the thermistor in even contact
with the upper fixing roller?
NO
Re-install it.
Thermistor
4
Clean the contact face of the thermistor. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Operating
environment
5
Does the problem occur only
when the power is turned on for
the first time as in the morning?
YES
• Advise the user that
the operating
environment is outside
the specifications.
• Advise the user not to
turn on the power
before the room is
warm enough.
Thermistor
6
Replace the thermistor. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Cause
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-75
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4
E004
Cause
Step
YES/NO
Checks
Action
Fixing heater
1
Does the fixing heater turn on
immediately after power-on?
NO
See “The fixing heater
fails to operate.”
SSR
2
Replace the SSR. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
5
E005
Cause
Cleaning belt
Step
Action
1
Is the cleaning belt of the fixing
assembly taken up?
YES
Replace the cleaning
belt.
2
Set No.619 in service mode [6] to
‘0’. Is the problem corrected?
YES
Replace the cleaning
belt, and set the count to
‘0’ once again.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
11-76
YES/NO
Checks
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
6
E010
Cause
Main motor unit
(M1; integrated
unit of main
motor and main
motor driver
PCB)
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
1
Does the main motor (M1) rotate
until ‘E010’ turns on?
NO
Go to step 3.
2
Set the meter to the 12VDC
range. Does the voltage between
J107-3 (+) and J107-2 (-) on the
DC controller PCB change from 0
to 5 V between when the Copy
Start key is pressed and when
‘E010’ is indicated?
YES
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the main motor; if
normal, replace the main
motor unit.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
Drive belt
3
Is the drive belt attached
properly?
NO
Re-attach it.
DC power
supply PCB
4
Set the meter to the 100VDC
range, and connect its probes to
J633-1 (+) and J633-5 (-) on the
DC power supply PCB. Is the
voltage between the terminals
about 24 V?
NO
Check the wiring J633
on the DC power supply
PCB to the main motor
unit; if normal, replace
the DC power supply
PCB.
Main motor unit
5
Replace the main motor unit. Is
the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
7
E030
Cause
Step
1
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Checks
Does the total counter operate
normally?
YES/NO
Action
NO
See “The total counter
fails to operate.”
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-77
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
8
E031
Cause
Step
1
Checks
Does the option counter operate
normally?
DC controller
PCB
9
YES/NO
Action
NO
See “The option counter
fails to operate.”
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
E051
Cause
YES/NO
Checks
Step
Action
1
Does the horizontal registration
motor (M5) rotate until ‘E051’
turns on?
NO
Go to step 3.
Horizontal registration roller
home position
sensor (PS15)
2
Is the horizontal registration roller
home position sensor normal?
(See the instructions on how to
check photointerrupters.)
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller to the
sensor; if normal,
replace the sensor.
Horizontal
registration
motor (M5)
3
Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the relay connector J85.
Set the meter to the ×1kΩ range,
and measure the registance
between the terminals of the
motor shown below. Is it normal?
NO
Replace the horizontal
registration motor.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Registance (Ω)
J85-2
J85-3
J85-1
J85-1
J85-4
J85-4
Motor driver 1
PCB
4
J85-5
J85-6
J85-2
J85-5
J85-3
J85-6
Replace the motor driver 1 PCB.
Is the problem corrected?
DC controller
PCB
11-78
80
80
40
40
40
40
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
10
E053
Cause
YES/NO
Checks
Step
Action
1
Does the horizontal registration
motor (M5) rotate until ‘E053’
turns on?
NO
Go to step 4.
Horizontal
registration
solenoid (SL7)
2
Press the Copy Start key in the
duplex mode. Does the horizontal
registration solenoid turn on?
NO
Check the wiring; if
nomal, replace the
clutch.
Horizontal
registration
paper edge
sensor (PS16)
3
Is the horizontal registration paper
edge sensor nomal? (See the
instructions on how to check
photointerrupters.)
NO
Check the wiring; if normal, replace the sensor.
Horizontal
registration
motor (M5)
4
Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the relay connector J85.
Set the meter to the ×1kΩ range,
and measure the registance
between the terminals of the
motor shown below. Is it nomal?
Replace the horizontal
registration motor.
Registance (Ω)
J85-2
J85-3
J85-1
J85-1
J85-4
J85-4
Motor driver 1
PCB
5
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
J85-5
J85-6
J85-2
J85-5
J85-3
J85-6
80
80
40
40
40
40
Replace the motor driver 1 PCB.
Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-79
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11
E060
Action
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Open the front door and the
delivery assembly to cool the
fixing roller. Does the wire cleaner
operate when the power switch is
turned on once again.
YES
Go to step 4.
Cleaner motor
(M11)
2
Set the meter to the 30VDC
range, and connect its probes to
J114-A1 (+) and J114-A2 (-) on
the DC controller PCB. Is the
voltage between the terminals
about 12 V when the power switch
is turned on?
NO
Replace the cleaner
motor.
Motor driver 2
PCB
3
Replac the motor driver 2 PCB. Is
the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
NO
Replace the faulty
switch.
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Cause
DC controller
PCB
Wire cleaner
home position
sensor (MSW1)
Wire cleaner
rear position
sensor (MSW2)
4
Remove the transfer charging
assembly rail from the copier.
Connect the probes of the meter
to both terminals of each switch,
and press the switch; is there
electrical continuity?
DC controller
PCB
11-80
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
12
E202
Cause
Scanner home
position sensor
(PS1)
Step
Checks
Action
1
Is the scanner at home position
when ‘E202’ is indicated?
NO
See “The scanner fails
to move forward/in
reverse.”
2
Is the scanner home position
sensor normal? (See the
instructions on how to check
photointerrupers.)
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the sensor; if normal,
replace the sensor.
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
13
YES/NO
E203
Cause
Scanner home
position sensor
(PS1)
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Does the scanner move forward
from when the Copy Start key is
pressed to when ‘E202’ is indicated?
NO
See “The scanner fails
to move forward/in
reverse.”
2
Is the scanner home position
sensor normal? (See the
instructions on how to check
photointerrupers.)
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the sensor; if normal,
replace the sensor.
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Action
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-81
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
14
E204
Cause
Scanner home
position sensor
(PS1)
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Does the scanner move forward
from when the Copy Start key is
pressed to when ‘E204’ is indicated?
NO
See “The scanner fails
to move forward/in
reverse.”
2
Is the scanner home position
sensor normal? (See the
instructions on how to check
photointerrupers.)
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the sensor; if normal,
replace the sensor.
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
15
Action
E210
Cause
Step
YES/NO
Checks
Action
1
Turn on the power switch. Does
the lens move?
NO
See “The lens fails to
move.”
Lens home
position sensor
(PS19)
2
Is the lens home position sensor
normal? (See the instructions on
how to check photointerrupers.)
NO
Check the wiring from
J107 on the DC
controller PCB to J203
on the motor driver 1
PCB and from the motor
driver 1 PCB to the
sensor; if normal,
replace the sensor.
Motor driver 1
PCB
3
Replace the motor driver 1 PCB.
Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
16
E220
Cause
Lamp regulator
DC controller
PCB
11-82
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
1
Does the scanning lamp turn on?
NO
See “The scanning lamp
fails to turn on.”
2
Replace the lamp regulator. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
17
E224
Cause
Blank shutter
home position
sensor (PS20)
Step
Checks
Turn on the power switch. Does
the blank shutter (slide shutter)
move?
NO
See “The blank shutter
fails to move.”
2
Is the blank shutter home position
sensor normal? (See the
instructions on how to check
photointerrupers.)
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the sensor; if normal,
replace the sensor.
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
E240
Cause
Malfunction
Action
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Turn off and on the power switch.
Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Turn off and on the power switch.
Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
19
Action
1
DC controller
PCB
18
YES/NO
E710, E711
Cause
Malfunction
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Action
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-83
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
20
E712
Cause
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
Malfunction
1
Turn off and then on the power
switch. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Connector
2
Is the lattice connector of the DF
connected securely to the
connector J732 of the copier?
NO
Re-connect it.
DF controller
PCB
3
Replace the DC controller PCB. Is
the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
21
E716
Cause
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
Malfunction
1
Turn off and then on the power
switch. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Connector
2
Is the lattice connector of the
cassette paper feeding unit
connected securely to the
connector J44 of the copier?
NO
Re-connect it.
Pedestal
controller PCB
3
Replace the pedestal controller
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
11-84
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
22
E800
Cause
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
Malfunction
1
Turn off and then on the power
switch. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
J56
2
Is the relay connector J56 directly
under the power switch connected
securely?
NO
Re-connect it.
Power switch
(SW1)
3
Disconnect the relay connector
J56. Set the meter to the x1KΩ
range, and measure the
resistance between J56-1 and
J56-2 on the connector side of the
power switch. Is it about 400 Ω?
NO
Replace the power
switch.
YES
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the power switch for
electrical continuity; if
normal, replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-85
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
23
AC power is absent.
Cause
Action
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Error code
1
Does an error code turn on when
the power switch is turned on, and
does the power switch turn off in
20 sec?
YES
See the descriptions for
the corresponding error
code.
Power plug
2
Is the power plug connected
securely?
NO
Connect the power plug.
Covers
3
Are the front door and the delivery
cover closed securely?
NO
Close the door or the
cover.
Main power
supply
4
Is the rated voltage present at the
power outlet?
NO
Advise the user that the
problem is not of the
copier.
Circuit breaker
(CB1)
5
Measure the voltage between both
terminals of the circuit breaker. Is
it 0Ω?
YES
Press the button on the
circuit breaker, and
check for electrical continuity; if not 0 Ω, replace
the circuit breaker.
6
Is the rated voltage present
between J2-1 and J2-2? (J2 is
located near the power supply
cord mount.)
NO
Go to step 8.
Power cord,
Noise filter
(NF1)
7
Replace the power cord or the line
filter. Is AC power present?
YES
End.
Door switch
(DSW1)
8
Remove the door switch, and
connect the probes of the meter to
the door switch fastons F3 and F5
or F4 and F6. Is the resistance
about 0 Ω when the actuator is
pressed and ∞ Ω when released?
NO
Replace the door switch.
Power switch
(SW1)
9
Connect the probes of the meter
to both terminals (fastons) of the
power switch (SW1). Is it about 0
Ω when the switch is turned ON
and about ∞Ω when OFF?
NO
Replace the power
switch.
YES
Check the wiring of the
AC power line and connectors for poor contact.
Wiring
11-86
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
24
DC power is absent.
Cause
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
AC power
supply
1
Is AC power present between
J631-1 and J631-4 and J631-2
and J631-5 on the DC power
supply PCB?
NO
See “AC power is
absent.”
Fuse
2
Has the fuse on the DC power
supply PCB blown?
YES
Remove the cause, and
replace the DC power
supply PCB.
3
Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect the power plug.
Connect the power plug in about 1
min, and turn on the switch. Is DC
power present?
YES
End.
4
Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect J632, J633, J634, and
J635 from the DC power supply
PCB.
Turn on the power switch, and
measure the voltage between the
terminals shown in Table 11-401.
Is it normal?
NO
Replace the DC power
supply PCB.
YES
Turn off the power
switch, and connect one
of the connectors; then,
turn on the power
switch.
Repeat this for all
connectors to find the
connector that turns on
the protection circuit.
Then, check the wiring
from that connector to
the DC load.
DC power suply
PCB
Wiring, DC load
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-87
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Jack No.
Pin No.
Output
J632
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24VB
24VA
12V
5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
To J101 on DC controller PCB.
J633
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
24VB
12V
5V
N.C.
GND
GND
GND
To J952 on motor driver 2 PCB.
1
2
3
4
5
6
24VB
24VB
5V
GND
GND
GND
To J201 on motor driver 1 PCB.
1
2
3
24VB
FM5LOCK
GND
J634
J635
Remarks
To J501 on main motor.
To DF.
To pedestal.
To sorter.
To power supply PCB cooling fan.
(Signal line)
Table 11-401
11-88
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
25
The blank shutter fails to move.
Cause
Checks
Step
YES/NO
Action
Blank shutter
cable
1
Is the blank shutter cable routed
properly?
NO
Re-route the blank
shutter cable.
Blank shutter
motor (M8)
2
Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the relay connector J26.
NO
Replace the blank
shutter motor.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Set the meter to the x1KΩ range,
and measure the resistance
between the terminals of the
motor shown below. Is it normal?
Resistance (Ω)
J26-4
J26-1
J26-6
J26-6
J26-3
J26-3
Moor driver 1
PCB
3
J26-5
J26-2
J26-5
J26-4
J26-2
J26-1
100
100
50
50
50
50
Replace the motor driver 1 PCB.
Is the problem corrected?
DC controller
PCB
26
The photosensitive drum fails to rotate.
Cause
Step
Checks
Action
YES/NO
1
Is ‘E010’ indicated?
YES
See “E010.”
Drum unit
2
Re-set the drum unit. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
Belt
3
Is the belt for the drive attached
properly?
NO
Re-attach the belt.
YES
Remove the main drive
assembly, and correct or
replace any faulty part
as necessary.
Main drive
assembly
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-89
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
27
Pick-up fails. (cassette)
Cause
Checks
Step
YES/NO
Action
1
Does the Add Paper indicator
remain on?
YES
See “The Add Paper
indicator fails to turn off.”
2
Does the lifter drop when the
cassette is slid out, and does the
lifter motor rotate when the
cassette is slid in?
NO
See “The lifter fails to
move up.”
Belt
3
Is the belt for drive attached
properly?
NO
Re-attach the belt.
Right door
4
Is the right door fully closed?
NO
Close the door.
Locking leaf
spring
5
Is the right door locking the vertical path rollers 1 and 2 in place?
NO
Check the locking
spring.
Vertical path
roller 1 clutch
(CL5), vertical
path roller 2
clutch (CL6)
6
Open the right door, and press the
Copy Start key with a screwdriver
set in the door switch. Do the
vertical path roller 1 (CL5) and 2
(CL6) rotate?
NO
Check the wiring; if
normal, replace the
faulty clutch.
7
Is the leading edge of the copy
paper as far as the registration
roller?
YES
See “The registration
roller fails to rotate.”
Pick-up
assembly
8
Open the right door, and press the
Copy Start key with a screwdriver
set in the door switch. Does the
feeding/separation roller rotate?
YES
Go to step 10.
Pick-up clutch
9
Set the meter to the 100VDC
range, and connect the probes of
the meter to the following
connectors on the DC controller
PCB. Does the voltage change
from about 0 to 24 V when the
Copy Start key is pressed?
YES
Check the wiring; if
normal, replace the
faulty clutch.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Find out which sensor has detected the jam in service mode ([1]
No.109). Is the sensor normal?
NO
Check the wiring and the
lever; if normal, replace
the sensor.
(See the descriptions on service
mode and instructions on how to
check photointerrupers.)
YES
Remove the pick-up
assembly, and check the
springs and gears.
DC controller
PCB
Cassette Clutch
Sensor
Pick-up
assembly
11-90
10
+
-
1
CL2 J116-B6 J116-B5
2
CL3 J115-A3 J115-A2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
28
The lifter fails to move up. (cassette)
Cause
Checks
Step
YES/NO
Action
Cassette size
detecting units
1
Is the cassette size LED on the
control panel on?
NO
Check the cassette size
detecting units.
Gear, lever
2
Remove the cassette, and move
up the lifter by hand. Does it move
smoothly?
NO
Remove the pick-up
assembly, and check the
gear and the lever.
Latch assembly
(cassette)
3
Does the latch assembly of the
grip of the cassette operate
normally?
NO
Re-install it.
Spring, lever
4
Push up the pick-up roller
releasing lever by a finger. Does
the pick-up roller move down?
NO
Remove the pick-up
assembly, and check the
spring and the lever.
Cassette1 lifter
sensor (PS3)
Cassette2 lifter
sensor (PS5)
5
Is the lifter sensor normal?
(See the in structions on how to
check phtointerrupters.)
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the sensor; if normal,
replace the sensor.
Cassette 1 lifter
motor (M9),
cassette 2 lifter
motor (M10)
6
Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect the relay connectors
J58, J59.
Set the meter to the x100Ω range,
and measure the resistance
between the following terminals of
the motor. Is it about 60Ω?
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the motor; if normal,
replace the motor.
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
Motor
M9
M10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
J58-1
J59-1
J58-2
J59-2
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-91
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
29
Pick-up fails. (multifeeder)
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
1
Does the Add Paper indicator
remain on?
YES
See “The Add Paper
indicator fails to turn off.”
Multifeeder
pick-up clutch
(CL4)
2
Select the multifeeder, and press
the Copy Start key. Does the
multifeeder pick-up roller rotate?
YES
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the clutch; if normal,
replace the clutch.
Paper guide
plate cam
3
Does the paper guide plate move
up when the Copy Start key is
pressed?
YES
Check the position of the
paper guide plate cam
and the separation pad;
adjust or replace as
necessary.
Multifeeder
pick-up;
solenoid (SL3)
4
Set the meter to the 100VDC
range, and connect the probes of
the meter to J104-B9 (+) and
J104-B8 (-; MFPUSD*) on the DC
controller PCB. Does the voltage
change from about 0 to 24 V
when the Copy Start key is
pressed?
NO
Check the wiring from
J104 to the solenoid; if
normal, replace the
solenoid.
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
11-92
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
30
The scanner fails to move forward/in reverse.
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Cable
1
Is the cable for the scanner routed
properly?
NO
Re-route the cable.
Foreign matter
2
Is the scanner rail free of dirt, and
does the scanner move smoothly
when pushed by hand?
NO
Check the surface of the
scanner rail for dirt and
foreign matter and anything which comes into
contact with the scanner.
DC power
supply
3
Set the meter to the 100VDC
range, and connect its probes to
J634-1 (+) and J634-5 (-) on the
DC power supply PCB. Is the
reader of the meter about 24 V?
NO
See “DC power is
absent.”
Scanner motor
(M2)
4
Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect J205 from the motor
driver 1 PCB.
Set the meter to the x10Ω range,
and measure the resistance
between the following terminals on
the connector side of the motor. Is
it normal?
NO
Replace the scanner
motor.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Action
Resistance (Ω)
J205-1
J205-3
J205-1
J205-2
J205-3
J205-4
Motor driver 1
PCB
5
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
J205-2
J205-4
J205-5
J205-5
J205-6
J205-6
9.6
9.6
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
Replace the motor drive 1 PCB. Is
the problem corrected?
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-93
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
31
The registration roller fails to rotate.
Cause
YES/NO
Checks
Step
Action
Belt, gear,
coupling
1
Is the drive of the main motor
transmitted to the registration
roller through the belt, gear, and
coupling?
NO
Re-install the belt, gear,
and coupling.
Pre-registration
sensor (PS9),
horizontal registration paper
sensor (PS14)
2
Are the pre-registration sensor
and the horizontal registration
paper sensor normal? (See the
instructions on how to check
photointerrupters.)
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller to the
sensor; if normal,
replace the faulty sensor.
Registration
clutch (CL1),
horizontal
registration
clutch (CL8)
3
Set the meter to the 100VDC
range, and connect its probes to
the following connectors on the
DC controller PCB. Does the
voltage change from 0 to about 24
V as soon as the registration roller
starts to rotate?
YES
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the clutch; then, replace
the clutch.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
11-94
Clutch
+
-
CL1
J103-A2
J103-A1
CL8
J103-A4
J103-A3
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
32
The scanning lamp fails to turn on.
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
1
Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect the power plug. Is the
lamp installed properly?
NO
Re-install the lamp.
Fuse (FU1)
2
Set the meter to the x1KΩ range,
and connect its probes to both
terminals of the fuse. Does the
index of the meter swing?
NO
Replace the fuse.
Caution:
The lamp may have
turned on wrongly, the
fuse may have been
mounted incorrectly, or
the cooling fan may
have failed to operate;
be sure to find out the
cause after replacement.
Lamp
3
Disconnect the connector J4, and
connect the probes of the meter
to both terminals of the lamp. Is
there electrical continuity?
YES
Check the wiring from J4
to the lamp; if normal,
replace the lamp.
AC power
supply
4
Is there AC power between J6011 and J601-2 on the lamp
regulator?
NO
See “AC power is
absent.”
Lamp regulator
5
Replace the lamp regulator. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Action
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-95
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
33
The pre-exposure lamp fails to turn on.
Cause
Pre-exposure
lamp (LA2)
Step
1
Checks
YES/NO
Replace the pre-exposure lamp.
Does it turn on normally?
DC controller
PCB
34
Action
YES
End.
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the pre-exposure lamp;
if normal, replace the
DC controller PCB.
The hopper motor fails to rotate.
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
1
Execute ‘409’ in service mode [4].
Does the hopper motor rotate?
YES
See “The Add Toner
indicator fails to turn off.”
Hopper motor
(M4)
2
Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect J206 from the motor
driver. Set the meter to the x1KΩ
range, and measure the
resistance between J206-7 and
J206-8 on the motor side. Is it
about 63 Ω?
NO
Check the wiring from
J206 to the motor; if
normal, replace the
hopper motor.
Motor driver 1
PCB
3
Replace the motor driver 1 PCB.
Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Cause
DC controller
PCB
11-96
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
35
The lens fails to move.
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
Rail
1
Turn off the power switch, and
move the pulley of the lens motor
by hand. Does the lens move
smoothly?
NO
Check the rail for foreign
matter and dirt.
Drive belt
2
Is the drive belt attached
normally?
NO
Re-attach it.
DC power
supply PCB
3
Is a voltage of about 24 V present
between J201-1 (+) and J201-2 (-)
on the motor driver PCB?
NO
Check the wiring from
J201 to the DC power
supply; if normal, see
“DC power is absent.”
Lens motor
(M3)
4
Replace the lens motor. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
Motor driver 1
PCB
5
Replace the motor driver 1 PCB.
Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the motor driver 1 PCB
and from the motor
driver 1 PCB to the lens
motor; if normal, replace
the DC controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-97
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
36
The fixing heater fails to operate.
Cause
Action
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Turn off the power switch, and open
the delivery assembly.
Remove the connector cover, and
disconnect J3 (3-pin). Set the meter
to the x1KΩ range, and measure the
resistance between J3-1 and J3-3
(main heater) and between J3-1 and
J3-2 (sub heater) on the fixing
assembly side. Does the index of
the meter swing?
YES
Go to step 5.
Thermal switch
(TSW1)
2
Remove the fixing assembly.
Connect the probes of the meter
to both terminals of the thermal
switch. Does the index of the
meter swing?
NO
Replace the thermal
switch.
Caution:
The heater may have
turned on wrongly, the
SSR may be faulty, or
the thermal switch may
have been mounted
wrongly. Be sure to
check after replacement.
The fixing roller or the
separation claws may be
damaged; be sure to
make a check.
Fixing heater
(H1, H2)
3
Connect the probes of the meter
to both terminals of the fixing
heater (main, sub). Does the
index of the meter swing?
NO
Replace the faulty fixing
heater.
YES
Check the AC harness
of the fixing assembly.
AC harness
DC controller
PCB
4
If E000, E001, E002, or E003, clear
it in service mode ([4] No.401).
Set the meter to the 12VDC range,
and measure the voltage between
J112-B8 (+; MHRD) and J112-B5 (-)
and between J112-B7 (+; SHRD)
and J112-B5 (-) on the DC controller
PCB. Is it about 5 V when the power
switch is turned on?
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
SSR
5
Replace the SSR. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Check the DC harness
from the DC controller
PCB to the SSR and the
AC harness to the
heater.
Harness
11-98
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
37
The total copy counter fails to operate.
Cause
Step
Counter (CNT1)
1
DC controller
PCB
2
YES/NO
Action
Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect the connector J61 of
the counter.
Set the meter to the x1KΩ range,
and measure the resistance
between J61-1 and J61-2 on the
counter side. Is it about 480Ω?
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the counter; if normal,
replace the counter.
Connect the connector J61, and
turn on the power switch.
YES
Replace the counter.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Checks
Set the meter to the 30VDC
range, and measure the voltage
between J113-B9 (+) and J113B10 (-; CNTD*). Does the voltage
change from about 0 to about 24
and then to about 0 V when the
Copy Start key is pressed?
38
The option counter fails to operate.
Cause
Step
Counter (CNT2)
1
Option counter
PCB
2
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
YES/NO
Action
Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect the connector J64 of
the counter.
Set the meter to the x1KΩ range,
and measure the resistance
between J64-1 and J64-2 on the
counter side. Is it about 480Ω?
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the counter; if normal,
replace the counter.
Replace the option counter PCB.
Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Checks
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-99
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
39
The Add Paper indicator fails to turn off.
Cause
Cassette
Cassette 1
paper sensor
(PS2)
Cassette 2
paper sensor
(PS4)
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Are the cassettes set properly?
NO
Set the cassettes
properly.
2
Does the lifter move up?
NO
See “The lifter fails to
move up.”
3
Is the paper sensor normal? (See
the instructions on how to check
photointerrupers.)
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the sensor; if normal,
replace the sensor.
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
40
Action
The Jam indicator fails to turn off.
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
Jam
1
Find out which sensor has
detected the jam in service mode
([1] No.109). Is paper found near
the sensor?
YES
Remove the jam.
Sensor
2
Is the sensor identified in step 1
normal? (See the instructions on
how to check photointerrupers.)
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller to the
sensor; if normal,
replace the sensor.
YES
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
11-100
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
41
The Add Toner indicator fails to turn off.
Cause
Toner sensor
(TS1)
Step
Checks
Action
1
Is toner present around the toner
sensor (TS1) at the front of the
developing assembly?
NO
Go to step 3.
2
Replace the toner sensor. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the toner sensor; if
normal, replace the DC
controller PCB.
NO
Check the screw, gear,
and stirring rod to see if
they are installed
properly.
YES
Check the shutter
assembly of the toner
supply mouth between
the hopper and the
developing assembly.
DC controller
PCB
Screw, gear,
stirring rod
YES/N
3
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Execute ‘409’ in service mode [4].
Is the stirring rod inside the
hopper rotating normally while the
hopper motor is rotating?
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-101
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
B. Troubleshooting Malfunctions in the Pedestal
1
E901
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Pedestal motor
(M1)
1
Set the meter to the 100VDC
range, and measure the voltage
between J109-1 (+; PEDMD) and
J109-4 (-) on the pedestal
controller PCB.
Does the voltage change to about
5 V when WMUPR starts after the
power switch has been turned on?
YES
Replace the pedestal
motor.
Pedestal
controller PCB
2
Replace the pedestal controller
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB to
the pedestal controller
PCB; if normal, replace
the DC controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
11-102
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Action
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Pick-up fails. (pedestal)
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
1
Does the Add Paper indicator
remain on?
YES
See “The Add Paper
indicator fails to turn off.”
Belt
2
Is the belt for drive attached
correctly?
NO
Re-attach the belt.
Pedestal right
door
3
Is the right door of the pedestal
fully closed?
NO
Close the door.
4
Is the right door of the pedestal
locking the deck vertical path
roller and the vertical path roller 3
in place?
NO
Check the locking
spring.
5
Open the right door of the
pedestal, and press the Copy
Start key with a screwdriver set in
the door switch. Do the deck
vertical path roller (CL3) and the
vertical path roller 3 (CL1) rotate?
NO
Check the wiring from
the pedestal controller
PCB to the clutch; if normal, replace the clutch.
6
Is the leading edge of the copy
paper as far as the registration
roller assembly?
NO
See “The registration
roller fails to rotate.”
7
Is the copy paper as far as the
vertical path roller assembly?
NO
See “Pick-up fails.
(cassette)”
Pick-up
assembly
8
Open the right door of the
pedestal, and press the Copy
Start key with a screwdriver set in
the door switch. Does the
feeding/separation roller rotate?
YES
Go to step 11.
Deck pick-up
clutch (CL2)
9
Set the meter to the 100VDC
range, and connect its probes to
J110-B1 (+) and J110-B2 (-;
CL2D*) on the pedestal controller
PCB. Does the voltage change
from about 24 to 0 V when the
Copy Start key is pressed?
NO
Check the wiring from
the pedestal controller
PCB to the clutch; if
normal, replace the
clutch.
Pedestal
controller PCB
10
Replace the pedestal controller
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES
Vertical path
roller 3 drive
clutch (CL1)
Deck vertical
path roller drive
clutch (CL3)
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-103
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Cause
Sensor
Pick-up
assembly
11-104
Step
11
Checks
Find out which sensor has
detected the jam in service mode
([1] No.109). Is the sensor
normal? (See the descriptions on
service mode and instructions on
how to check photointerrupters.)
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
YES/NO
Action
NO
Check the wiring and the
lever; if normal, replace
the sensor.
YES
Remove the pick-up
assembly, and check the
spring and gear.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3
The lifter fails to move up. (pedestal)
Cause
Step
Checks
<None>Action
YES/N
Deck
1
Is the deck set properly?
NO
Re-set it.
Lifter cable
2
Is the lifter cable routed properly?
NO
Re-route it.
Spring, lever
3
Push down the pick-up roller
releasing lever with a finger. Does
the pick-up roller move down?
NO
Remove the pick-up
assembly, and check the
spring and the lever.
Pedestal motor
(M1)
4
Does the pedestal motor rotate?
YES
Go to step 7.
Deck open
sensor (PS7)
5
Set the meter to the 12VDC
range, and connect its probes to
J110-B7 (+) and J110-B6
(-; DEOP*) on the pedestal PCB.
Does the voltage change from 0 to
about 5 V when the deck is set?
NO
Check the wiring from
the pedestal controller
PCB to the sensor; if
normal, replace the
sensor.
Pedestal motor
(M1)
6
Set the meter to the 100VDC
range, and connect its probes to
J109-1 (+; PEDMD) and J109-4 (-)
on the pedestal controller PCB.
Does the voltage change from 0 V
to 24 V when the deck is set?
YES
Check the wiring from
the pedestal controller
PCB to the motor; if normal, replace the motor.
NO
Replace the pedestal
controller PCB.
Pedestal
controller PCB
Deck lifter
position sensor
(PS5)
7
Set the meter to the 30VDC
range, and connect its probes to
J110-A11 (+; DEL) and J110-A10
(-) on the pedestal controller
PCB.Is the voltage 0V when the
deck is pulled out, and about 5V
when the deck is set?
YES
Check the wiring from
the pedestal controller
PCB to the clutch; if normal, replace the sensor.
Deck lifter drive
clutch (CL4)
8
Set the meter to the 30VDC
range, and connect its probes to
J110-B11 (+) and J110-B12
(-; CL4D) on the pedestal
controller PCB. Does the voltage
change from 0 V to about 24 V
when the deck is set?
YES
Check the wiring from
the pedestal controller
PCB to the clutch; if normal, replace the clutch.
Pedestal
controller PCB
9
Replace the pedestal controller
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-105
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4
The Add Paper indicator fails to turn off. (pedestal)
Cause
Deck
Paper sensor
Step
Checks
Action
1
Is the deck set properly?
NO
Set the deck properly.
2
Does the lifter move up?
NO
See “The lifter fails to
move up.”
3
Are the following sensors normal?
PS4:
Deck paper sensor
(See the instructions on how to
check photointerrupers.)
NO
Check the wiring from
the pedestal to the
sensor; if normal,
replace the faulty sensor.
YES
Replace the pedestal
controller PCB.
Pedestal
controller PCB
11-106
YES/NO
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING FAULTS
A. Copy Paper Jams
In the copier, jams tend to occur in any of the following locations:
q Pick-up assembly
w Separation/feeding assembly
e Fixing/delivery assembly
r Cleaning assembly
t Lower feeding assembly
The troubleshooting procedures that follow are therefore organized according to
location; the location as well as the nature of a jam occurring in the copier may be
checked in service mode ([1] No.109).
r
w
q
e
t
Figure 11-501
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-107
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
1
Pick-up assembly
Step
Checks
YES/NO
1
Does it occur when the cassette is
used?
NO
Go to step 8.
Cassette
2
Is the cassette set properly?
NO
Set it properly.
Copy paper
3
Try a different cassette. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
Check the inside of the
cassette for foreign
matter.
4
Is the copy paper curled or wavy?
YES
Replace the copy paper;
advise the user on the
correct method of
storage.
5
Try paper of a type recommended
by Canon. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
Advise the user to use
recommended paper.
DC controller
PCB, pick-up
clutch
6
Does the pick-up roller of the
selected cassette rotate during
copying operation?
NO
See “Pick-up fails.”
Pick-up roller
7
Is the pick-up roller deformed or
worn?
YES
Replace the pick-up
roller.
8
Try manual copying. Does the
main motor start to rotate?
NO
See “Pick up
fails.(multifeeder)”
9
Try paper of a type recommended
by Canon. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
Advise the user to use
recommended paper.
NO
1. Check the pick-up
roller for wear and
deformation.
2. Check the separation
pad.
3. Check the leaf
spring.
Cause
Copy paper
Pick-up roller,
separation pad,
leaf spring
11-108
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Action
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Separation/feeding assembly
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
Separation
roller
1
Is the separation roller of each
cassette deformed or worn?
YES
Replace the deformed or
worn separation roller.
Feeding roller
2
Is the feeding roller of each
cassette deformed or worn?
YES
Replace the deformed or
worn feeding roller.
Registration
roller drive
assembly
3
Does the registration roller
operate normally?
NO
See “The registration
roller fails to rotate.”
Registration
roller, vertical
path roller
4
Is the registration roller or the vertical path roller deformed or worn?
YES
Replace the deformed or
worn roller.
Transfer charging assembly
5
Is the transfer charging assembly
set properly?
NO
Re-set the transfer
charging roller.
6
Are there burrs on the paper guide
of the transfer charging assembly?
YES
Remove the burrs.
7
Is the gut wire of the transfer
charging assembly strung
properly?
NO
Re-string the gut wire.
Copy paper
8
Try paper of a type recommended
by Canon. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
Advise the user to use
recommended paper.
Feeding belt
9
Are the two feeding belts rotating
properly?
NO
Check the belt and the
pulley.
YES
Check to see if the
feeding fan is operating.
Feeding fan
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-109
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3
Fixing/delivery assembly
Cause
YES/NO
Checks
Action
1
Are the separation claws worn or
deformed?
YES
1. Replace the
separation claws.
2. If dirt is found, clean
it with solvent.
Upper/lower
fixing roller
2
Is the upper/lower fixing roller
deformed or scratched?
YES
Replace the roller.
Paper guide
3
Is the paper guide soiled with
toner?
YES
Clean it with solvent.
Nip
4
Is the lower roller pressure (nip)
within standard?
NO
Adjust it.
Cleaning
belt
5
Is the cleaning belt taken up
properly?
NO
Check the cleaning
assembly/cleaning belt
drive assembly.
Sheet
6
Is the sheet in the delivery
reversing assembly normal?
NO
Re-mount it.
Delivery
lever
7
Does the delivery detecting lever
move smoothly?
NO
Make adjustments so
that it moves smoothly.
Delivery
sensor
(PS11)
8
Is the delivery sensor normal?
(See the instructions on how to
check photointerrupers.)
NO
Replace the sensor.
Delivery
motor (M6)
9
Is the delivery roller 2 rotating
smoothly?
NO
Check the delivery roller 2
drive assembly; if normal,
replace the delivery motor.
YES
Check the leading edge of
the copies for a margin.
YES/NO
Action
Fixing assembly
Separation
claws (delivery
assembly)
Delivery assembly
Step
Leading edge
margin
4
Cleaning assembly
Cause
Step
Static eliminator
1
Is the static eliminator set
securely?
NO
Set the static eliminator
securely.
Copy paper
2
Try paper of a type recommended
by Canon. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
Advise the user to use
recommended paper.
NO
1. Check the highvoltage transformer.
2. Check the DC power
supply.
High-voltage
transformer, DC
power supply
PCB
11-110
Checks
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
5
Lower feeding assembly
Cause
Step
Checks
YES/NO
Action
Lower feeder
inlet roller
1
Is the lower feeder inlet roller
deformed or worn?
YES
Replace the lower feeder
inlet roller.
Set-back roller
1/2
2
Is the set-back roller 1/2 deformed
or worn?
YES
Replace the set-back
roller 1/2.
Lower feeder
motor (M7)
3
Are the lower feeder inlet roller
and the set-back roller 1/2 rotating
smoothly?
NO
Check the lower feeder
inlet roller drive assembly and the set-back
roller drive assembly; if
normal, replace the
lower feeder motor.
Lower feeder
outlet roller
4
Is the lower feeder outlet roller
deformed or worm?
YES
Replace the lower feeder
outlet roller.
Lower feeder
flapper solenoid
(SL6)
5
Is the lower feeder flapper
operating during re-pick up?
NO
Check the wiring; if
normal, replace the
solenoid.
Lower feeder
inlet paper
sensor (PS12)
6
Is the lower feeder inlet paper
sensor normal? (See the
instructions on how to check
photointerrupters.)
NO
Check the wiring; if normal, replace the sensor.
Lower feeder
outlet paper
sensor (PS13)
7
Is the lower feeder outlet paper
sensor normal?
(See the instructions on how to
check photointerrupters.)
NO
Check the wiring; if normal, replace the sensor.
Guide plate
8
Is the lower feeder guide plate
deformed?
YES
Replace the lower
feeding assembly.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
DC controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-111
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
B. Troubleshooting Feeding Faults
1
Double feeding
Cause
Separation
roller
Step
1
YES/NO
Checks
Is the separation roller deformed
or worn?
Spring
2
Action
YES
Replace the separation
roller.
NO
Replace the spring used
to pull the separation
roller. Change the
hooking position of the
spring.
YES/NO
Action
Wrinkling
Cause
Step
Checks
1
Turn off the power while copy
paper is moving through the
feeding assembly. At this time, is
the copy paper wrinkled? Or, is it
moving askew?
YES
Check the pick-up
assembly. Check the
registration roller.
Copy paper
2
Try fresh copy paper. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
The copy paper may be
moist; advise the user
on the correct method of
storage.
3
Is the paper of a type
recommended by Canon?
NO
Advise the user to use
recommended paper.
Paper guide
4
Is the paper guide soiled with
toner?
YES
Clean it with solvent.
Lower roller
pressure
5
Is the lower roller pressure (nip)
within specification?
NO
Make adjustments.
YES
Try replacing the upper
and lower rollers one
after the other.
Fixing assembly
Pick-up
assembly
Upper/lower
roller
11-112
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
VI. ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF THE
ELECTRICAL PARTS
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-113
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
A. Sensors
PS6
TS1
PS18
TH1
PS7
PS2
PS8
PS4
PS3
PS11
PS5
PS15
PS20
FU1
PS16
SVR3
PS9
PS17
PS14
PS10
PS1
PS19
PS13
TSW1
PS12
SVR1
SVR2 PS102
PS101
PS104
PS103
Figure 11-601
11-114
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Name
Notation
Function
Photointerrupter
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS9
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
PS14
PS15
PS16
PS17
PS18
PS19
PS20
PS101
PS102
PS103
PS104
Scanner home position detection
Cassette 1 paper detection
Cassette 1 lifter detection
Cassette 2 paper detection
Cassette 2 lifter detection
Multifeeder paper detection
Vertical path roller 1 paper detection
Vertical path roller 2 paper detection
Pre-registration paper detection
Separation detection
Delivery detection
Lower feeder inlet paper detection
Lower feeder outlet paper detection
Horizontal registration paper detection
Horizontal registration roller home position detection
Horizontal registration paper edge detection
Copyboard cover open/closed detection
Right door open/closed detection
Lens home position detection
Blank shutter home position detection
Cassette 1 paper length detection 1
Cassette 1 paper length detection 2
Cassette 2 paper length detection 1
Cassette 2 paper length detection 2
Volume
SVR1
SVR2
SVR3
Cassette 1 paper width detection
Cassette 2 paper width detection
Multifeeder paper width detection
Symbol
P S
Toner sensor
TS1
Developing assembly toner sensor
Thermistor
TH1
Fixing roller surface temperature detection
Thermal fuse
FU1
Scanner overheating detection
Thermo switch
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
TSW1
Fixing heater overheating detection
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-115
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
B. Switches, clutches, and solenoids
CL4
SL6
SL3
MSW2
SW1
CL5
CL2
SL1
DS1
SL2
CL6
SL7
CL3 MSW1
CNT1
CNT2
SSW
SL5
CL1
SL4
CL8
CL7
CB1
SSR
Figure 11-602
11-116
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Symbol
C B
CNT
Name
Function
Notation
Switch
SW1
MSW1
MSW2
SSW
Power switch
Wire cleaner home position detection
Wire cleaner rear position detection
Service switch
Push switch
DSW1
Door switch
Circuit breaker
Counter
CB1
CNT1
AC power line overcurrent detection
Total copy counter
C L
Clutch
CL1
CL2
CL3
CL4
CL5
CL6
CL7
CL8
Registration clutch
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch
Multifeeder pick-up clutch
Vertical path roller 1 clutch
Vertical path roller 2 clutch
Lower feeder outlet clutch
Horizontal registration clutch
S L
Solenoid
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
SL6
SL7
Cassette 1 pick-up release solenoid
Cassette 2 pick-up release solenoid
Multifeeder pick-up solenoid
Cleaning belt solenoid
Blank shutter solenoid
Lower feeder flapper solenoid
Horizontal registration solenoid
SSR
SSR
Fixing heater drive
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-117
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
C. Heaters, lamps, and motors
LA2
LA1
M8
M3
H4
H1
H2
M5
M9
M10
FM2
H3
H3
M2
FM3
M11
FM1
FM4
M1
M6
NF1
M7
FM5
Figure 11-603
11-118
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Symbol
M
N F
Name
Function
Notation
Lamp
LA1
LA2
Scanning lamp
Pre-exposure lamp
Heater
H1
H2
H3
Fixing main heater
Fixing sub heater
Drum heater
Motor
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
Main motor
Scanning motor
Lens motor
Hopper motor
Horizontal registration motor
Delivery motor
Lower feeder motor
Blank shutter motor
Cassette 1 lifter motor
Cassette 2 lifter motor
Cleaner motor
Fan motor
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
Scanner cooling fan
Exhaust fan 1
Exhaust fan 2
Feeding fan
Power supply PCB cooling fan
Noise filter
NF1
Noise prevention
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-119
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
D. PCBs
q
r
w
y
t
e
!3
!2
o
i
!0
u
!1
Figure 11-604
11-120
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Ref.
Name
Description
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
AE sensor
Original size detection
Original size detection
Original size detection
Original size detection
Original size detection
DC controller
DC power supply
Motor driver 1
!0
Motor driver 2
!1
HVT
!2
!3
Lamp regulator
Control panel
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
1
2
3
4
4
Original density detection
Original size detection 1
Original size detection 2 (for AB-configuration)
Original size detection 3
Original size detection 4 (for AB-configuration)
Original size detection 4 (for Inch-configuration)
Sequence control
DC power supply
Scanning motor, horizontal registration motor, hopper
motor, lens motor drive
Delivery motor, lower feeder motor, blank shutter motor,
cleaner motor
Charging assembly, static eliminator/fixing bias,
developing bias high-voltage output
Scanning lamp ON voltage control
Control panel keys, lamp
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-121
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
E. Paper deck pedestal-M1
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
CL1
CL3
M1
CL2
SL1
w
CL4
q
Figure 11-605
11-122
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Function
Name
Notation
Photointerrupter
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
Right door open/closed detection
Vertical path roller 3 paper detection
Deck vertical path roller paper detection
Deck paper detection
Deck lifter position detection
Deck lifter upper limit detection
Deck open/closed detection
M
Motor
M1
Pedestal motor
C L
Clutch
CL1
CL2
CL3
CL4
Vertical path roller 3 drive clutch
Deck pick-up clutch
Deck vertical path roller drive clutch
Deck lifter drive clutch
S L
Solenoid
SL1
Deck pick-up roller release solenoid
Symbol
P S
Pedestal
controller PCB
q
Sequence control
Size switch PCB
w
Peper size change
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-123
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
F. Variable Resistors, Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by
PCB
Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins found,
those that may be used in the field are discussed:
Note:
1. Some LEDs emit dim light because of leak current when OFF; this is a normal
condition and should be kept in mind.
2.VRs that may be used in the field . . . . . . . . .
VRs that must not be used in the field . . . . .
Note:
Do not use VRs and check pins not given in the list; they are for the factory only
and require special instruments and high precision.
11-124
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1
J105
1. DC Controls PCB
J115
SW101-1
SW101-2
SW101-3
SW101-4
A8
B1
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
A1
B8
6 B8
B1 1
A1
A8
J106
SW101
4R4E
AB-configuration
OFF
OFF
10
J107
1
5
J108
IC 103
VR101
IC 124
Figure 11-606
4R3E
Inch-configuration
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
11-125
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4R4E/
4R3E
AB/Inch-configuration
ON
OFF
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Table 11-601
B10
B13 B1
B8 B1
B1
B11
B10 B1
B14 B1
B1
J109
J111
J110
A8 A1 A13
A1 A10 A1
J114
J112
J113
A1
A1 A10 A1 A11
A14
A12 A1
A14
A1 A10 A1
J104
J103
J102
8
J101
A14
A12 A1
1
J116
J117
A1
B1
B1 B14
B1 B12
B10
B1
B1 B14
B12
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2. HVT
Dp
Gr
Si
1 J401 13
Pr
Si
FB
VR403
VR301
VR101
VR302
Figure 11-607
3. Lamp Regulator PCB
2
1
J601
3
J603
1
1
J602
6
Figure 11-608
11-126
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4. Motor driver 1 PCB
8
1
J206
1
J204
13 6
J205
1
1
3
J203
4
14 1
1
J202
J201
Figure 11-609
5. Motor driver 2 PCB
1
11
J953
1
J951
14
1
12
J954
1
6
J952
Figure 11-610
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-127
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
J101
1
3
5
1
J109
6. Pedestal controller PCB (Paper deck pedestal)
B14
J102
J108
1
2
10
1
J107
1
8
IC101
B1
J110
A1
A14
Figure 11-611
11-128
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
VII. SERVICE MODE
A. Outline
The copier’s service mode consists of the following six:
Mode
Description
[1]
Control/display mode
[2]
I/O display mode
[3]
Adjustment mode
[4]
Function mode
[5]
Optional settings mode
[6]
Counter mode
Table 11-701
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-129
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
B. Using Service Mode
1. Starting Service Mode
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch
assembly.
• To make checks in ‘I/O display mode’, for example, make the appropriate copying
mode settings before starting service mode.
2) Press the service mode switch (SSW) with a hex key.
• The display indicates ‘[1]’.
• A press on the Reset key ends service mode.
SSW
Figure 11-701
3) Enter the number of the mode you want to check or adjust using the keypad (Table
11-701), and press the OK key.
• The copier starts the selected mode, and the display shows a number; for
example, indicating the first item under ‘301’.
4) Select the appropriate item of the selected service mode using the keypad while the
100s digit is flashing.
• The display indicates the selected number. (The 100s digit flashes.)
• A press on the Reset key returns the mode selection screen.
5) Press the OK key.
• The copier starts the item indicated.
• A press on the Clear key returns the item selection screen.
• A press on the Reset key returns the mode selection screen.
6) Make the appropriate checks or adjustments.
7) End service mode.
• A press on the Reset key returns the mode selection screen.
• A press on the Reset key while the mode selection screen is being shown ends
service mode.
• The copier does not end service mode even when the power switch is turned off
or the power plug is disconnected.
11-130
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
C. Using Adjustment Mode and Optional Setting Mode
Adjustment mode and the optional setting mode are used to simulate the operations
activated by the conventional variable resistors and switches by storing the settings
made on the control panel in the RAM on the DC controller PCB.
Figure 11-702 is the label attached behind the copier’s front door.
At the factory, each copier is adjusted, and the adjustment values are recorded on
the label.
If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM, you must enter
the values recorded on the label. Further, if you have entered any new values in the field,
you must record the values on the label.
TYP
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
LIGHT-5
BIAS
AE-SLOP
AE-LIGHT
REGIST
LE-BLANK
TE-BLANK
SD-BLANK
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
MF-A6R
MF-A4R
MF-A4
C1-STMTR
C1-A4R
C2-STMTR
C2-A4R
C3-STMTR
C3-A4R
C4-STMTR
C4-A4R
324
325
326
327
SD-REG
DOC-STOP
BOOK-ERA
MF-LNGTH
Figure 11-702
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-131
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
D. Control/Display Mode [1]
To start control/display mode, press ‘1’ (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
To select an item, press the number (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
To delete an item, press the Clear key.
• A press on the Copy Start key while the service mode description is being
shown starts copying operation.
No.
•
Remarks
Description
101
Indicates the version of the master ROM
(IC116).
ROM parts revision number
(See below)
102
Indicates the version of the slave ROM
(IC104).
Same as above
103
Indicates the version of the ROM of the DF.
Same as above
104
Indicates the version of the ROM of the
sorter.
Same as above
105
Indicates the version of the ROM of the
pedestal.
Same as above
106
Indicates the surface temperature of the
upper fixing roller (output of thermistor
TH1).
unit: °C
107
Indicates the output of the AE sensor.
0 to 255
108
Indicates the activation voltage of the
scanning lamp.(220 / 240 V model)
unit: V
109
Indicates the jam history.
See p. 11-133
No. 101 ~ 105 ROM Version No. indicator
Turn on the indicators on the indication section one by one until the ROM version No.
is indicated. The hundreds and tens digits indicate the program version. Also the tens
units digits indicate the revision No.
Example ; ROM version : 2.01
Program version
Revision No.
11-132
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No. 109 Displaying the Jam History
The copier retains a history of as many 40 jams (most recent).
1) While the display indicates ‘109’, press the OK key.
• The display shows the jam history number.
• The display indicates ‘-1’.
2) Using the Zoom key (+) / (-), select the jam history number (1 through 40, a higher
number means an older jam); then, press the OK key.
• The display shows jam location.
3) Press the OK key as necessary to find out the jam code, pick-up location, pick-up
soft counter, and paper size.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-133
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
For example, if the 13th most recent jam was a pre-registration roller delay jam
picked up from the copier’s cassette 1 (copy paper size of A4, soft count of 63021).
Enter ‘13’ using the keypad.
The display shows jam location. (0: copier)
(Table 11-702)
The display shows the jam code. (3: pre-registration delay jam)
(Table 11-703, 704, 705, 706)
The display show the pick-up location. (1: cassette 1)
(Table 11-707)
The display shows the pick-up soft count by pick-up location.
(up to 8 digits)
• The display changes sequentially at intervals of 700 msec.
The display shows the paper size. (3: A4)
(Table 11-708)
11-134
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Jam Location
0
1
2
3
Copier
DF
Sorter
Pedestal
Table 11-702
•
Details of Copier Jam Code
Type of jam
Notation
Sensor
1
Vertical path 2 delay jam (Cassette 2 pick-up delay)
PS8
2
Vertical path 1 delay jam (Cassette 1 pick-up delay)
PS7
3
Pre-registration roller delay jam
PS9
4
Separation delay jam
PS10
5
Delivery delay jam
PS11
6
Lower feeder inlet delay jam
PS12
7
Lower feeder outlet delay jam
PS13
8
Horizontal registration delay jam
PS14
9
Vertical path 2 stationary jam
(Cassette 2 pick-up stationary)
PS8
10
Vertical path 1 stationary jam
(Cassette 1 pick-up stationary)
PS7
11
Pre-registration roller stationary jam
PS9
12
Separation stationary jam
PS10
13
Delivery stationary jam
PS11
14
Lower feeder inlet stationary jam
PS12
15
Lower feeder outlet stationary jam
PS13
16
Horizontal registration stationary jam
PS14
Table 11-703
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-135
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Details of DF Jam Codes
Notation
Type of jam
Model
01
Original pulled out during pick-up
RDF/ADF
02
Pick-up sensor delay jam
RDF/ADF
03
Registration sensor delay jam
RDF/ADF
05
Registration sensor stationary jam
ADF
06
Registration sensor double feeding
RDF/ADF
08
Registration sensor error (failing to detect leading edge of
original during pick-up)
RDF
09
Registration sensor failure
ADF
08
Reversal sensor delay jam 1
RDF
11
Reversal sensor stationary jam
RDF
12
Reversal sensor delay jam 2
RDF
13
Reversal sensor initial stationary jam
RDF
20
Registration sensor reversal pick-up delay jam
RDF
21
Registration sensor reversal pick-up stationary jam
RDF
23
Delivery sensor delay jam
RDF/ADF
41
Delivery sensor stationary jam
RDF/ADF
42
Open detection
RDF/ADF
81
Pick-up tray or upper cover open detection
RDF/ADF
82
Original sensor error
(failing to detect discharged original)
RDF/ADF
84
Sensor detecting an original during pick-up
RDF/ADF
85
Jam unique to test mode
ADF
88
Original detected during pick-up of the 1st original
RDF/ADF
89
Re-circulating lever operating fault during original
circulation (2nd circulation or later)
RDF
8A
Feeding fault when feeding originals of different sizes
ADF
8b
Last original trailing edge sensor ON
(sensor failing to turn off)
ADF
Table 11-704
•
Details of Sorter Jam Codes
Notation
03
04
05
06
07
08
Description
Paper sensor delay jam
Paper sensor stationary jam
Paper sensor timing jam
Stapler staple jam
Sensor detecting paper at power-on
Joint switch or cover switch OFF during copying
Table 11-705
11-136
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Details of Pedestal Jam Codes
Notation
33
Type of jam
Sensor
PS2/PS3
Deck pick-up delay
Deck pick-up timing
Table 11-706
•
Pick - Up Location
1
2
3
8
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Paper deck
Multifeeder assembly
Table 11-707
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-137
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Paper size
Original size
(unit: mm)
17
A5
148 × 210
1
B5
182 × 257
3
A4
210 × 297
4
B5R
257 × 182
6
A4R
297 × 210
2
FOOLSCAP
330 × 216
5
B4
364 × 257
23
COMPUTER
381 × 279
7
A3
420 × 297
9
STMT
140 × 216
11
LTR
216 × 279
14
LTRR
279 × 216
2
FOOLSCAP
330 × 216
13
LGL
356 × 216
23
COMPUTER
381 × 279
15
11” × 17”
432 × 279
Notation
Table 11-708
11-138
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Description
No.
Remarks
110
Indicates the results of the copier’s self
diagnosis.
The display can show as many as
three previous error histories.
Select, for example, ‘1 (The
indicator indicates ‘-1’, ‘-2’, and ‘-3’
using the zoom (+)/(-) key and then
the OK key to find out the codes
for the first, second, and third most
recent errors.
111
Indicates the results of the DF’s self
diagnosis.
Same as above.
112
Indicates the results of the sorter’s self
diagnosis.
Same as above.
113
Indicates the results of the Pedestal’s self
diagnosis.
Same as above.
114
Indicates the copier’s alarm code.
See Table 11-709.
115
Indicates the DF’s alarm code.
See Table 11-710.
116
Indicates the sorter’s alarm code.
See Table 11-711.
117
Indicates the pedestal’s alarm code.
See Table 11-712.
118
Indicates the type of E002.
See Table 11-713.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-139
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Details of Copier Alarm Codes
Notation
Description
01
Cassette 1 lifter fails to move up.
02
Cassette 2 lifter fails to move up.
Table 11-709
•
Details of DF Alarm Codes
Notation
Description
01
The re-circulating lever has swung idly.
02
The original end sensor do not detect an original.
03
Separation has failed during original pick-up.
04
The original has moved askew during original pick-up.
05
The original has overridden the paper stopper plate
during original pick-up.
11
The number of originals is different after jam removal.
12*
The number of originals is excessive.
13
The original has been pulled out in the middle.
Table 11-710
•
Details of Sorter Alarm Codes
Notation
Description
01
The stapler has stopped operation.
02
A staple jam has occurred.
05
The number of sheets stacked for stapling is excessive.
06
The number of sheets stacked for stapling is excessive.
07
The sheets are of different sizes. (horizontally)
08
The stapler unit is absent.
09
Stapled paper remains in the bin.
12*
The number of sheets stacked for sorting is excessive.
0A
Staples are absent.
*: Sorter tray alarm code.
Table 11-711
11-140
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Details of Pedestal Alarm Codes
Notation
01
Description
The deck lifter fails to move up.
Table 11-712
•
Details of E002 (detection temperature)
Service mode otation
Description temperature
1
~ 40
2
40 ~ 75
3
75 ~ 100
4
100 ~ 120
5
120 ~ 140
6
140 ~ 160
7
160 ~ 170
8
170 ~ 180
9
180 ~ 185
10
185 ~ 190
Table 11-713
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-141
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Remarks
Description
No.
119
Indicates the output value of the paper
width sensor of the multifeeder.
0 to 255
120
Indicates the paper width of the
multifeeder.
unit: mm
121
Indicates the output value of the paper
width sensor of the cassette 1.
0 to 255
122
Indicates the output value of the paper
length sensor of the cassette 1.
0, 1 (The ten digit on the indication
section indicates the output value
of PS101 / PS103 and the units
digit indicates the output value of
PS102 / PS104.)
123
Indicates the paper width of the cassette 1.
unit: mm
124
Indicates the output value of the paper
width sensor of the cassette 2.
0 to 255
125
Indicates the output value of the paper
length sensor of the cassette 2.
Same as above. (No.122)
126
Indicates the paper width of the cassette 2.
unit: mm
127
Not used
-
128
Not used
-
129
Not used
-
130
Not used
-
131
Not used
-
132
Not used
-
11-142
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
Description
Remarks
133
Indicates the output of the original size
sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4.
When the original size sensor
detects an original, some LED
lamps of the display turn on. (See
Figure11-703.)
134
Indicates the keys of the control panel.
(See p.11-148.)
135
Indicates the original size detected by the
DF.
A code is indicated to represent the
original size detected by the DF.
(See Table 11-715, 716.)
136
Indicates the activation voltage of the
scanning lamp. (120 V model)
unit : V
AB-configuration
3
INCH-configuration
4
3
1
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
Figure 11-703
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-143
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
• No. 134 Control panel’s key check
1) Select No. 134, and press the OK key.
• The indicator indicates ‘–––’
2) After pressing all the keys on the control panel one by one, press the OK key.
• When it is confirmed that all the keys have been pressed, the indication will be
‘
’.
• If there is any key which has not confirmed to be pressed, the code provided in
the Table 11-714 will be indicated.
If there are some keys which have not confirmed to be pressed, the code with
the smallest number will be indicated.
11-144
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Code
Code
Key
Key
001
User mode key
021
Zoom key (+)
002
OK key
022
Zoom key (-)
003
Page Separate key
023
Reset key
004
Image Compose key
024
ID key
005
Odd/Even key
025
Keypad 1
006
Mode Memory key
026
Keypad 2
007
Bind Margin key
027
Keypad 3
008
Frame Erase key
028
Keypad 4
009
Mix key
029
Keypad 5
010
Sorter key
030
Keypad 6
011
Two-Sided key
031
Keypad 7
012
Copy Density key (darker)
032
Keypad 8
013
AE key
033
Keypad 9
014
Copy Density key (lighter)
034
Clear key
015
Reduce key
035
Keypad 0
016
Direct key
036
Interrupt key
017
Enlarge key
037
Pre-Heat key
018
Paper Select key
038
Stop key
019
Auto Zoom key
039
Copy Start key
020
% key
Table 11-714
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-145
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
q Size Detection (AB-configuration feeding direction only, no default)
Original size
(unit: mm)
17
A5
148 × 210
1
B5
182 × 257
3
A4
210 × 297
4
B5R
257 × 182
6
A4R
297 × 210
2
FOOLSCAP
330 × 216
5
B4
364 × 257
23
COMPUTER
381 × 279
7
A3
420 × 297
Notation
Table 11-715
w Size Detection (Inch-configuration feeding direction only, no default)
Original size
(unit: mm)
9
STMT
140 × 216
11
LTR
216 × 279
14
LTRR
279 × 216
2
FOOLSCAP
330 × 216
13
LGL
356 × 216
23
COMPUTER
381 × 279
15
11” × 17”
432 × 279
Notation
Table 11-716
11-146
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
E. I/O Display Mode [2]
To start I/O display mode, press ‘2’ (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
To select an item, press the number (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
To delete an item, press the Clear key.
• A press on the Copy Start key while the service mode description is being
shown starts copying operation.
No.
Description
Remarks
201
∫
209
PIO input/output port of the DC controller
Some of the LED lamps turn on
according to number to represent
an 8-bit input/output; see below.
210
∫
216
Master CPU input/output of the DC
controller
Some of the LED lamps turn on
according to number to represent
an 8-bit input/output; see below.
217
∫
219
IPC input/output port of the DC controller
Some of the LED lamps turn on
according to number to represent
an 8-bit input/output; see below.
220
∫
225
Slave CPU input/output of the DC
controller
Some of the LED lamps turn on
according to number to represent
an 8-bit input/output; see below.
226
∫
234
CPU input/output port of the pedestal
controller
Some of the LED lamps turn on
according to number to represent
an 8-bit input/output; see below.
235
∫
247
CPU input/output port of the DF controller
Some of the LED lamps turn on
according to number to represent
an 8-bit input/output; see below.
248
∫
260
CPU input/output port of the sorter
controller
Some of the LED lamps turn on
according to number to represent
an 8-bit input/output; see below.
Table 11-717
•
LED
1-a
2-a
1-f
1-g
1-e
1-b
1-c
1-d
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-147
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
PIO
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
201
(PA0)
output
202
(PB0)
output
11-148
1-a
Scanner cooling fan (FM1)
drive signal
SCFD*
J102-A4
1:FM1 ON
1-b
Main motor (M1) drive signal
MMD
J106-3
1:M1 ON
1-c
Pre-exposure lamp (LA2)
drive signal
PEXP*
J113-A4
1:LA2 ON
1-d
Blank shutter solenoid (SL5)
drive signal
BLSD*
J113-A5
1:SL5 ON
1-e
Feedig fan (FM4) drive signal
FFD*
J109-A3
1:FM4 ON
1-f
Feeding fan power signal
FFPOW
J109-A2
1:24V
0:12V
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
Registration clutch (CL1)
drive signal
RGCD*
J103-A1
1:CL1 ON
1-b
Registration clutch power
signal
REG-POW
J103-A2
1:24V
0:12V
1-c
Cassette 1 lifter motor (M9)
drive signal
C1LTD*
J117-A6
1:M9 ON
1-d
Cassette 2 lifter motor (M10)
drive signal
C2LTD*
J117-A8
1:M10 ON
1-e
Fixing main heater (H1) drive
signal
MHRD
J112-B8
1:H1 ON
1-f
Fixing sub heater (H2) drive
signal
SHRD
J112-B7
1:H2 ON
1-g
Cleaning belt solenoid (SL4)
drive signal
CBSD*
J113-A1
1:SL4 ON
2-a
Hopper motor (M4) drive
signal
HMD*
J106-B5
0:M4 ON
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
Description
LED
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
203
(PC0)
input
204
(PA1)
output
1-a
Right door sensor (PS18)
signal
RDC*
J116-A11
0:door closed
1-b
Multifeeder paper sensor
(PS6) signal
MFPD*
J104-B6
0:paper present
1-c
Cassette 1 paper sensor
(PS2) signal
C1PD
J116-A8
1:paper present
1-d
Cassette 2 paper sensor
(PS4) signal
C2PD
J115-B2
1:paper present
1-e
Cassette 1 lifter sensor (PS3)
signal
C1LTP
J116-A5
1:paper present
1-f
Cassette 2 lifter sensor (PS5)
signal
C2LTP
J115-B5
1:paper present
1-g
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
CCDT
J117-A11
–
1-a
Cassette 1 pick-up release
solenoid (SL1) drive signal
C1RSD*
J116-B7
1:SL1 ON
1-b
Cassette 2 pick-up release
solenoid (SL2) drive signal
C2RSD*
J115-B7
1:SL2 ON
1-c
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch
(CL2) drive signal
C1PUCD*
J116-B5
1:CL2 ON
1-d
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch
(CL3) drive signal
C2PUCD*
J115-A2
1:CL3 ON
1-e
Vertical path roller 1 clutch
(CL5) drive signal
VR1CD*
J116-B3
1:CL5 ON
1-f
Vertical path roller 2 clutch
(CL6) drive signal
VR2CD*
J115-A4
1:CL6 ON
1-g
Multifeeder pick-up solenoid
(SL3) drive signal
MFPUSD*
J104-B8
1:SL3 ON
2-a
Multifeeder pick-up clutch
(CL4) drive signal
MFCD*
J104-B10
1:CL4 ON
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-149
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
DPREQ
–
–
–
–
–
(adress)
1-a
1-b
205
(PB1)
output
206
(PC1)
input
11-150
Signal from master CPU to
slave CPU
–
1-c
Lamp ON signal
1-d
Internal PCB signal
1-e
Deliverly motor (M6) rotation
signall
LMPON
–
DMRON
J103-A8
–
J114-A6
1:Scanning
lamp ON
–
1:deliver copy
paper
0:reverse copy
paper
1-f
Deliverly motor (M6) drive
signal
DMD
J114-A5
0:M6 ON
1-g
Total counter (CNT1) signal
CNTD*
J113-B10
1:count up
2-a
Option counter (CNT2) signal
CNT2D*
J113-B8
1:count up
1-a
Vertical path roller 1 paper
sensor (PS7) signal
PDP2*
J116-A2
1:paper present
1-b
Vertical path roller 2 paper
sensor (PS8) signal
PDP1*
J115-A7
1:paper present
1-c
Pre-registration paper sensor
(PS9) signal
PDP3
J117-B13
1:paper present
1-d
Separation sensor (PS10)
signal
PDP4*
J109-A5
0:paper present
1-e
Delivery sensor (PS11) signal
PDP5*
J109-B4
0:paper present
1-f
Scanning lamp (LA1) ON
detection signal
LDT
J103-A12
1:during scanning lamp on
1-g
–
2-a
Zero-cross signal
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
–
ZRCS
–
J103-A11
–
1:Zero-cross
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
Remarks
LED
Description
1-a
Static eliminator / fixing roller
bias ON signal
SFON*
J114-B11
1:Sp / FB ON
1-b
Developing DC bias ON
signal
DPON*
J114-B6
1:Dp (DC bias)
ON
1-c
Developing AC bias ON
signal
ACON*
J114-B7
1:Dp (AC bias)
ON
1-d
Primary / transfer corona
current ON signal
PTON*
J114-B8
1:Pr / Tr ON
Signal
Jack
(adress)
207
(PA2)
output
208
(PB2)
1-e
–
1-f
Static eliminator bias change
signal
1-g
–
–
SPCH
–
–
–
J114-B10
0:3KV
1:4KV
–
–
2-a
Grid bias OFF signal
GRCONT
J114-B14
1:Gr OFF
1-a
Toner level signal
TEP*
J117-A4
0:toner absent
1-b
–
–
–
–
1-c
Auto power-off signal
PWOFF*
J117-A2
1:Power switch OFF
1-d
Main motor lock signal
MMLOCK
J107-4
1:locked
1-e
Main heater SSR detection
signal
MSSRD
J112-B9
1:ON
1-f
Sub heater SSR detection
signal
SSSRD
J112-B6
1:ON
1-g
Total counter open circuit
detection
CNTD*
J113-B10
0:open
2-a
Option counter open circuit
detection
CNT2D*
J113-B8
0:open
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-151
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
209
(PC2)
input
1-a
Lower feeder outlet paper
sensor (PS13) signal
PDP7
J108-2
0:paper present
1-b
Lower feeder inlet paper
sensor (PS12) signal
PDP6*
J109-B7
0:paper present
1-c
Horizontal registration paper
sensor (PS14) signal
PDP8
J117-B8
1:paper present
1-d
Horizontal registration roller
home position sensor (PS15)
signal
HRHP
J117-B5
1:at HP
1-e
Horizontal registration paper
edge sensor (PS16) signal
HRPD
J117-B2
1:paper present
1-f
11-152
–
–
–
–
1-g
Counter select signal
CNTSL1
J113-B5
0:SW ON
2-a
Counter select signal
CNTSL2
J113-B6
0:SW ON
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Master
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
Delivery motor current control
signal 1
DMI1
J114-A14
–
1-c
Delivery motor current control
signal 2
DMI2
J114-A13
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
Fixing thermistor (TH1) signal
1-b
–
1-c
AE sensor signal
1-d
–
(adress)
210
(P6)
211
(P7)
–
AE
J109-B10
–
J107-8
–
–
analog
–
analog
–
1-e
Cassette 1 paper width
detection VR (SVR1) signal
C1PW
J104-A10
analog
1-f
Cassette 2 paper width
detection VR (SVR2) signal
C2PW
J104-A13
analog
1-g
Multifeeder paper width
detection VR(SVR3) signal
MFPW
J104-B13
analog
2-a
212
(P8)
TH1
–
–
–
–
–
1-a
Main motor (M1) clock pulse
signal
MMCLK
J107-5
1-b
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1) signal
SCHP
J113-B2
0:at HP
1-c
–
–
–
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-153
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
213
(P9)
1-a
Horizontal registration clutch
(CL8) drive signal
HRCD*
J103-A3
0:CL8 0N
1-b
Lower feeder outlet clutch
(CL7) drive signal
LFCD*
J103-A5
0:CL7 0N
1-c
Horizontal registration
solenoid (SL7) drive signal
HRSD*
J117-B10
0:SL7 0N
1-d
Lower feeder flapper solenoid
(SL6) drive signal
LFSD*
J108-4
0:SL6 0N
1-e
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1-f
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
Lower feeder motor (M7)
rotation signal
LFRON
J114-A8
0:CCW
1:CW
1-b
Lower feeder motor (M7)
drive signal
LFD
J114-A9
1:M7 ON
1-c
Lower feeder motor (M7)
clock signal
LFCLK
J114-A4
1-d
214
(PA)
11-154
Internal PCB signal
–
–
–
–
–
1-e
Scanning motor (M2) clock
signal
SCCLK
J106-A3
–
1-f
Scanning motor (M2) phase
return signal
SCRET
J106-A1
–
1-g
Delivery motor (M6) clock
signal
DMCLK
J114-A7
–
2-a
Scanning motor (M2) rotation
signal
SCRON
J106-A2
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
0:CCW
1:CW
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
Description
LED
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
215
(PB)
216
(PC)
1-a
Horizontal registration motor
(M5) clock signal
HRCLK
J106-B6
1-b
Horizontal registration motor
(M5) rotation signal
HRRON
J106-B7
0:CCW
1:CW
1-c
Horizontal registration motor
(M5) drive signal
HRD
J106-B8
1:M5 ON
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
Scanning motor (M2) drive
signal
SCMD*
J106-A4
0:M2 ON
1-f
Excitation mode command 1
SCM1
J106-A5
0:during
rotation
1-g
Excitation mode command 2
SCM2
J106-A6
1:during
rotation
2-a
–
1-a
–
1-b
–
1-c
–
–
J117-A10
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
–
CCD*
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-155
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
IPC
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
217
(PA)
218
(PB)
219
(P0)
11-156
1-a
Pedestal control signal 0
FEED-STOP
J112-A1
–
1-b
Pedestal control signal 1
FACE-DOWN
J112-A2
–
1-c
–
–
–
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
Cleaner motor (M11)
clockwise signal
CLCW
J114-A1
1:forward
1-f
Cleaner motor (M11) counterclockwise signal
CLCCW
J114-A2
1:reverse
1-g
Exhaust fan power signal
EF1POW
EF2POW
J113-A9
J113-A7
1:high speed
0:low speed
2-a
Exhaust fan (FM2, FM3) drive
signal
EF1D*
EF2D*
J113-A10
J113-A8
0:Fan ON
1-a
Wire cleaner home position
switch (MSW1) signal
WCHP
J109-A10
0:MSW1 ON
1-b
Wire cleaner rear position
switch (MSW2) signal
WCRP
J109-A8
0:MSW2 ON
1-c
Internal PCB signal
–
–
–
1-d
Internal PCB signal
–
–
–
1-e
Dip switch (SW101-1) signal 0
–
–
0:SW ON
1-f
Dip switch (SW101-2) signal 1
–
–
0:SW ON
1-g
Dip switch (SW101-3) signal 2
–
–
0:SW ON
2-a
Dip switch (SW101-4) signal 3
–
–
0:SW ON
1-a
Cassette 1 paper length
sensor unit (SEU1) signal 1
C1SZ1
J104-A2
0:PS101 ON
1-b
Cassette 1 paper length
sensor unit (SEU1) signal 2
C1SZ2
J104-A1
0:PS102 ON
1-c
Cassette 2 paper length
sensor unit (SEU2) signal 1
C2SZ1
J104-A6
0:PS103 ON
1-d
Cassette 2 paper length
sensor unit (SEU2) signal 2
C2SZ2
J104-A5
0:PS104 ON
1-e
(For factory)
–
–
–
1-f
(For factory)
–
–
–
1-g
(For factory)
–
–
–
2-a
(For factory)
–
–
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Slave
No.
Description
LED
Signal
Jack
Remarks
–
–
–
(adress)
220
(P4)
1-a
Internal PCB signal
1-b
Segment signal
SEG0
J110-A1
–
1-c
Segment signal
SEG1
J110-A2
–
1-d
Segment signal
SEG2
J110-A3
–
1-e
Segment signal
SEG3
J110-A4
–
1-f
Segment signal
SEG4
J110-A5
–
1-g
Segment signal
SEG5
J110-A6
–
2-a
Segment signal
SEG6
J110-A7
–
1-a
221
(P6)
222
(P8)
–
–
–
–
1-b
Original size detection ON
signal
–
–
1-c
Internal PCB signal
–
–
–
1:ON
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
Blank shutter home position
sensor (PS20) signal
BLHP
J114-A12
0:at HP
1-c
Original size sensor 1 (PS21)
signal
SIZE0
J103-B2
1:Original
present
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-157
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
Original size sensor 2 (PS22)
signal
SIZE1
J103-B5
1:Original
present
1-c
Original size sensor 3 (PS23)
signal
SIZE2
J103-B8
1:Original
present
1-d
Original size sensor 4 (PS24)
signal
SIZE3
J103-B11
1:Original
present
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
(adress)
223
(P9)
224
(PB)
1-a
Lens motor (M3) drive pulse
signal A
LEA
J106-B2
–
1-b
Lens motor (M3) drive pulse
signal B
LEB
J106-B3
–
1-c
–
–
–
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
Blank shutter motor (M8)
drive pulse signal A
BLA
J114-A10
–
1-f
Blank shutter motor (M8)
drive pulse signal B
BLB
J114-A11
–
1-g
Internal PCB signal
–
–
–
–
–
–
2-a
225
(PC)
1-a
Lens motor (M3) hold signal
LEHLD
J106-B4
1:rotation
1-b
Blank shutter motor (M8) hold
signal
BLHLD
J114-A3
1:rotation
1-c
–
–
–
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
1-g
2-a
11-158
–
Copyboard cover open /
closed sensor (PS17) signal
–
Lens home position sensor
(PS19) signal
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CBCC
–
LHP
J102-A9
–
J107-10
0:open
–
0:at HP
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
PAPER DECK PEDESTAL - M1
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
–
–
–
–
1-c
–
–
–
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
–
–
–
–
(adress)
226
(P0)
1-b
Deck pick-up roller release
solenoid (SL1) drive signal
1-c
227
(P1)
–
–
J110-B14
0:SL1 ON
–
–
1:motor is
normal
1-d
Pedestal motor (M1) lock
signal
LOCK*
J109-2
1-e
Deck size signal 1
SIZE1
J110-B9
–
1-f
Deck size signal 2
SIZE2
J110-B8
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
–
–
–
–
J102-4
–
–
–
J102-6
–
1-b
Communication signal (with
copier)
1-c
228
(P2)
DEPRL*
1-d
–
Communication signal (with
copier)
FEEDSTOP
–
FACEDOWN
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
Deck paper sensor (PS4)
signal
2-a
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
–
DPD
–
J110-A5
–
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1:paper present
–
11-159
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
–
–
–
–
1-c
–
–
–
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
Pedestal motor speed control
signal
PEDSP
J109-3
–
2-a
Pedestal motor (M1) drive
signal
PEDMD
J109-1
–
–
(adress)
229
(P3)
230
(P6)
231
(P7)
1-a
–
1-b
Deck lifter clutch (CL4) signal
1-c
–
–
–
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
–
–
–
–
1-c
–
–
–
–
1-d
–
–
–
–
J110-A11
1:upper position
–
–
1-e
1-f
1-g
2-a
11-160
1:M1 ON
Deck lifter position sensor
(PS5) signal
–
Deck lifter upper limit sensor
(PS6) signal
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CL4D*
DEL
–
DLP
–
J110-B12
J110-A8
–
–
0:CL4 ON
1:upper limit
–
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
–
–
–
–
1-c
–
–
–
–
(adress)
232
(PA)
1-d
Vertical path roller 3 paper
sensor (PS2) signal
PS2D
J107-9
1:paper present
1-e
Deck vertical path roller paper
sensor (PS3) signal
DVRPD
J110-A2
1:paper present
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
–
–
–
–
1-c
233
(PB)
234
(PC)
Deck open sensor (PS7)
signal
DEOP*
J107-B6
0:open
1-d
–
1-e
Right door open sensor (PS1)
signal
1-f
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
–
RDOD*
J107-6
–
0:open
1-a
Vertical path roller 3 drive
clutch (CL1) drive signal
CL1D*
J107-4
0:CL1 ON
1-b
Deck vertical path roller
clutch (CL3) drive signal
CL3D*
J110-B4
0:CL3 ON
1-c
–
–
1-d
–
–
1-e
Deck pick-up clutch (CL2)
drive signal
CL2D*
–
–
–
J110-B2
0:CL2 ON
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2-a
Internal PCB signal
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-161
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
ADF - E1
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
1-a
Separation motor (M4) drive
signal
SMD*
J4-6
0:M4 ON
1-b
Original set indicator LED
signal
DSD*
J4-4
0:LED ON
1-c
Brake (BK) drive signal
BKD*
J6-2
0:BK ON
1-d
Retaining plate solenoid
(SL2) drive signal
RTPSLD*
J14-2
0:SL2 ON
1-e
Paper sttoper solenoid (SL1)
draive signal
STPSLD*
J11-2
0:SL1ON
1-f
Delivery motor (M3) rotation
signal
DMRD
1-g
Clutch (CL) drive signal
CLD*
235
(DF-A)
2-a
0:CL ON
–
–
–
Belt motor (M2) clock signal
BMCLK
–
–
1-b
Belt motor (M2) rotation
signal
BMRD
–
0:counterclockwise
1:clockwise
1-c
Belt motor (M2) drive signal
BMON
–
1:M2 ON
1-d
Delivery motor (M3) clock
signal
DMCLK
–
1-e
Delivery motor (M3) drive
signal
DMON
–
1-f
Pick-up motor (M1) drive
signal
PUMD
J9-1
1:M1 ON
1-g
Separation sensor (S11)
signal
LDD
J4-2
0:original
present
2-a
11-162
J12-2
0:counterclockwise
1:clockwise
1-a
236
(DF-B)
–
–
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
–
–
–
1:M3 ON
–
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
Description
LED
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
1-a
Communication signal
–
–
–
1-b
Communication signal
–
–
–
1-c
Communication signal
–
–
–
1-d
Belt motor clock sensor (S5)
signal
237
(DF-C)
1-e
1-f
–
Delivery motor clock sensor
(S6) signal
BMCLK
–
DMCLK
–
J5-13
–
–
–
J5-10
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
–
–
–
–
1-c
DIP SW 3, 4
–
–
–
1-d
DIP SW 1, 2
–
–
–
238
1-e
Push switch
–
–
–
(DFEA)
1-f
Paper unit guide solenoid
(SL3) drive signal
1-g
LED 1 ON signal (PCB
internal signal)
–
–
0:ON
2-a
LED 2 ON signal (PCB
internal signal)
–
–
0:ON
JMPSL*
J15-2
0:SL3 ON
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
–
–
–
–
1-c
–
–
–
–
239
1-d
–
–
–
–
(DFEB)
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-163
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
240
(AD1)
–
Registration sensor (S2)
signal
PDP3
J5-15
241
(AD2)
–
Origianal sensor (S1) signal
DEP
J10-3
242
(AD3)
–
243
(AD4)
–
Pick-up sensor (S3) signal
PDP1
J5-4
244
(AD5)
–
Delivery sensor (S4) signal
PDP2
J5-7
245
(AD6)
–
246
(AD7)
–
Open/closed sensor (S8)
signal
ADFC
J13-2
247
(AD8)
–
Top cover sensor (S7) signal
UPCC2
J10-6
11-164
–
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
–
–
in hex notation
–
–
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
RDF-F1
No.
Description
LED
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
235
1-a
Re-circulating motor drive
signal
RMD*
J8-6
1:ON
1-b
Original set indicator LED ON
signal
DSD*
J8-4
1:ON
1-c
Clutch drive signal
CLD*
J13-2
1:ON
1-d
Brake drive signal
BKD*
J6-2
1:ON
1-e
Stopper plate solenoid drive
signal
STPSLD*
J5-4
1:ON
1-f
paper deflecting plate
solenoid drive signal
DFSLD*
J4-2
1:ON
1-g
PCB internal signal
2-a
Paper unit guide solenoid
drive signal
(DF-A)
1-a
–
–
JMPSL*
–
–
–
J15-2
0:ON
–
–
1-b
Belt motor clock pulse
–
1-c
Belt motor direction
switching signal
–
–
–
236
1-d
Belt motor drive signal
–
–
–
(DF-B)
1-e
Feeding motor drive signal
1-f
Feeding motor short brake
signal
1-g
Pick-up motor drive signal
PUMD
J12-1
1:ON
2-a
Paper retaining plate solenoid
drive signal
WSLD*
J5-2
0:ON
1-a
Communication signal
–
–
–
1-b
Communication signal
–
–
–
1-c
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
237
1-d
Belt motor clock sensor signal
(DF-C)
1-e
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
1-f
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
1-g
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
2-a
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
FMD
–
BMCLK
–
TP1-1
–
TP2-4
–
–
J9-23
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
–
11-165
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
238
(DFEA)
1-a
Reversal sensor signal
PDP5
J9-17
1:original
present
1-b
Pick-up roller sensor signal
PUSP
J9-8
1:roller at HP
1-c
Pick-up sensor signal
PDP1
J9-14
1:original
present
1-d
Delivery sensor signal
PDP2
J9-11
1:original
present
1-e
Re-circulating sensor signal
LDD
J8-2
0:bar on
original
1-f
LED 1 ON signal
–
–
–
1-g
LED 2 ON signal
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
DIP switch setting
–
–
–
1-b
DIP switch setting
–
–
–
1-c
DIP switch setting
–
–
–
239
1-d
DIP switch setting
–
–
–
(DFEB)
1-e
DIP switch setting
–
–
–
1-f
DIP switch setting
–
–
–
1-g
DIP switch setting
–
–
–
2-a
DIP switch setting
–
–
–
–
–
in hex notation
240
(AD1)
–
241
(AD2)
–
242
(AD3)
–
243
(AD4)
–
Original sensor signal
244
(AD5)
–
Push switch signal
245
(AD6)
–
RF switch signal
RFC
J2-6
246
(AD7)
–
Upper cover sensor signal
UPCC1*
J9-30
247
(AD8)
–
11-166
–
Registration sensor signal
–
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
PDP3
–
DEP1
–
–
JP-25
–
J5-5
–
–
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Sorter-E1
No.
Description
LED
Signal
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
248
(STP6)
1-a
Serial clock for EEPROM
EESCK
–
–
1-b
Serial output data EEPROM
EED1
–
–
1-c
Chip select signal for
EEPROM
EECS
–
1:ON
1-d
Bin shift motor (M2) drive
signal
BSMD
–
1:M2 ON
1-e
Bin shift motor (M2) PWM
signal
BSM
–
–
1-f
Bin shift motor (M2) DOWN
signal
BMDWN
–
–
1-g
Bin shift motor (M2) UP signal
BMUP
–
–
2-a
Feeding motor (M1) PWM
signal
FEEDPWM
–
–
1-a
Delivery sensor (PI1) paper
detection signal
PD
–
1:Paper present
1-b
Bin lower limit sensor (MS4)
signal
BHP
J7-7
0:lower position
1-c
Lead cam home position
sensor (PI3) signal
LDP
J3-5
1:at HP
1-d
Joint sensor (MS1) signal
JNTS
J4-2
0:released
1-e
24V DOWN detection signal
249
(STP7)
1-f
250
(STEA)
–
0:24V DOWN
–
–
–
–
–
–
1-g
EEPROM serial input data
EED0
–
2-a
EEPROM BUSY signal
EEBSY
–
1-a
Dip switch signal 1
–
–
–
1-b
Dip switch signal 2
–
–
–
1-c
Dip switch signal 3
–
–
–
1-d
Dip switch signal 4
–
–
–
1-e
Push switch (SW1) signal
–
–
–
1-f
Push switch (SW2) signal
–
–
–
0:BUSY
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-167
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
1-a
–
–
–
–
(adress)
251
(STEB)
252
(STP4)
1-b
Feeding motor (M1)
CW/CCW signal
FMA/FMB
–
1-c
Feeding motor (M1) current
switching signal 1
FMCCC1
–
–
1-d
Feeding motor (M1) current
switching signal 2
FMCCC2
–
–
1-e
LED ON signal
LED
–
0:ON
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
1-a
Bin shift motor (M2) clock
signal
–
–
–
1-b
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
1-c
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
1-d
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
1-e
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
1-f
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
1-g
PCB internal signal
–
–
–
2-a
PCB intenal signal
–
–
–
253
(AD0)
–
–
–
–
254
(AD1)
–
–
–
–
255
(AD2)
–
–
–
–
256
(AD3)
–
–
–
–
257
(AD4)
–
–
–
–
258
(AD5)
–
–
–
–
259
(AD6)
–
–
–
–
260
(AD7)
–
–
–
–
11-168
0:CW
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
in hex notation
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Stapler Sorter - D2
No.
Signal
Description
LED
Jack
Remarks
(adress)
1-a
Staple door open signal
SPLOPN
J3-7
1:open
1-b
Joint switch open signal
SOP
J3-5
1:open
1-c
Lead cam home position
sensor signal
LCHP
J8-3
1:at HP
1-d
Stapler slide home position
sensor signal
SPLACT
J7-3
0:stapling
position
1-e
Bin unit lower limit sensor
signal
BLL
J9-1
1:lower limit
1-f
Guide bar home position
sensor
SGBHP
J4-6
1:at HP
1-g
Stapler home position sensor
signal
SPUHP
J3-3
1:at HP
2-a
Stapling home position
sensor signal
SPLHP
J11-3
0:at HP
1-a
Guide bar motor drive signal
B*
–
1-b
Guide bar motor drive signal
B
–
1-c
Guide bar motor drive signal
A*
–
1-d
Guide bar motor drive signal
A
–
1-e
Guide bar motor ON signal
1-f
Stapler motor normal rotation
signal
1-g
Stapler motor reverse rotation
signal
2-a
Stapler swing motor drive
signal
1-a
248
(ST-A)
249
(ST-B)
250
(ST-C)
–
alternates
between 1 and
0 while ON
–
1:ON
STMFW*
–
1:motor normal
rotation
STMRV*
–
1:motor reverse
rotation
–
–
–
Communication signal
–
–
–
1-b
Communication signal
–
–
–
1-c
Bin shift up signal
–
–
1:up
1-d
Bin shift down signal
–
–
1:down
1-e
Communication signal
–
–
1-f
Feeding motor clock pulse
1-g
Communication signal
2-a
Feeding motor drive signal
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
FMCLK
–
FMD
–
J8-5
–
–
J6-2
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
–
1:ON
11-169
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
LED
Description
Signal
Jack
Remarks
1-a
–
–
–
–
1-b
Staple absent LED ON signal
1-c
–
(adress)
STEMP*
–
J7-10
–
0:staple absent
–
251
1-d
(STE0)
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
2-a
1-a
1-b
252
1-c
Staple ready indicator signal
Stapler safety sensor signal
–
Delivery sensor signal
–
Manual staple key signal
SPLOK*
SPLSFT
–
SPD
–
MNSPL*
J10-4
J3-1
–
J10-1
–
J10-6
0:LED ON
–
–
1:paper present
–
0:key is prssed
1-d
–
–
–
–
1-e
–
–
–
–
1-f
–
–
–
–
1-g
–
–
–
–
2-a
–
–
–
–
253
(AD0)
–
–
–
–
254
(AD1)
–
–
–
–
255
(AD2)
–
–
–
–
256
(AD3)
–
Bin paper sensor signal
257
(AD4)
–
Dip switch signal 4
–
–
258
(AD5)
–
Dip switch signal 3
–
–
259
(AD6)
–
Dip switch signal 2
–
–
260
(AD7)
–
Dip switch signal 1
–
–
(STE1)
11-170
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
BPD
in hex notation
J4-4
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
F. Adjustment Mode [3]
To start adjustment mode, press ‘3’ (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
To select an item, press the number (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
To change the setting, press the number (keypad) or the zoom (+)/(-) key and the OK
key in sequence.
• Press the % key to enter a negative number.
To delete an item, press the Clear key.
• A press on the Copy Start key while the service mode description is being
shown starts copying operation.
No.
Description
Settings
Remarks
301
Scanning lamp intensity
adjustment
0~255
A higher setting obtain darker
copies.
302
Developing bias DC component
adjustment
-25~25
See p. 11-18.
303
AE mode newspaper original
DC bias adjustment
0~255
See p. 11-17.
304
AE mode scanning lamp
activation voltage automatic
adjustment
0~255
See p. 11-16.
305
Leading edge margin
adjustment
-127~127
A higher setting delays the timing
at which the registration clutch
turns on, thereby decreasing the
margin.
unit: 0.36 mm
306
Leading edge non-image width
adjustment
-127~127
A higher setting delays the timing
at which the blank shutter solenoid
turns on, thereby increasing the
non-image width.
unit: 0.36 mm
307
Trailing edge non-image width
adjustment
-127~127
A higher setting delays the timing
at which the blank shutter solenoid
turns off, thereby decreasing the
trailing edge non-image width.
unit: 0.36 mm
308
Left/right margin adjustment
-30~30
A higher setting increases the
left/right margin.
unit: 0.36 mm
311
Multifeeder paper width
detection reference point 1
0~255
Use the keypad.
312
Multifeeder paper width
detection reference point 2
0~255
Use the keypad.
313
Multifeeder paper width
detection reference point 3
0~255
Use the keypad.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-171
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
Description
Settings
Remarks
314
Cassette 1 paper width
detection reference point 1
0~255
Use the keypad.
315
Cassette 1 paper width
detection reference point 2
0~255
Use the keypad.
316
Cassette 2 paper width
detection reference point 1
0~255
Use the keypad.
317
Cassette 2 paper width
detection reference point 2
0~255
Use the keypad.
318
Not used
-
-
319
Not used
-
-
320
Not used
-
-
321
Not used
-
-
324
Horizontal registration paper
edge sensor position
adjustment
-50~50
A higher setting increases the shift
of the horizontal paper edge
sensor, thereby increasing the
margin at the front.
unit: 0.5 mm
325
DF original stop position
adjustment
-7~7
A higher setting moves the original
stop position to the right
unit: 0.33 mm
326
Book frame erasing width
adjustment
15~34
A higher setting increases the
book frame erasing width.
unit: 1 mm
327
Multifeeder pick-up trailing edge
margin adjustment (free size
pick-up)
-32~32
A higher setting delays the timing
at which the blank shutter solenoid
turns off, thereby decreasing the
trailing edge margin.
unit: 0.36 mm
11-172
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
G. Function Mode [4]
To start function mode, press ‘4’ (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
To select an item, press the number (keypad).
• To exeute the mode, press the OK key.
Note:
You must make sure that the copier is in standby state before executing any of the
items.
No.
Description
Remarks
401
Use it to reset E000, E001, E002, E003, or
E800.
To reset an error code, press the
OK key. A press on the OK key will
initialize the code and turn off the
power switch.
402
Use it to execute AE automatic adjustment.
See p. 11-15.
403
Use it to adjust the fixing roller nip.
See p. 11-41.
404
Use it to check the LED lamps on the
control panel.
A press on the OK key turn on all
LED lamps on the control panel (for
10 sec).
405
Use it to check the activation of the
scanning lamp.
A press on the OK key turns on the
scanning lamp (for 3 sec).
406
Use it to check the activation of the preexposure lamp.
A press on the OK key turns on the
pre-exposure lamp (for 3 sec).
407
Use it to supply toner at time of installation.
A press on the OK key starts
supplying of toner from the hopper
to the developing assembly
automatically (for about 6 min): the
operation will stop automatically.
This mode ignores the signal from
the developing toner sensor. If you
start the mode by mistake, be sure
to turn off the power switch
immediately.
408
Use it to cause the developing assembly to
rotate idly.
A press on the OK key causes the
developing assembly to rotate idly
(for about 6 sec).
409
Use it to check the operation of the hopper
motor.
A press on the OK key causes the
hopper motor to rotate (for 3 sec).
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-173
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Remarks
Description
No.
410
Use it to check the operation of the blank
shutter motor.
Place two sheets of A4 copy paper
on the multifeeder tray, and open
the copyboard cover. Press the OK
key so that the blank shutter will
shift and two copies will be made.
(The margin changes from A6R to
A4R.)
411
Use it to initialize the data of the RAM on
the DC controller PCB.
Press the OK key and then the
user mode key to initialize the
RAM.
412
Use it to automatically adjust the
multifeeder paper width detection reference
point 1, 2, or 3.
See p. 11-44.
413
Use it to automatically adjust the cassette 1
paper width detection reference point 1 or 2.
See p. 11-43.
414
Use it to automatically adjust the cassette 2
paper width detection reference point 1 or 2.
See p. 11-43.
415
Not used
-
416
Not used
-
11-174
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
H. Optional Settings Mode [5]
To
To
To
To
•
No.
501
502
503
504
505
start optional settings mode, press ‘5’ (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
select an item, press the number (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
change the setting, press the Zoom (+) / (-) key and the OK key.
delete an item, press the Clear key.
A press on the Copy Start key while the service mode description is being
shown starts copying operation.
Function
Use it to turn on/off the
auto power-off function.
Use it to switch the density
notation (9 <---->17).
Description
Enable/disable the function
as necessary.
Select either 9-level or 17level notation for the
density indicator LED.
Use it to turn on/off the
Enable or disable the
size detection function.
original size detection
function as necessary.
Use it to change the upper Select from 1 to 100 to
limit imposed on the copy change the upper limit.
volume.
Use it to select U size
paper (G1).
Use it to select U size
paper (G2).
Use it for G1 paper size.
507
Use it to select U size
paper (G3).
Use it for G3 paper size.
508
Use it to select U size
paper (G4).
Use it to select cleaning
belt feeding length.
Use it for G4 paper size.
506
509
510
Use it to select the static
eliminator bias for
multifeeder pick-up.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Use it for G2 paper size.
Use it to switch between
standard and doubled
length.
As necessary, make a
switch-over so that the
voltage applied to the static
eliminator when picking up
from the multifeeder will
always be 4.0 kV.
Remarks
on:Enable auto power-off.
off:Disable auto power-off.
0:9 level
1:17 level
on:Enable size detection.
off:Disable size detection.
1 to 100
• To change the setting,
press the number (keypad) and the OK key.
0:G-LTR
1:K-LGL
0:FOOLSCAP
1:OFFICIO
2:E-OFFICIO
3:A-LGL
4:A-OFFICIO
0:G-LGL
1:FOLIO
2:AUS FLS
0:LTR
1:A-LTR
0:Standard.
1:Double.
0:3 kV
1:4 kV
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-175
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
511
Function
Use it to turn on/off the
auto energy saver
function.
512
Use it to switch the
copier’s operation mode
between AB-configuration
and Inch-configuration.*1
Remarks
on: Enable auto energy
saver function.
off: Disable auto energy
saver function.
You have to select the copi- -1: AB-configuration
er’s operation mode when
-0: Inch-configuration
the AB/Inch-configuration is
selected using SW101.
Description
Enable/disable the function
as necessary.
*1:If the setting is altered using this mode, the settings for standard mode and stored by the
copier’s automatic memory function are reset, then; the power switch is turned off.
11-176
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
I. Counter mode [6]
To start counter mode, press ‘6’ (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
To select an item, press the number (keypad) and the OK key in sequence.
• To initialize the counter, select the appropriate item; then, press the user mode
key and the OK key in sequence.
To delete an item, press the Clear key.
• A press on the Copy Start key while the service mode description is being
shown starts copying operation.
Remarks
Description
No.
Incremented upon
delivery.
601
Indicates the large-size total copy count.
602
Indicates the large-size copy count (from multifeeder).
603
Indicates the large-size copy count (from cassette 1).
604
Indicates the large-size copy count (from cassette 2).
605
Not used
606
Not used
607
Indicates the large-size copy count (2nd side pick-up
for 2-sided copies).
608
Indicates the count of large-size original feeding.
Incremented upon
original pick-up.
609
Indicates the small-size total copy count.
610
Indicates the small-size copy count (from multifeeder).
Incremented upon
delivery.
611
Indicates the small-size copy count (from cassette 1).
612
Indicates the small-size copy count (from cassette 2).
613
Indicates the small-size copy count (from paper deck).
614
Not used
615
Indicates the small-size copy count (2nd side pick-up
for 2-sided copies).
616
Indicates the count of small-size original feeding.
Incremented upon
original pick-up.
617
Service counter 1
618
Service counter 2
Incremented upon
pick-up.
619
Indicates how many times the cleaning belt solenoid
has turned on*.
Incremented upon
activation.
* At ‘250,000’, error code E005 will be indicated. E005 will be cleared when the counter (‘619’)
is cleared.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-177
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
•
Counter indicator
Turn on the indicators on the indication section one by one until the count value is
indicated. (up to 8 digits)
The display changes sequentially at intervals of 700 msec.
Example ; count: 751320
11-178
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS
The microprocessor on the copier’s DC controller is equipped with a function that
checks the condition of the copier (particularly, its sensors). The microprocessor runs a
check at such times as programmed and indicates an error code or executes error auto
power-off or error shut-off upon detection of an error.
A. Copier
Code
E000
E001
Cause
Description
•Thermistor (TH1; off contact,
poor contact, open circuit)
•Heater (H1, H2; open circuit)
•Thermal switch (TS1; open
circuit)
•SSR (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
The temperature of the upper fixing
assembly does not reach 40°C within 27
sec after power-on.
(Notes 1, 2)
When an error associated with ‘E000’ is
detected, the copier turns off the power
switch in 2 sec and then turns off all
power supplies.
•Thermistor (TH1; short
circuit)
•SSR (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
The temperature of the upper fixing
assembly exceeds 220°C.
(Notes 1, 2)
When an error associated with ‘E001’ is
detected, the copier turns off the power
switch in 2 sec and then turns off all
power supplies.
•Thermistor (TH1; poor
contact, open circuit)
•Heater (H1, H2; open circuit)
•Thermal switch (TS1; open
circuit)
•SSR (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
•The temperature does not reach 75°C
within 35 sec after reaching 40°C.
•The temperature does not reach 100°C
within 25 sec after reaching 75°C.
•The temperature does not reach 120°C
within 20 sec after reaching 100°C.
•The temperature does not reach 140°C
within 20 sec after reaching 120°C.
•The temperature does not reach 160°C
within 20 sec after reaching 140°C.
•The temperature does not reach 170°C
within 15 sec after reaching 160°C.
•The temperature does not reach 180°C
within 15 sec after reaching 170°C.
•The temperature does not reach 185°C
within 7 sec after reaching 180°C.
•The temperature does not reach 190°C
within 7 sec after reaching 185°C.
(Notes 1, 2)
When an error associated with ‘E002’ is
detected, the copier turns off the power
switch in 2 sec and then turns off all
power supplies.
E002
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-179
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Code
Cause
Description
E003
•Thermistor (TH1; poor
contact, open circuit)
•Heater (H1, H2; open circuit)
•Thermal switch (TS1; open
circuit)
•SSR (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
•The temperature drops to 100°C or less
after reaching a specific temperature.
(Notes 1, 2)
When an error associated with ‘E003’ is
detected, the copier turns off the power
switch in 2 sec and then turns off all
power supplies.
E004
•SSR (short circuit)
•Heater (H1, H2; open circuit)
•Thermal switch (TS1; open
circuit)
The SSR has turned while the heater
(H1, H2) is off when the power switch is
turned on.
(Note 2)
E005
•Cleaning belt (fixing
assembly; taken up)
(In the case that the counter
value of the service mode
No.619 reaches to
“250,000”.
The take-up length of the cleaning belt
inside the fixing assembly exceeds a
specific value.
E010
•Main motor (M1; faulty)
•Main motor driver PCB
(faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
After the main motor drive signal has
been generated, two or more clock
pulses are not input within 1 sec.
•Counter (open circuit)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
A check is made before the counter is
turned on and off.
E030
(When the counter is turned on, normal
if the counter drive signal is ‘0’; when
the counter is turned off, normal if the
counter drive signal is ‘1’.)
•Option counter (open circuit)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
(When the option counter is turned on,
normal if the option counter drive signal
is ‘0’; when the option counter is turned
off, normal if the option counter drive
signal is ‘1’.)
E031
E051
11-180
A check is made before the option
counter is turned on and off.
•Horizontal registration roller
home position sensor
(PS15; faulty)
•Horizontal registration motor
(M5; faulty)
•Motor driver 1 PCB (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
The horizontal registration roller home
position signal (HRHP) is not generated
within 2 sec after the copy start key (2
sided) is turned on.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Code
Cause
E053
•Horizontal registration paper
edge sensor (PS16; faulty)
•Horizontal registration motor
(M5; faulty)
•Motor driver 1 PCB (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
The horizontal registration paper edge
signal (HRPD) is not generated within
10 sec after the power switch is turned
on.
E060
•Wire cleaner home position
switch (MSW1; faulty)
•Wire cleaner rear position
switch (MSW2; faulty)
•Cleaner motor (M11; faulty)
•Motor driver 2 PCB (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
The other switch is not turned on within
20 sec after the cleaner is passed
through the first switch detecting range.
•Scanner home position
sensor (PS1; faulty)
•Scanning motor (M2; faulty)
•Motor driver 1 PCB (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
•The scanner home position signal
(SCHP) does not go ‘1’ within 10 sec
after the power switch or the door
switch has been turned on.
•The scanner took 10 sec or more to
make a round trip (SCFW + SCRV).
•Scanner home position
sensor (PS1; faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
The scanner home position signal
(SCHP) has occurred for 2 pulses or
more within 0.5 sec when the scanner
motor turned on.
•Scanner home position
sensor (PS1; faulty)
•Scanning motor (M2; faulty)
•Motor driver 1 PCB (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
The scanner home position signal does
not turn off after the scanner has started
to move forward.
•Lens home position sensor
(PS19; faulty)
•Lens drive motor (M3; faulty)
•Motor driver 1 PCB (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
•The lens home position signal (LHP) is
not generated within 9 sec after the
lens motor starts to rotate when the
power switch or the door switch has
been turned on.
•The lens home position signal (LHP)
does to turn off within 1 sec after it has
been generated.
•Scanning lamp
•Lamp regulator (faulty)
•DC controller PCB
The scanning lamp does not turn on
within 0.5 sec after the DC controller
PCB has generated the scanning lamp
ON signal.
When an error associated with ‘E220’ is
detected, the copier turns off the power
switch in 2 sec and then turns off all
power supplies.
E202
E203
E204
E210
E220
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Description
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-181
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Cause
Description
•Blank shutter motor (M8;
faulty)
•Blank shutter home position
sensor (PS20; faulty)
•Motor driver 2 PCB (faulty)
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
•The blank shutter home position signal
(BLHP) is not generated within 7 sec
after the power switch has been turned
on.
•The blank shutter home position signal
(BLHP) does not turn off within 1 sec
after it has been generated.
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
An error has occurred in the
communication between the
microprocessor master (IC116) and the
microprocessor slave (IC104).
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
IC117 on the DC controller PCB cannot
be initialized at time of power-on.
•DC controller PCB (faulty)
IC117 on the DC controller PCB has
gone out of order at time of power-on.
Feeder
•DF control PCB (faulty)
•Connector (poor contact)
The communication IC on the DF
controller PCB has gone out of order.
E716
Pedestal
•Pedestal controller PCB
(faulty)
•Connector (poor contact)
The communication IC on the pedestal
controller PCB has gone out of order. A
communication error has occurred.
E800
•Auto power-off function
(open circuit)
•DC contorller PCB (faulty)
An open circuit in the auto power off
circuit has been detected.
(Note 1)
Code
E224
E240
E710
E711
E712
Note:
1. When the self diagnosis mechanism has detected an error, you may reset the
copier by turning off its switch once.
This, however, does not apply to ‘E000’,‘E001’,‘E002’,‘E003’ and ‘E800’. To reset
these error codes, select No.401 in service mode [4], and press the OK key. This
arrangement is adopted to prevent the user from casually resetting the copier
when the cause of the error is an open circuit in the thermistor, thereby protecting
the rollers inside the fixing assembly against heat damage.
2. If ‘E000’,‘E001’,‘E002’,‘E003’, or ‘E004’ is detected, the copier forces off the
power switch in about 2 sec.
11-182
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
B. Pedestal Self Diagnosis
Code
E901
Cause
•Pedestal motor (M1; faulty)
•Pedestal controller PCB
(faulty)
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Timing
The motor clock signal is not input
within 1 sec after pedestal motor drive
signal has been generated.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-183
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
C. RDF/ADF Self Diagnosis
Code
E400
Timing
Cause
•Communication (error; data,
with copier)
The communication with the copier has
been disrupted for 5 sec or more.
(Check are made at all times.)
RDF
•Pick-up motor (fails to rotate)
•Pick-up roller sensor (faulty)
•A flag is attached to the spindle of the
pick-up motor, and the rotation of the
pick-up motor is monitored in reference
to the flag blocking the pick-up roller
sensor.
E401
Pick-up roller sensor does not turn
on/off twice or more within 1 sec.
E402
•Belt motor (fails to rotate)
•Belt motor clock sensor
(faulty)
The number of belt clock pulses within
200 msec is below a specific value.
E403
RDF
•Feeding motor (fails to
rotate)
•Feeding motor clock sensor
(faulty)
The number of feeding motor clock
pulses within 200 msec is below a
specific value.
E404
ADF
•Delivery motor (fails to
rotate)
•Delivery motor clock sensor
(faulty)
The number of delivery motor clock
pluses within 200 msec is below a
specific value.
E411
•Original detection (faulty)
•Registration sensor (faulty)
•Original end sensor (faulty)
The sensor output is 2.3 V or more in
the absence of paper.
Note:
When the self diagnosis mechanism has detected an error, you can reset the copier
by turning off the power switch once.
You may continue to make copies even when the DF is out of order; lift the DF, and
place the original on the copyboard.
11-184
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
D. Sorter Self Diagnosis
Code
E500
E510
E530
Cause
•CPU or communication IC
on sorter controller (faulty)
An error has occurred in the
communication between the sorter and
the copier.
•Feeder motor (fails to rotate)
The clock signal from the motor remains
off for 250 msec.
•Stapler guide bar swing
motor (fails to rotate)
The home position sensor does not turn
off when 2560 pulses of the motor drive
signal have been generated.
•Stapler unit swing motor
(fails to rotate)
•The stapler unit swing sensor does not
turn off within 500 msec after the motor
drive signal has been generated.
•The stapler unit swing sensor does not
turn on within 1000 msec after it has
turned off.
•Bin shift motor (fails to
rotate)
•The lead cam home position sensor
does not turn off within 2000 msec after
the motor drive signal has been
generated.
•The lead cam home position sensor
does not turn on within 2000 msec after
it has turned off.
•Bin motor (faulty)
•Lead cam drive gear (wrong
installation)
The lead cam position sensor does not
turn on within 1.0 sec after it has turned
off.
E531
E540
E541
Timing
n
1.
q
w
e
Resetting the Errors
If the copier is in the middle of operation,
It turns on the “Jam indicator”.
Turn off and on the power switch removing the jam.
The copier runs a self check. It is reset if the result is good. If the result is not good,
it enters down state*, indicating ‘E5XX’; on the control panel.
2. If the copier is not operating,
q Jam indicator indicates.
w When the power has been turnd off and then on again, it runs a self check. it is reset
if the result is good. If the result is not good, it enters down state*, indicating ‘E5XX’;
on the control panel.
• Down State
q It indicates ‘E5XX’.
w When the sorter has been detached**, it is ready for operation unless a mode
requiring the sorter is selected.
n The copier will be reset if the result of a self check after the power has been turned
off and then on again is good even in down state. (This is with the sorter connected
to the copier.)
* State in which an error code is indicated.
** Turn off the joint sensor. The connector may remain connected.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-185
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..........A-1
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ..A-2
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM....A-5
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
D. PEDESTAL CONTROLLER ..........A-7
E. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST .................A-9
F. SOLVENTS AND OILS..................A-10
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART
• A4, 2 Copies, Continuous
Power switch
COPY START key
ON 175 C/347F 190 C/374F ON
WMUP WMUPR
STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
AER
5sec
Main motor (M1)
Fixing main heater (H1)
Fixing sub heater (H2)
Pre-exposure lamp (LA2)
Primary / Transfer corona bias
Developing bias DC component
Developing bias AC component
Static eliminator / Fixing roller bias
Blank shutter solenoid (SL5)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Forward
Scanner motor (M2)
Reverse
Scanner home position sensor (PS1)
Grid bias
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch (CL2)
Cassette 1 pick-up release solenoid
(SL1)
Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor
(PS7)
Vertical path roller 1 clutch (CL5)
Pre-registration paper sensor (PS9)
Registration clutch (CL1)
Separation sensor (PS10)
Delivery sensor (PS11)
Delivery motor (M6)
Cleaning belt solenoid (SL4)
Total copy counter (CNT1)
Scanner cooling fan (FM1)
Exhaust fan 1 (FM2)
Full speed
Half speed
Exhaust fan 2 (FM3)
Feeding fan (FM4)
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5min
A-1
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS
What follows below is a list of signals and abbreviations used in the chapters of the manual and circuit diagrams.
The abbreviations within parentheses represent analog signals, which cannot be expressed in terms of ‘1’ or ‘0’.
1. Signals
ACON
AE
AEREF
BLA
BLB
BLHLD
BLHP
BLSD
C1LTD
C1LTP
C1PD
C1PUCD
C1PW
C1RSD
C1SZ1
C1SZ2
C2LTD
C2LTP
C2PD
C2PUCD
C2PW
C2RSD
C2SZ1
C2SZ2
CBCC
CBSD
CL1D
CL2D
CL3D
CL4D
CLA
CLB
CLCCW
CLCW
CNT2D
CNTD
CNTSL1
CNTSL2
DCBC
DEL
DEOP
DEPRL
DLP
DMA
DMB
DMCLK
DMD
DMI1
A-2
DEVELOPING AC BIAS ON command
AE SENSOR OUTPUT signal
AE SENSOR REFERENCE signal
BLANK SHUTTER MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command A
BLANK SHUTTER MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command B
BLANK SHUTTER MOTOR HOLD command
BLANK SHUTTER HOME POSITION signal
BLANK SHUTTER SOLENOID DRIVE command
CASSETTE 1 LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE command
CASSETTE 1 LIFTER POSITION signal
CASSETTE 1 PAPER DETECTION signal
CASSETTE 1 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
CASSETTE 1 PAPER WIDTH SIZE signal
CASSETTE 1 PICK-UP RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE command
CASSETTE 1 PAPER LENGTH SIZE signal 1
CASSETTE 1 PAPER LENGTH SIZE signal 2
CASSETTE 2 LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE command
CASSETTE 2 LIFTER POSITION signal
CASSETTE 2 PAPER DETECTION signal
CASSETTE 2 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
CASSETTE 2 PAPER WIDTH SIZE signal
CASSETTE 2 PICK-UP RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE command
CASSETTE 2 PAPER LENGTH SIZE signal 1
CASSETTE 2 PAPER LENGTH SIZE signal 2
COPY BOARD COVER CLOSED signal
CLEANING BELT SOLENOID DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 3 DRIVE CLUTCH DRIVE command
DECK PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
DECK VERTICAL PATH ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command
DECK LIFTER DRIVE CLUTCH DRIVE command
CLEANER MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command A
CLEANER MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command B
CLEANER MOTOR COUNTERCLOCKWISE command
CLEANER MOTOR CLOCKWISE command
COPY COUNTER DRIVE command 2
TOTAL COUNTER DRIVE command 1
COUNTER SOLENOID 1 DRIVE command
COUNTER SOLENOID 2 DRIVE command
DC BIAS CONTROL command
DECK LIFTER POSITION signal
DECK OPEN DETECTION signal
DECK PICK-UP RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE command
DECK LIFTER UPPER LIMIT POSITION signal
DELIVERY MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command A
DELIVERY MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command B
DELIVERY MOTOR CLOCK command
DELIVERY MOTOR DRIVE command
DELIVERY MOTOR CURRENT CONTROL command 1
DMI2
DMRON
DPD
DPON
DVRPD
EF1D
EF2D
FFD
FM5LOCK
GRCONT
HMD
HRA
HRB
HRCD
HRCLK
HRD
HRHP
HRPD
HRRON
HRSD
LDT
LEA
LEB
LEHLD
LFA
LFB
LFCD
LFCLK
LFD
LFRON
LFSD
LHP
LINT
LMPON
MFCD
MFPD
MFPUSD
MFPW
MHRD
MMCLK
MMD
MMLOCK
MSSRD
PDP1
PDP2
PDP3
PDP4
PDP5
DELIVERY MOTOR CURRENT CONTROL command 2
DELIVERY MOTOR ROTATION command
DECK PARER DETECTION signal
DEVELOPING DC BIAS ON command
DECK VERTICAL PATH ROLLER PARER DETECTION signal
EXHAUST FAN 1 DRIVE commnad
EXHAUST FAN 2 DRIVE commnad
FEEDING FAN DRIVE command
POWER SUPPLY PCB COOLING FAN LOCK signal
GRID POTENTIAL CONTROL command
HOPPER MOTOR DRIVE command
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command A
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command B
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE command
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR CLOCK signal
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR DRIVE command
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION ROLLER HOME POSITION signal
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR ROTATION command
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION SOLENOID DRIVE command
LAMP ON DETECTION signal
LENS MOTOR DRIVE PULSE commnad A
LENS MOTOR DRIVE PULSE commnad B
LENS MOTOR HOLD command
LOWER FEEDER MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command A
LOWER FEEDER MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command B
LOWER FEEDER OUTLET CLUTCH DRIVE command
LOWER FEEDER MOTOR CLOCK signal
LOWER FEEDER MOTOR DRIVE command
LOWER FEEDER MOTOR ROTATION comannd
LOWER FEEDER FLAPPER SOLENOID DRIVE command
LENS HOME POSITION signal
LIGHT INTENSITY signal (analog)
LAMP ON command
MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal
MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE command
MULTIFEEDER PAPER WIDTH SIZE signal
MAIN HEATER DRIVE command
MAIN MOTOR CLOCK signal
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE command
MAIN MOTOR LOCK singal
MAIN SSR DRIVE signal
PAPER DETECTION signal 1
PAPER DETECTION signal 2
PAPER DETECTION signal 3
PAPER DETECTION signal 4
PAPER DETECTION signal 5
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
PDP6
PDP7
PDP8
PEXP
PS2D
PTON
PWOFF
RDC
RDOD
RGCD
SCA
SCB
SCCLK
SCFD
SCHP
SCM1
SCM2
SCMD
SCRET
SCRON
SCVREF
SERVICE
SFON
SHRD
SIZE0
SIZE1
SIZE1
SIZE2
SIZE2
SIZE3
SPCH
SSSRD
TEP
TH1
VR1CD
VR2CD
WCHP
WCRP
ZRCS
PAPER DETECTION signal 6
PAPER DETECTION signal 7
PAPER DETECTION signal 8
PRE-EXPOSURE LAMP LIGHT command
VERTICAL PASS ROLLER 3 PAPER DETECTION signal
PRIMARY/TRANSFER CORONA CURRENT ON command
POWER SWITCH OFF command
RIGHT DOOR CLOSED signal
RIGHT DOOR OPEN signal
REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE command
SCANNING MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command A
SCANNING MOTOR DRIVE PULSE command B
SCANNING MOTOR CLOCK PULSE command
SCANNER COOLING FAN DRIVE command
SCANNER HOME POSITION signal
EXCITATION MODE command 1
EXCITATION MODE command 2
SCANNING MOTOR DRIVE command
PHASE RETURN command
SCANNING MOTOR ROTATION command
REFERENCE VOLTAGE command
SERVICE MODE SWITCH signal
STATIC ELIMINATOR/FIXING ROLLER BIAS ON command
SUB HERTER DRIVE command
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION signal 0
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION signal 1
DECK SIZE signal 1 (Pedestal)
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION signal 2
DECK SIZE signal 2 (Pedestal)
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION signal 3
STATIC ELIMINATOR VOLTAGE LEVEL SWITCH command
SUB SSR DRIVE signal
TONER EMPTY signal
FIXING THERMISTOR signal
VERTICAL PASS ROLLER 1 CLUTCH DRIVE command
VERTICAL PASS ROLLER 2 CLUTCH DRIVE command
CORONA WIRE CLEANER HOME POSITION signal
CORONA WIRE CLEANER REAR POSITION signal
ZERO CROSS DETECTION signal
2 Abbreviations
AER
INTR
LSTR
SCFW
SCRV
STBY
WMUP
WMUPR
AE (MEASUREMENT) ROTATION
INITIAL ROTATION
LAST ROTATION
SCANNER FORWARD
SCANNER REVERSE
STANDBY
WARM UP
WARM UP ROTATION
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-3
A5 Not available
A6 Not available
A7 Not available
A-4 / A-8
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX
E. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST
No.
1
Tool name
Door switch
Tool No.
TKN-0093
Shape
Description
Code*
A
Point of use
Front
door
2
Mirror
positioning
Tool
(front, rear)
3
Spring gauge
4
Cleaning oil
FY9-3002-000
B
Use it to adjust the
distance between
No.1 and No.2
mirrors
CK-0054
B
• For adjusting lens
drive belt; 0 to
1500g
TKN-0464
A
For cleaning the
fixing roller (10
packs/box)
TKN-0464-000
CLEANNING OIL
HUILE DE NETTOYAGE
CANON INC. JAPAN / JAPON
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-9
APPENDIX
F. SOLVENTS AND OILS
No.
1
Description
Use
Ethyl alcohol
(Ethanol)
Isopropyl
alcohol
(Isopropanol)
2
3
MEK
Heat-resistant
grease
Composition
Remarks
Cleaning:
e.g., glass, plastic,
rubber parts;
external covers
C HO
(CHZ ) CHOH
• Do not bring near fire.
• Procure localy.
• Isopropyl alcohol may
be substituted.
Cleaning:
e.g., metal; oil or
toner dirt
CH COC H
• Do not bring near fire.
• Procure locally.
Lubricating:
fixing drive
assemblies
Lithium soap
(mineral oil family)
2
5
3 2
3
2
3
Methlylethyl
ketone
• CK-0427 (500 g/can)
Molybdenum
bisulfate
4
Lubricating oil
Lubricating:
scanner rail,
spring clutch
Mineral oil
(paraffin family)
• CK-0451 (100 cc)
5
Lubricating oil
Lubricating:
pick-up assembly
roller bushing
(FS2-1005-000)
Mineral oil
(paraffin family)
• CK-0524 (100 cc)
6
Lubricating oil
Lubricating:
drive and friction
parts
Silicone oil
• CK-05512 (20 g)
A-10
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CANON NP6330 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPT. 1
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIV.
CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (MAY 1997) [30359/10317]
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302, Japan
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
0597S3.02-1
This publication is printed on
70% reprocessed paper.